Home

Programming and Operating Manual (Milling)

1. A 2 Select a step of the machining operation with cursor keys Start 3 Press this softkey to start the onboard assistant assistant ere 4 Press this softkey to enter the next page Beate 5 Press this softkey to enter the previous page Exit 6 Press either key to return to the main screen of the operation wizard FUNCTION T Press one of the following five operating area keys to exit the main screen of the operation wizard A 11 Editing Chinese characters The program editor and PLC alarm text editor both allow you to edit the simplified Chinese characters on the Chinese variant of the HMI Editing simplified Chinese characters Press the key and a key to switch the editor on or off Press this key to toggle between different input methods Press the numeric keys 1 to 9 on the PPU to select the desired characters Programming and Operating Manual Milling 232 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 Example of editing simplified Chinese WN ay Lay AHR AIA DIRI NTR 12 03 11 06 27 38 BFacect MASE 0 12703711 07 35 14 U MFF BAR Structure of editor che ooo i eee Fay Fik4 aS 7 6 ikl ya FF CHE Available characters Input field Press the cursor key on the PPU to select Active input method other characters A 12 Pocket calculator eS The calculator function can be activated from any other operating area using this key on the PPU except in MDA mode VW X EEA NC
2. Basic offset 8 6866 rmnm Save in GS4 O Heasuring dir 0 Radius B pag mm Distance 6 088 nn y y Offset Aq H Hgy mm H 12 Press this vertical softkey The work offset of the X axis is calculated automatically and Set Wo displayed in the offset field 13 Repeat the above operations to measure and set the work offsets in the Y and Z axes respectively Rectangular workpiece measurement e Select the desired operating area M MACHINE NNN 2 Switch to JOG control mode UL JOG OF Heas 3 Open the lower level menu for workpiece measurement work E 4 Press this vertical softkey to open the window for measurement of a rectangular workpiece Programming and Operating Manual Milling 26 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 ca N x lt Save Pi Set WO Traverse the tool which has been measured previously in the direction of the orange arrow P1 shown in the measuring window in order to scratch the workpiece edge with the tool tip Workpiece measurement center of rectangle Work offset G54 O Offset Aq 68 668 mm Ya 6 6640 mm Press this vertical softkey to save the tool position P1 in the coordinate system Repeat Steps 5 and 6 to save the other three positions P2 P3 and P4 Press this vertical softkey to save the work offsets in the X and Y axes after all four positions are measured Circular workpiece measurement 8 Heas Save Pi Set WO Ulp 1 Select the
3. as with M3 as with M4 G332 Thread interpolation retraction Dwell time 2 Special motions non modal G63 Tapping with compensating chuck Tapping with compensating chuck G74 Reference point approach G332 Z K Rigid tapping e g in Z axis retraction motion sign of pitch as for G331 G4 F separate block F Time in seconds or G4 S separate block S in spindle revolutions G63 Z F S M G74 X 0 Y 0 Z 0 separate block machine axis identifier G75 X 0 Y 0 Z 0 separate block machine axis identifier G147 SAR Approach with a straight line G147 G41 DISR FAD F X Y G148 SAR Retract with a straight line G148 G40 DISR FAD F X Y G247 SAR Approach with a quadrant G247 G41 DISRe FAD F X Y G248 SAR Retract with a quadrant G248 G40 DISRe FAD F X Y Z G347 SAR Approach with a semicircle G347 G41 DISRe FAD F X Y Z G348 SAR Retract with a semicircle G348 G40 DISR DISCL FAD F X Y Z TRANS Translation programmable 3 Write memory non modal TRANS X Y Z separate block ROT RPL rotation in the current plane G17 to G19 separate block SCALE X Y Z scaling factor in the direction of the specified axis separate block MIRROR XO coordinate axis whose direction is changed separate block ATRANS X Y Z separate block AROT RPL
4. Opens a lower level menu for cutting edge settings For more information see Section cutting edge 218 Displays and modifies the work offsets Displays and modifies the R variables Gd Removes the currently selected tool from the tool list Configures and displays lists of setting data Searches for your desired tool with the tool number Programming and Operating Manual Milling 30 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 4 Part programming The SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED control system can store a maximum of 300 part programs which include those created by the control system for certain functions such as MM TSM and so on Softkey functions P Pressing this key on the PPU allows you to open the following window F PROGRAM MANAGER ANN E z ity 735513249 Nane Type Length Date Tine ATE 9 New Search A Hark D o2 E Paste Undo NC MPF Free 1 25 MB E INPUT key to open file DEL pe key to delete file gt me Bee O 0 Stores the NC programs for subsequent operations Executes the selected file No editing is allowed in the execution process Manages and transfers the manufacturer cycles Creates new files or directories Reads in out files via the USB drive and executes the Searches for files program from the external storage media Reads in out files via the RS232 interface and executes the program from the external PC PG Selects all files for the subsequent operations
5. Dwell time in seconds G4 S Dwell time in spindle revolutions Programming and Operating Manual Milling 86 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 Programming example N5 Gl F200 2 50 S300 M3 Feed F spindle speed S N10 G4 F2 5 Dwell time 2 5 seconds N20 270 N30 G4 S30 Dwelling 30 revolutions of the spindle corresponds at S 300 rpm and 100 speed override to t 0 1 min N40 X60 Feed and spindle speed remain effective M30 Note G4 S is only possible if a controlled spindle is available if the speed specifications are also programmed via S 8 8 Spindle movements 8 8 1 Gear stages Function Up to 5 gear stages can be configured for a spindle for speed torque adaptation The selection of a gear stage takes place in the program via M commands see Section Miscellaneous function M Page 103 e M40 Automatic gear stage selection e M41 to M45 Gear stage 1 to 5 8 8 2 Spindle speed S directions of rotation Functionality The spindle speed is programmed in revolutions per minute under the address S provided that the machine possesses a controlled spindle The direction of rotation and the start or end of the movement are specified via M commands also see Section Miscellaneous function M Page 103 M3 Spindle clockwise M4 Spindle counter clockwise M5 Spindle stop Note For integer S values the decimal point can be omitted e g S270 Information If you write M3 or M4 in a block with axis m
6. Copies the selected file s to the clipboard Pastes the selected file s from the clipboard to the Reads in out files via the Ethernet interface and executes the program from an external PC PG Backs up manufacturer files current directory Backs up user files Restores the deleted file s Shows the recently accessed files 6 Opens the second level softkeys for example Rename _ P e ele Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 31 4 1 Operating sequence T i PROGRAM MANAGER NC NC l 3 Hew Hew 4 file 5 Yi 6 OK 32 Creating a part program Select the desired operating area Enter the folder for the new program to be created If you desire to directly create a new program file press this softkey and proceed to Step 4 Note If you desire to create a new program directory first press this softkey and proceed as follows before you go to Step 4 Hew directory Press this softkey to activate the window for creating a new directory Enter a desired name for the new directory Pi Press this softkey to confirm your entry OK A v Select the new directory with the cursor keys FA gt Press this softkey to activate the window for creating a new program Press this key on the PPU to open the directory Enter the name of the new program If you desire to create a main program it is unnecessary to enter the file extension
7. HPF SIEMENS Hore Reset ROY Position Repos offset T F S 0 BA 6 666 mm a COU 0 eae a MZ1 OPO Cee ecore a 50 mm min G1 G566 6 T S M Tool change E sj Ea soo z Delete Spindle speed a 5 E _ cost Spindle direction oO Activate WO QO al E E zl EE Other H function Ey x 2 Press CYCLE START to activate above functions For calculating the four basic arithmetic operations are available as well as the functions sine cosine square root A bracket function is provided to calculate nested terms The bracket depth is unlimited squaring and If the input field is already occupied by a value the function will accept this value into the input line of the pocket calculator Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 233 C Pressing this softkey empties the input line of the calculator Delete After inputting a desired arithmetic statement in the input line of the calculator pressing this key starts the E calculation The result is displayed in the pocket calculator Selecting this softkey enters the result in the input field at the current cursor position and closes the Accept pocket calculator automatically Pressing this softkey aborts the calculation result if any and exits the pocket calculator Back Characters that may be entered sae Basic arithmetic operations Sine function The X value in de
8. Operating sequence 1 Select the desired operating area PROGRAM MANAGER 2 Enter the desired program folder 3 Select a program file and press this key to open it in the program editor 4 Press this softkey to open the contour editor window 5 Use the cursor keys on the PPU to switch between different input fields ARTERE 6 Press this softkey or the following key to toggle between the selections native Enter the desired values as required You can also define a pole for contour programming in polar coordinates by pressing the following softkey Pole The pole can also be defined or redefined at a later time The programming of the polar coordinates always refers to the pole that was defined last SEENE T Save the settings for the start point elenent Pressing this softkey cancels the settings and exits the contour editor Cancel Programming and Operating Manual Milling 240 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 A 14 3 Programming contour element Functionality jceept Once you have defined the contour start point press this softkey and you can begin programming E lenent the individual contour elements from the main screen shown below WA S J X ESS Start point Selected plane Programming plane 6170 Start point x 8 060 abs Y 8 888 abs Approach start pt GA O Free text input wep Mesto ZOOM Opens the window for programming a vertical straight Accesses more softkeys for example
9. Programming example Polar coordinates Starting point N1 G17 X Y plane N5 G90 GO X30 Y40 Starting point circle for N10 N10 G111 X40 Y33 Pole circle center N20 G2 RP 12 207 AP 21 Polar specifications 8 4 2 Circular interpolation via intermediate point CIP Functionality If you know three contour points of the circle instead of center point or radius or aperture angle then it is advantageous to use the CIP function The direction of the circle results here from the position of the intermediate point between starting and end points The intermediate point is written according to the following axis assignment I1 for the X axis J1 for the Y axis K1 for the Z axis CIP remains active until canceled by another instruction from this G group GO G1 G2 Note The configured dimensional data G90 or G91 applies to the end point and the intermediate point Programming and Operating Manual Milling 76 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 See the following illustration for circle with end point and intermediate point specification using the example of G90 Y ay WY Intermediate point I J1 Programming example N5 G90 X30 Y40 Starting point circle for N10 N10 CIP X50 Y40 11 40 J1 45 End point and intermediate point 8 4 3 Circle with tangential transition CT Functionality With CT and the programmed end point in the current plane G17 through G19 a circle is generated which is conne
10. R13 equals sine of 25 3 degrees N40 R14 R1 R2 R3 Multiplication and division take precedence over addition or subtraction R14 R1 R2 R3 N50 R14 R3 R2 R1 Result the same as block N40 N60 R1L5 SORT R1 R1 R2 R2 Meaning N70 R1 R1 The new Rl is the negative old R1 Programming example Assign R parameters to the axes R1 40 R2 10 R3 20 R4 45 R5 30 N10 G1 G90 X R1 Z R2 F300 Separate blocks traversing blocks N20 Z R3 N30 X R4 N40 Z SIN 25 3 R5 With arithmetic operations M30 Programming example Indirect programming N10 R1 5 Assigning R1 directly value 5 integer N20 GO X R R1 27 123 Indirectly assign R5 the value 27 123 M30 8 13 2 Local User Data LUD Functionality The operator programmer user can define his her own variable in the program from various data types LUD Local User Data These variables are only available in the program in which they were defined The definition takes place immediately at the start of the program and can also be associated with a value assignment at the same time Otherwise the starting value is zero The name of a variable can be defined by the programmer The naming is subject to the following rules e A maximum of 31 characters can be used e tis imperative to use letters for the first two characters the remaining characters can be either letters underscore or digits e Do not use a name already used in the control system NC addresses keywords names of pr
11. The cycle program created as a section of the main program must be stored after the M30 command If you desire to recompile the cycle press this softkey Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 9 6 4 Milling a rectangular spigot CYCLE76 Programming CYCLE76 RTP RFP SDIS DP DPR LENG WID CRAD PA PO STA MID FAL FALD FFP1 FFD CDIR VARI AP1 AP2 Parameters Retraction plane absolute DP REAL Final drilling depth absolute o DPR REAL Final drilling depth relative to the reference plane enter without sign REAL PO REAL Reference point of spigot ordinate absolute lt Milling direction enter without sign Values 0 Down cut milling 1 Conventional milling 2 With G2 independent of spindle direction 3 With G3 Machining type Values 1 Roughing to final machining allowance 2 Finishing allowance X Y Z 0 Length of blank spigot Width of blank spigot Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 177 Function Use this cycle to machine rectangular spigots in the machining plane For finishing a face cutter is required The depth infeed is always carried out in the position upstream of the semi circle style approach to the contour Sequence Position reached prior to cycle start The starting point is a position in the positive range of the abscissa with the approach semi circle and the programmed raw dimension
12. e Incremental dimension G91 modally effective applies for all axes in the block until it is revoked by G90 in a following block e Incremental dimension X IC value only this value applies exclusively for the stated axis and is not influenced by G90 G91 This is possible for all axes and also for SPOS SPOSA spindle positionings and interpolation parameters J K e Inch dimension G70 applies for all linear axes in the block until revoked by G71 in a following block e Metric dimension G71 applies for all linear axes in the block until revoked by G70 in a following block e Inch dimension as G70 however G700 applies also for feedrate and length related setting data e Metric dimension as G71 however G710 applies also for feedrate and length related setting data e Diameter programming DIAMON on e Diameter programming DIAMOF off Diameter programming DIAM90 for traversing blocks with G90 Radius programming for traversing blocks with G91 8 2 2 Plane selection G17 to G19 Functionality To assign for example tool radius and tool length compensations a plane with two axes is selected from the three axes X Y and Z In this plane you can activate a tool radius compensation For drill and cutter the length compensation length1 is assigned to the axis standing vertically on the selected plane It is also possible to use a 3 dimensional length compensation for special cases Another influence of plane selection is describ
13. rotation in the G N oO Fixed point approach ROT Rotation programmable SCALE Programmable scaling factor MIRROR ATRANS Additive translation programming AROT Additive programmable rotation Programmable mirroring current plane G17 to G19 separate block Programming and Operating Manual Milling 60 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 NO Value assignments ASCALE Additive programmable scaling factor ASCALE X Y Z scaling factor in the direction of the specified axis separate block AMIRROR _ Additive programmable mirroring AMIRROR XO coordinate axis whose direction is changed separate block G110 Pole specification relative to the last G110 X Y Pole programmed setpoint position specification Cartesian e g for G17 G110 RP AP Pole specification polar separate block G111 Pole specification relative to origin of G111 X Y Pole current workpiece coordinate system specification Cartesian e g for G17 G111 RP AP Pole specification polar separate block G112 Pole specification relative to the last valid G112 X Y Pole POLE specification Cartesian e g for G17 G112 RP AP Pole specification polar separate block 6 Plane selection modally G17 Vertical axis on this effective plane is tool length Pe Vizplane 7 Tool radius compensation a Settable work offset OFF 8 Settable work offset MOTAN GNEGIVE G53
14. 1 The definition of the 1st 2nd and 3rd axes depends upon the current plane selected Function The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed and feedrate to the entered final thread depth CYCLE84 can be used to make tapped holes without compensating chuck For tapping with compensating chuck a separate cycle CYCLE840 is provided Note CYCLE84 can be used if the spindle to be used for the boring operation is technically able to be operated in the position controlled spindle operation Sequence Position reached prior to cycle start The drilling position is the position in the two axes of the selected plane The cycle creates the following sequence of motions e Approach of the reference plane brought forward by the safety clearance by using GO e Oriented spindle stop value in the parameter POSS and switching the spindle to axis mode e Tapping to final drilling depth and speed SST e Dwell time at thread depth parameter DTB e Retraction to the reference plane brought forward by the safety clearance speed SST1 and direction reversal e Retraction to the retraction plane with GO spindle mode is reinitiated by reprogramming the spindle speed active before the cycle was called and the direction of rotation programmed under SDAC Explanation of the parameters For the parameters RTP RFP SDIS DP DPR refer to Section Drilling centering CYCLE81 Page 126 o gt GO gt G331 gt G332 gt G4
15. 9 3 Graphical cycle support in the program editor The program editor in the control system provides programming support to add cycle calls to the program and to enter parameters Function The cycle support consists of three components 1 Cycle selection 2 Input screens for parameter assignment 3 Help screen for each cycle to be found in the input screen Operating the cycle support To add a cycle call to the program proceed as described below Ty 1 Select the desired operating area 2 Select a cycle type with the corresponding horizontal softkey to open the lower level vertical softkey y Drill bar until the desired input screen form with the help display appears on the screen a Hill 3 Enter the values directly numerical values or indirectly R parameters for example R27 or expressions consisting of R parameters for example R27 10 If numerical values are entered then the control system automatically performs a check to see whether the value lies within the permitted range O 4 Use this key to select values for some parameters that may have only a few values for selection Hodal 5 For drilling cycles it is also possible to call a cycle modally with this key To deselect the modal call call move the cursor to the next blank line of the program and press the softkey below Deselect nodal 6 Press this softkey to confirm your input To cancel the input press the softkey below OK Canc
16. Compensation to the left of the contour transition circle N20 X40 Y80 N30 G2 X65 Y55 IO J 25 N40 G1 X95 NSO G2 X110 Y70 I15 JO N60 Gl X105 Y45 N70 X110 Y35 N80 X90 N90 X65 Y15 N100 X40 Y40 N110 X30 Y60 N120 G40 X5 Y6O0 Terminate compensation mode N130 GO Z50 M2 Programming and Operating Manual Milling 102 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 8 11 Miscellaneous function M Functionality The miscellaneous function M initiates switching operations such as Coolant ON OFF and other functions A small part of M functions have already been assigned a fixed functionality by the CNC manufacturer The functions not yet assigned fixed functions are reserved for free use of the machine manufacturer Note An overview of the M miscellaneous functions used and reserved in the control system can be found in Section Listof instructions Page 258 Programming M Max 5 M functions per block Effect Activation in blocks with axis movements If the functions MO M1 M2 are contained in a block with traversing movements of the axes these M functions become effective after the traversing movements The functions M3 M4 and M5 are output to the internal interface PLC before the traversing movements The axis movements only begin once the controlled spindle has ramped up for M3 M4 For M5 however the spindle standstill is not waited for The axis movements already begin before the spindle stops default setting The re
17. Length 1 in Z Radius in X Y Radius G18 Length 1 in Y _ Radius in Z X G19 Length 1 in X Radius in Y Z Length 1 8 10 4 Selecting the tool radius compensation G41 G42 Functionality The control system is working with tool radius compensation in the selected plane G17 to G19 A tool with a corresponding D number must be active The tool radius compensation is activated by G41 G42 The control system automatically calculates the required equidistant tool paths for the programmed contour for the respective current tool radius Programming and Operating Manual Milling 96 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 See the following illustration for tool radius compensation Milling tool at equal distance to the contour Programming G41 X Y Tool radius compensation left of contour G42 X Y Tool radius compensation right of contour Note The selection can only be made for linear interpolation GO G1 Program both axes of the plane e g with G17 X Y If you only specify one axis the second axis is automatically completed with the last programmed value See the following illustration for compensation to the right left of the contour Milling tool at equal distance to the contour Starting the compensation The tool travels in a straight line directly to the contour and is positioned perpendicular to the path tangent at the starting point of the contour Select the starting point such that a colli
18. Parameters for face milling Face milling 1 2 Use this softkey to confirm your settings The system now automatically creates the part program Press this key on the MCP to run the part program inish allowance depth On 1 D 1 3 Work offset G54 4 RTP 5 666nn 5 SDIS 16 668 mm 1 1 6 F cA gg nn min 7 5 S66 666 rpr 8 Direction H3 a Hach Rough 1 8 AG 1 666 abs Y 1 860 abs 24 1 666 abs Al 6 166 inc v1 8 100 inc 5 9 Zi A 188 inc DaY A 188 inc DZ 8 166 inc uz Sn inc Tool number Direction of spindle rotation Cutting edge number Machining type selection roughing or finishing Work offset to be activated X Y Z position of the blank 4 Retraction plane 1 Cutting dimension in the X Y Z direction specified in increments Safety distance 2 Cutting length in the X Y Z direction specified in increments relative to the workpiece edge Path feedrate 3 Stock allowance in the Z direction Spindle speed A 8 3 Setting the JOG data Operating sequence 1 Select the desired operating area M MACHINE NW 2 Switch to JOG mode VL JOG 3 Press this horizontal softkey to open the following window LY Sett es JOG Feedrate Variable increment ef i Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 Settings NATE mm min A inc Enter values in the input fields and confirm your entries 229 REER 5 If necessary press this
19. Pole coordinates in the current workpiece coordinate system N40 G1 RP 50 AP 30 F1000 N50 G110 X 10 Y20 N60 G1 RP 30 AP 45 F1000 N70 G112 X40 Y20 New pole relative to the last pole as a polar coordinate N80 Gl RP 30 AP 135 Polar coordinate M30 Traversing with polar coordinates The positions programmed using polar coordinates can also be traversed as positions specified with Cartesian coordinates as follows e GO linear interpolation with rapid traverse e G1 linear interpolation with feedrate e G2 circular interpolation CW G3 circular posers CCW See also Sections Linear interpolation Linear interpolation Page 69 and Circular interpolation Circular interpolation Page 72 Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 55 8 2 6 Programmable work offset TRANS ATRANS Functionality The programmable work offset can be used e for recurring shapes arrangements in various positions on the workpiece e when selecting a new reference point for the dimensioning e asa stock allowance when roughing This results in the current workpiece coordinate system The rewritten dimensions use this as a reference The offset is possible in all axes Programming TRANS X Y Z programmable offset deletes old instructions for offsetting rotation scaling factor mirroring ATRANS X Y Z programmable offset additive to existing instructions TRANS without values clears ol
20. SDIS safety clearance The safety clearance SDIS acts with reference to the reference plane This is brought forward by the safety clearance The direction in which the safety clearance is active is automatically determined by the cycle DP and DPR final drilling depth The final drilling depth can be specified either absolute DP or relative DPR to the reference plane With relative specification the cycle will calculate the resulting depth automatically using the positions of reference and retraction planes J a aul REP SDIS OOOI DP RFP DPR Note If a value is entered both for DP and for DPR the final drilling depth is derived from DPR If this differs from the absolute depth programmed via DP the message Depth Corresponding to value for relative depth is output in the dialog line If the values for reference and retraction planes are identical a relative depth specification is not permitted The error message 61101 Reference plane defined incorrectly is output and the cycle is not executed This error message is also output if the retraction plane is located after the reference plane i e its distance to the final drilling depth is smaller Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 127 Programming example Drilling_centering This program produces three drill holes using the CYCLE81 drilling cycle The drilling axis is always the Z axis N10 GO G17 G90 F200 S300 M3 Sp
21. Testing the program with PRT In PRT mode you can simply check the correctness of your part program with no axis or spindle movement Proceed as follows to test a part program in PRT mode M 1 Select the desired operating area II I MACHINE gt AUTO 2 Switch to AUTO mode Press this key on the MCP to activate the PRT mode PROGRAM Alternatively you can also activate PRT through the following softkey operations NC Prog Program cont test 4 Press this key on the MCP to run the program The setpoint display simulates the traverse movements 5 Press this key to stop the program test RESET Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 41 Testing the program with AFL The AFL auxiliary function lock function disables the spindle and suppresses all auxiliary functions Spindle speed When the AFL is active you can test the part program by checking the axis movement Only one of the functions PRT and AFL can be active at the same time Before starting the program test first remove the workpiece from the machine Proceed as follows to test a part program in AFL mode M 1 Select the desired operating area MACHINE gt AUTO 2 Switch to AUTO mode Prog 3 Press this softkey to open the lower level menu for program control Nc cont Auxili 4 Press this vertical softkey to activate the AFL function uxiliary func O
22. e Distance of the new point with reference to PP e Slope angle of the connecting straight line A2 with reference to A1 5 Press this softkey to calculate the abscissa and ordinate values of the point Accept The abscissa is the first axis and the ordinate is the second axis of the plane The abscissa value l is displayed in the input field from which the calculator function has been called and the value of the ordinate is displayed in the next input field If the function is called from the part program editor the coordinates are saved with the axis names of the selected basic plane Calculating the Cartesian coordinates 1 Activate the calculator when you are in any input screen Hore 2 Open the lower level menu for contour elements selection 3 Select the desired calculation function L This function converts the given polar coordinates into Cartesian coordinates 4 Enter the reference point the vector length and the slope angle in the respective input fields 5 Press this softkey to calculate the Cartesian coordinates Accept The abscissa value is displayed in the input field from which the calculator function has been called and the value of the ordinate is displayed in the next input field If the function is called from the part program editor the coordinates are saved with the axis names of the selected basic plane Programming and Operating Manual Milling 236 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014
23. e X 0 abs Now you can see the programmed contour in the graphics window _ Jog N MPFNTEST MPF ry A E ie EA t 11 12 11 2612 12 18 tae hi tae ei sl a Delete element xX 0 000 abs O o KA Ms Trans to next element RND 8 808 T Free text input More Contour allowance 5 i 8 808 Right O whan x Accept Follower Zoom Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 255 A 15 Word structure and address Functionality structure A word is a block element and mainly constitutes a control command The word consists of the following two parts e Address characters generally a letter e Numerical value a sequence of digits which with certain addresses can be added by a sign put in front of the address and a decimal point A positive sign can be omitted The following picture shows an example of the word structure Word Word Address Value Address Value Address i Value Example Traverse with Path or end Explanation Linear position for the interpolation X axis 20 1mm Feedrate 300 mm min Several address characters A word can also contain several address letters In this case however the numerical value must be assigned via the intermediate character Example CR 5 23 Additionally it is also possible to call G functions using a symbolic name For more information refer to Section List of instructions
24. min value read only 0 999 999 999 integer Value assignments If the jump condition is fulfilled N10 IF R1 gt 5 GOTOF LABEL3 the jump to the block with Label is performed otherwise next instruction block several IF instructions per block are possible Relational operators equal lt gt not equal gt greater than lt less than gt greater than or equal to lt less than or equal to 1 Measuring input 1 rising N10 MEAS 1 G1 X Y Z edge 1 Measuring input falling edge 1 Measuring input 1 rising N10 MEAW 1 G1 X Y Z edge 1 Measuring input falling edge Reading and writing PLC variables N80 LABEL3 N10 A_DBR 5 16 3 Write Real variables with offset position 5 position type and meaning are agreed between NC and PLC N10 R1 AA_MM X Axis Identifier of an axis X Y Z traversing when measuring Axis dentifier of an axis X Y N10 R2 AA_MW X Z traversing when measuring N10 IF AC_CYCLE_TIME 50 5 System variable Time since the control system last booted Time since the control system last booted normally Total runtime of all NC programs Runtime of the NC program only of the selected program Tool action time N10 IF AC_ACTUAL_PARTS 15 System variable Total actual count Set number of workpiece Current actual count Count of workpieces specified by the user N10
25. 0 800 Call finishing cycle 800 by 27 55 N40 M30 End of program 9 6 6 Long holes located on a circle LONGHOLE Programming LONGHOLE RTP RFP SDIS DP DPR NUM LENG CPA CPO RAD STA1 INDA FFD FFP1 MID Parameters DP REM Sotdepth e bsot SSOS S S DPR REM Slotdepth relative to the reference plane enter without sign e Center point of circle absolute second axis of the plane Note The cycle requires a milling cutter with an end tooth cutting across center DIN844 Function Use this cycle to machine long holes located on a circle The longitudinal axis of the long holes is aligned radially In contrast to the slot the width of the long hole is determined by the tool diameter Internally in the cycle an optimum traversing path of the tool is determined ruling out unnecessary idle passes If several depth infeeds are required to machine a slot the infeed is carried out alternately at the end points The path to be traversed along the longitudinal axis of the long hole changes its direction after each infeed The cycle searches for the shortest path when changing to the next long hole Programming and Operating Manual Milling 184 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 Sequence Position reached prior to cycle start The starting position is any position from which each of the long holes can be approached without collision The cycle creates the following sequence of motions e Using GO the sta
26. 40 G40 approach and return straight line only 41 G41 42 G42 _AS1 Specification of the approach direction path enter without sign UNITS DIGIT Values 1 Straight tangential line 2 Quadrant 3 Semi circle TENS DIGIT Values 0 Approach to the contour in the plane 1 Approach to the contour in a spatial path _LP 1 REAL Length of the approach travel with straight line or radius of the approach arc with circle enter without sign The following parameters can be selected as options _ F REAL Retraction feedrate and feedrate for intermediate positions in the plane in the open Specification of the retraction direction path enter without sign UNITS DIGIT Values 1 Straight tangential line 2 Quadrant 3 Semi circle TENS DIGIT Values 0 Retraction from the contour in the plane 1 Retraction from the contour in a spatial path REAL Length of the retraction travel with straight line or radius of the retraction arc with circle enter without sign Programming and Operating Manual Milling 168 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 Function Use CYCLE72 to mill along any contour defined in a subroutine The cycle operates with or without cutter radius compensation It is not imperative that the contour is closed Internal or external machining is defined via the position of the cutter radius compensation centrally left or right to the contour The contour must be programmed in the direct
27. 41 2 20 1000 N60 M2 N70 PIECE245 N80 G1 G90 X150 Y160 N90 X230 CHF 10 N100 Y80 CHF 10 NIL X125 N120 N130 YLS G2 X150 Y160 CR 25 N140 PIECE245E N150 M2 Programming example 3 Proceed through the following steps l PROGRAM a Hill Contour milling AWN mae Jog N MPF AZ MPF CYCLE72 Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 250 200 2 20 3 175 10 1 r Select the desired operating area T3 Milling cutter with radius 7 Program feedrate and spindle speed Approach start position Cycle call Contour End of contour 2 Open the vertical softkey bar for available milling cycles 3 Press this softkey to open the window for CYCLE72 Enter a name in the first input field 05 84 01 2012706725 Name of contour subroutine KNAHE RTP RFP SDIS DP HID FAL FALD FFP1 FFD VARI 11 RL 41 AS1 LP1 FF3 ASZ LP2 LAR EE i ad We VEE ES fe P W I j c ece Attach contour is Cont Accept element F I Accept element Accept Tech interface v OK Re gt comp 176 11 12 13 Press one of the following two softkeys The program automatically jumps to the program editor screen form If you desire to edit and store the contour in a subroutine press this softkey New file Attach If you desire to edit and store the
28. AFL appears immediately in the program status bar and this softkey is highlighted in blue Note that the display is toggled between AFL and PRT by pressing the corresponding softkey Only one of these two functions can be active at the same time Programming and Operating Manual Milling 40 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 5 3 Program test You can test a part program using three different methods before machining pieces Testing the program with dry run With dry run all programmed motion commands are replaced by a defined dry run feedrate refer to Section Entering modifying the setting data Page 222 Before executing the dry run first remove the workpiece from the machine Proceed as follows to test a part program with dry run 1 Select the desired operating area 2 Switch to AUTO mode Prog 3 Press this softkey to open the lower level menu for program control NC cont DER 4 Press this vertical softkey to activate the feedrate settings for the dry run feedrate 5 Press this key on the MCP to close the door in the machine if you do not use this function just a close the door in the machine manually DOOR 6 Make sure the feedrate override is 0 Check that correct tool is in spindle before continuing T Press this key on the MCP to run the program 8 Turn the feedrate override switch slowly to the desired value 9 Press this key to stop the program test 47 y p prog RESET
29. End point and center point G2 G3 CRe X Y Circle radius and end point G2 G3 AR J Opening angle and center point G2 G3 AR X Y Opening angle and end point G2 G3 AP RP Polar coordinates circle around the pole Programming and Operating Manual Milling 72 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 Note Further possibilities for circle programming result from CT circle with tangential connection and CIP circle via intermediate point See next sections Input tolerances for the circle Circles are only accepted by the control system with a certain dimensional tolerance The circle radius at the starting and end points are compared here If the difference is within the tolerance the center point is exactly set internally Otherwise an alarm message is issued Information Full circles in a block are only possible if the center point and the end point are specified For circles with radius specification the arithmetic sign of CR is used to select the correct circle It is possible to program two circles with the same starting and end points as well as with the same radius and the same direction The negative sign in front of CR determines the circle whose circle segment is greater than a semi circle otherwise the circle with the circle segment is less than or equal to the semi circle and determined as follows See the following illustration for selection of the circle from two possible ci
30. JOG MOUS xscec senccces abcd ceancncssenscecimencceaaceacunsncen sands cecneseesenenecanssneaeneek REEERE ENEE ENE Setting the relative coordinate system REL cccccccseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeesaeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeeesaeeeeeseneeeenees Face milling Seting the JOG dala seeria eA see oeneseceetertoronntose cance Eae Rar The help system arcsenocesdveenseetsgnacdnesanshe vanseansveaeaee ba nanaadsaaersinyacomeniiasernen basa cests courses sanonesevaussncesanoneatvanaesesics SFO WIZ cules csdetreaatande ceeds arets cee vnaescnensteiuele avin eaa Editing Chinese Characters cccccccsccccsescecceecccceeeecescecceuseesseueeeceaseeessuececsegeeessuseeessueeesseseeessaseesssagees FOC rC O ae pee aie ten a em a aca ener TTS Pena Ae a Oe IO re er ee Calculating contour elements ic2ccisccccseiedccadcnsccansecednencedsnceasinnincusneseceaaeiedeanseicanssdeaedesacondancnonsabesasenseseanncs Free contour programming cccceccceecceeceeeeeceeseeeeaeeeseeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeeseeeseeeseueeseeeseeeeeueeseeeseeeeseeeseeeseeseaees Programming a OM OWN 2 sic Sate ects ne a kea E ETEN RESE Ea eae EAEE RE ae EN aE AEEA ESETERE Defining astari POIN cicss dee case ces cecentvesecedceeat ce ecentvadenesspassabuiansenseinetbesatiedanecocavedesaaadseeesnasteasvedanessccuenenteades Programming contour element ccccccceeecceeeceecceeeceeceuecsaeecaeeceueesacesuecsueesaeecaeecsueesueeseeeseueesaeeseeesaass Parameters for conto r
31. MPF If you desire to create a subprogram you must enter the file extension SPF The character length of a program name is limited to 24 English characters or 12 Chinese characters It is recommended that you do not use any special characters in the program name Press this softkey to confirm your entry The part program editor window opens Enter the blocks in the window which are saved automatically Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 4 2 Editing part programs Overview A part program or sections of a part program can only be edited if currently not being executed Any modifications to the part program are stored immediately Operating sequence m 1 Select the desired operating area MANAGER 2 Enter the program directory 3 Select the program file you desire to edit You can also search for a file or directory by either e Pressing the following softkey and specifying the desired criteria in the search dialog Search Note the file extension MPF or SPF must be entered if you desire to search for a program file Or e Entering the first character on the main screen of the program directory The system directly navigates to the first file starting with that character 4 Press this key to open the program file The system switches over to the program editor window gt ce Execute M3S266 1 Fi666 1 G96G54G66 XO Y 2166 1 1 Renum
32. Rigid tapping A thread is tapped without compensating chuck at position X30 Y35 in the XY plane the tapping axis is the Z axis No dwell time is programmed the depth is programmed as a relative value The parameters for the direction of rotation and for the lead must be assigned values A metric thread M5 is tapped N10 GO G90 T11 D1 Specification of technology values N20 G17 X30 Y35 240 Approach drilling position N30 CYCLE84 20 0 3 15 1 3 6 0 500 500 3 0 0 0 5 0 Cycle call parameter PIT has been omitted no value is entered for the absolute depth or the dwell time spindle stop at 90 degrees speed for tapping is 200 speed for retraction is 500 N40 M02 End of program Programming example 2 Rigid tapping Proceed through the following steps 1 Select the desired operating area PROGRAM a T 2 Open the vertical softkey bar for available drilling cycles 3 Press this softkey from the vertical softkey bar Programming and Operating Manual Milling 138 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 Rigid 4 Press this softkey to open the window for CYCLE84 Parameterize the cycle as desired tapping a 0 16 17 Ref Point 2012 06 21 N MPF 1 MPF Retract plane absolute 6 66660 SDIS 2 90000 DP 18 9008 DPR ga800 DTB 8 50008 SDAC 3 o MPIT 12 0880A PIT POSS o BOBGA SST 208 BBBBA SST1 200 98BBA AXN 3 o PSYS a PSYS a VARI 9 o DAH 6 66660 J 5 Confirm your se
33. Specification of technology values N20 GO X20 Y50 Z5 Approach starting position N30 SLOTL 5 0 1 23 45 30 15 40 45 20 45 90 Cycle call VARI MIDF FFP2 and SSF 100 320 6 2 0 5 Uy O parameters omitted N40 M02 End of program 9 6 8 Circumferential slot SLOT2 Programming SLOT2 RTP RFP SDIS DP DPR NUM AFSL WID CPA CPO RAD STA1 INDA FFD FFP1 MID CDIR FAL VARI MIDF FFP2 SSF FFCP Programming and Operating Manual Milling 192 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 Parameters be Rea Siotaepth bsoit O O OOOO O DPR REAL Slot depth relative to the reference plane enter without sign MID REAL Maximum infeed depth for one infeed enter without sign CDIR Milling direction for machining the circumferential slot a a o Values 2 for G2 3 for G3 FAL REAL Finishing allowance at the slot edge enter without sign VARI INT Machining type Values 0 complete machining 1 roughing 2 finishing Note The cycle requires a milling cutter with an end tooth cutting across center DIN844 Function The cycle SLOT2 is a combined roughing finishing cycle Use this cycle to machine circumferential slots arranged on a circle Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 193 Sequence Position reached prior to cycle start The starting position can be any position from which each of the slots can be approached without collision The cycle c
34. Stops the fast Special function filling of the machining step buffer memory until STARTFIFO Buffer memory full or End of program is detected STARTFIFO Start of fast Special function the buffer machining step memory is filled at the same time STOPRE Preprocessing stop Special function the next block is only decoded if the block before STOPRE is completed TURN Number of additional 0 In conjunction with circular circle passes with interpolation G2 G3 in a plane helix interpolation G17 to G19 and infeed motion of the axis vertical to this plane TRACYL Milling of the Kinematic transformation peripheral surface available only if configured accordingly TRAFOOF _ Disable TRACYL Trademarks N10 SPOS N10 SPOS ACP N10 SPOS ACN N10 SPOS IC N10 SPOS DC STOPFIFO separate block start of filling N10 X N20 X N30 X STARTFIFO separate block end of filling STOPRE separate block N10 GO G17 X20 Y5 Z3 N20 G1 Z 5 F50 N30 G3 X20 Y5 Z 20 10 J7 5 TURN 2 total of three full circles TRACYL 20 4 Separate block Cylinder diameter 20 4 mm TRACYL 20 4 1 also possible Disables kinematic TRAFOOF separate block transformation All names identified by are registered trademarks of Siemens AG The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner Disclai
35. Tool action time in seconds The runtime of the path axes is measured in all NC programs between program start and end without rapid traverse active and with the tool active default setting The measurement is interrupted when a dwell time is active The timer is automatically set to zero after each power up of the control system Programming example N10 IF SAC CUTTING TIME gt R10 GOTOF WZZEIT Tool operation time limit value GO X20 Y20 N80 WZZEIT GO X30 Y30 N90 MSG Tool action time Limit value reached N100 MO M30 Display The content of the active system variables is visible on the window opened through the following key operations O EA Sett Time 2 SD data counter OFFSET i k Window display Q eA QQOOoOXD OOO Times Counter Parts in total B Parts required H Part count H Run time HHHH H HUM HBs Cycle time HHHH H HUM HBs Cutting time HOHHH HOM HAS Setup time 6619H ZZM Power on time HHHH H 48m AC_TOTAL_PARTS AC_CYCLE_TIME AC_REQUIRED_PARTS AC_CUTTING_TIME AC_ACTUAL_PARTS D AN_SETUP_TIME AC_SPECIAL_PARTS is not available for display AC_OPERATING_TIME AN_POWERON_TIME Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 115 You can also view the time counter information through the following operating area gt gt c M Time l counter MACHINE AUTO 8 16 2 Workpiece counter Functionality The
36. When programming it is always assumed that the tool traverses relative to the coordinate system of the workpiece which is intended to be stationary The figure below illustrates how to determine the axis directions Programming and Operating Manual Milling 16 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 Machine coordinate system MCS The orientation of the coordinate system relative to the machine depends on the respective machine types It can be rotated in different positions The directions of the axes follow the 3 finger rule of the right hand Seen from the front of the machine the middle finger of the right hand points in the opposite direction to the infeed of the spindle The origin of this coordinate system is the machine zero This point is only a reference point which is defined by the machine manufacturer It does not have to be approachable The traversing range of the machine axes can be in the negative range Workpiece coordinate system WCS To describe the geometry of a workpiece in the workpiece program a right handed right angled coordinate system is also used The workpiece zero can be freely selected by the programmer in the Z axis The figure below shows an example of the workpiece coordinate system W Workpiece zero Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 17 Relative coordinate system REL In addition to the machine and workpiece coordinate systems the control s
37. Workpiece counter function provides counters for counting workpieces These counters exist as system variables with write and read access from the program or via operator input observe the protection level for writing Machine data can be used to control counter activation counter reset timing and the counting algorithm Counters e AC_REQUIRED_PARTS Number of workpieces required workpiece setpoint In this counter you can define the number of workpieces at which the actual workpiece counter AC_ACTUAL_PARTS is reset to zero The generation of the display alarm 21800 Workpiece setpoint reached can be activated via machine data e AC_TOTAL_PARTS Total number of workpieces produced total actual The counter specifies the total number of all workpieces produced since the start time The counter is set to zero automatically upon every booting of the control system e AC_ACTUAL_PARTS Number of actual workpieces actual This counter registers the number of all workpieces produced since the starting time When the workpiece setpoint is reached AC_REQUIRED_PARTS value greater than zero the counter is automatically zeroed e AC_SPECIAL_PARTS Number of workpieces specified by the user This counter allows users to make a workpiece counting in accordance with their own definition Alarm output can be defined for the case of identity with AC_REQUIRED_PARTS workpiece target Users must reset the counter themselves Program
38. Writing of PLC tags is generally limited to a maximum of three tags elements Where PLC tags are to be written in rapid succession one element will be required per write operation If more write operations are to be executed than there are elements available then block transfer will be required a preprocessing stop may need to be triggered Example SA_DBB 1 1 A DBB 2 2 A _DBB 3 3 STOPRE SA DBB 4 4 8 14 Program jumps 8 14 1 Unconditional program jumps Functionality NC programs process their blocks in the sequence in which they were arranged when they were written The processing sequence can be changed by introducing program jumps The jump destination can be a block with a label or with a block number This block must be located within the program The unconditional jump instruction requires a separate block Programming GOTOF label Jump forward in the direction of the last block of the program GOTOB label Jump backwards in the direction of the first block of the program Label Selected string for the label jump label or block number See the following illustration for an example of unconditional jumps Program execution N10 GO X Z N20 GOTOF LABELO jumps to label LABELO N50 LABELO R1 R2 R3 N51 GOTOEF LABEL1 jumps to label LABEL1 ee eel r LABEL2 X Z N100 M2 End of program LABEL 12 XxX Z Saad a UN eNom N150 GOTOB LABEL2 jumps to label LABEL2 Programming and Op
39. abscissa e Second axis of the plane ordinate e Drilling axis infeed axis third axis standing vertically to the plane vertical infeed axis With drilling cycles the drilling operation is carried out in the axis standing vertically to the current plane In milling the depth infeed is carried out in this axis See the following illustrations for plane and axis assignment Table 9 1 Plane and axis assignment Plane abscissa ordinate Vertical infeed axis Programming and Operating Manual Milling 122 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 Messages output during execution of a cycle During various cycles messages that refer to the state of machining are displayed on the screen of the control system during program execution These messages do not interrupt the program execution and continue to be displayed on the screen until the next message appears The message texts and their meaning are listed together with the cycle to which they refer Block display during execution of a cycle The cycle call is displayed in the current block display for the duration of the cycle Cycle call and parameter list The defining parameters for the cycles can be transferred via the parameter list when the cycle is called Note Cycle calls must always be programmed in a separate block Basic instructions with regard to the assignment of standard cycle parameters Each defining parameter of a cycle has a certain data type The parameter bein
40. ccccccecccccseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeesaeeeeaeeeeesaaes Linear interpolation cnicctcscctse cencesetceuctcdideesaco sind csceicetoncestecektectsGrhnetGedsaseiieeaddeaitenttenideceseiGeeaeeiedbataetiecenestiueeass Linear interpolation with rapid traverse GO cccccccccccsecccseeeeeeececeeeeceeceeeeeeeseeceseeessecesseseeseeeeseeeesseeesanees BS MUO e e E TE Linear interpolation with feedrate G1 oo ceccccecccceececeeeeeaeeeeseecececeseeeeseeeeeseeeeseeeessueesseeetseeeeseeeesseeesanees Circular inNterPOlatiOn ccccccecccceececeeceeeeeeeeeececeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeceeseeesseeeeseeeeseeesseeeeseeceseeeessueesseeeseeeeeeeesanees Circular interpolation G2 G9 wes vcesicdencteecctacd asiantctddcvaden tivated a EE Saad aidaa Circular interpolation via intermediate point CIP ce ccccccccceeccceeeceseeeeseeeeseeeeeseeeesecesscesseeeseeeeseeeesanees Circle with tangential transition CT ccccceccccseececceseeecceseeeceescecceececseueeeseacessaueeecseueeessausesssuesessneeessaes Helix interpolation G2 G3 TURN ccccccccsececseeceeeeeneeseeeseeeeeneeaeeeseeeeaneeaaeeceeeteneeaneeneeeteeetaeeteesteeeeaneenes Feedrate override for circles CFTCP CFC 200 cceccececceceeeeceeneceeaeceeaeeeeaeeeeaeceeaeseeeaeeeeaeseeaeeeeaeeeeaeans TRUS CUNO MEE E E E E E E E ta Thread cutting with constant lead G33 ec eccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeesseeeeeseeseeeseeeeesaaeeeesaeeeessaeeeesaeee
41. 126 For an explanation of the parameters _DP MID FAL FALD FFP1 FFD CDIR MIDA AP1 AD RAD1 and _DP1 refer to Section Milling a rectangular pocket POCKET3 Page 197 _PRAD pocket radius The form of the circular pocket is determined solely by its radius If this is smaller than the tool radius of the active tool then the cycle is aborted and alarm 61105 Cutter radius too large is output _PA _PO pocket center point Use the parameters _PA and _PO to define the pocket center point Circular pockets are always dimensioned across the center _VARI machining type Use the parameter _VARI to define the machining type Possible values are Units digit e 1 roughing e 2 finishing Tens digit infeed e O vertically to pocket center with GO e 1 vertically to pocket center with G1 e 2 along a helical path If a different value is programmed for the parameter _VARI the cycle is aborted after output of alarm 61002 Machining type defined incorrectly Note A tool compensation must be programmed before the cycle is called Otherwise the cycle is aborted and alarm 61000 No tool compensation active is output Internally in the cycle a new current workpiece coordinate system is used which influences the actual value display The zero point of this coordinate system is to be found in the pocket center point At the end of the cycle the original coordinate system is active again Programmin
42. Copying cutting and pasting blocks Proceed through the following steps to copy cut and paste blocks Hark 1 Press this softkey in the opened program editor window to insert a marker On FN M 2 Use the cursor keys to select the desired program blocks 3 Press the following softkey to copy the selection to the buffer memory Copy Or Press the following key to cut the selection to the buffer memory DEL 4 Place the cursor on the desired insertion point in the program and press this softkey Paste The data is successfully pasted Programming and Operating Manual Milling 34 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 4 3 Managing part programs Searching for programs m NC U cycle ai USB Netwo GF drive DEH ce files User ce files Search Select the desired operating area Select the storage medium in which you wish to perform the search Note The following two folders are visible with the manufacturer password U OEM Boe E files Press this vertical softkey to open the search window Enter the complete name with extension of the program file to be searched in the first input field in the search window To narrow your search you can enter the desired text in the second field Use this key to choose whether to include subordinate folders or observe upper lower case Press this softkey to start the search or otherwise press the following softkey to cancel the search x Cance
43. G42 or retraction using G41 and completion with G40 R tool radius Contour Approach G147 PO starting point P3 intermediate point P4 WAB end point tangential entry in the contour Approach Retraction using G148 P4 Contour end point tangential exit from the contour P3 intermediate point PO end point SAR Programming example Approach retraction along a straight line in a plane N10 T1 G17 Activate tool X Y plane N20 G0 X20 20 Approach PO N30 G42 G147 DISR 8 F600 X4 Y4 Approach point P4 programmed N40 Gl X40 Continue in the contour N50 Y12 N100 G41 Gl X15 Y15 N110 X4 Y4 P4 contour end point N120 G40 G148 DISR 8 F700 X8 Y8 Retraction point PO programmed M30 See the following illustration for approaching along a quadrant using the example of G42 or retraction using G41 and completion with G40 R tool radius Contour Approach G247 PO starting point P3 intermediate point P4 WAB end point tangential entry in the contour Retraction using G248 P4 contour end point tangential exit from the contour P3 intermediate point PO end point SAR P3 P4 equidistant points on the center point path Programming and Operating Manual Milling 118 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 Programming example Approach retraction along a quarter in a plane N10 T1 D1 G17 Activate tool X Y plane N20 GO X20 Y20 Approach PO N30 G42 G247 DISR 20 F600 X4 Y4 Ap
44. IF AC_MEAS 1 GOTOF Continue program when probe has switched Default condition 0 Default condition probe did not switch 1 Probe switched Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 Value assignments P_TOOLN Number of the active read only O tool T P_TOOL MCALL E OFFN Dimension specification P Active D number of the active tool The subroutine in the block containing MCALL is called automatically after each successive block containing a path motion The call acts until the next MCALL is called Application example Drilling a hole pattern Modal subprogram call Max 65 characters Message text in inverted commas Only effective with the tool radius compensation G41 G42 active Inserts a rounding with the specified radius value tangentially between two contour blocks special FRC feed possible 0 010 99 999 999 Inserts roundings with the specified radius value tangentially at the following contour corners special feedrate possible FRCME o Modal rounding OFF 0 010 99 999 999 RNDM Modal rounding s4 99999999 Traversing in polar coordinates pole specification in addition Polar angle AP roe SET 0 00001 359 9999 Angle of rotation with ROT AROT Specification in degrees angle for a programmable rotation in the current plane G17 to G19 SET Various values from the specified
45. KKNAME defines the name of the contour subroutine e Defining the contour as a subroutine _KNAME name of the subroutine If the subroutine already exists specify a name and then continue If the subroutine does not yet exist specify a name and then press the following softkey Hew File A program with the entered name is created and the program automatically jumps to the contour editor Use the following softkey to confirm your input and return to the screen form for this cycle Tech interface e Defining the contour as a section of the called program KNAME name of the starting label name of the end label Input If the contour is not yet described specify the name of the starting label and press the following softkey If the contour is already described name of starting label name of end label directly press the following softkey Attach contour The control system automatically creates starting and end labels from the name entered and the program jumps to the contour editor Use the following softkey to confirm your input and return to the screen form for this cycle Tech interface Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 171 Examples _KNAME CONTOUR 1 The milling contour 1s the complete program CONTOUR 1 _KNAME PIECE245 PIECE245E The milling contour is defined as a section in the calling program which starts from the block contai
46. Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 1 1 2 Control elements on the PPU Elements on the PPU Panel Processing Unit front The following illustration uses PPU161 2 as an example to show control elements available on the PPU SIEMENS SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED M Vertical and horizontal softkeys On board wizard key Calls specific menu functions Provides step by step guides on basic commissioning and operation procedures Returns to the next higher level menu Calls help information Menu extension key Cursor keys Opens the next lower level menu or navigate between the menus of the same level Alphabetic and numeric keys Operating area keys Control keys USB interface Alarm cancellation key Status LEDs Cancels alarms and messages that are marked with this symbol For more information refer to the table below Further information Alphabetic and To enter the upper character on an alphabetic numeric key keep the following key numeric keys pressed The icons on the following keys are available only with PPU161 2 and PPU160 2 The icon on the key is a hint that you can press both lt CTRL gt and this key as shortcuts for capturing screens Programming and Operating Manual Milling 8 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 The icon on the key is a hint that you can press both lt CTRL gt and this key as shortcuts for saving start up archives The icon on the key is a hint that you can pr
47. N215 SUPA GOO Z27300 DO N220 SUPA GOO X300 Y300 N225 T2 Dl N230 MSG Please change to Tool No 2 00000 2 00000 250 00000 Foe 00000 200 4 00000 0 Tool No 5 5 00000 300 00000 214 0 00000 90000000 Uae 0 00000 5 00000 TO 000007 100 000005 Aly 3 22 Zany 000003 38 00000 70 00000 LO 0O0007 0 00000 300000 Dyes 224 00000 38 00000 70 00000 10 00000 0 00000 5 00000 JOUTU 300700000 30 00000 300000 6 00000 38 00000 37 UnZ20000 2000 Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 N235 M05 M09 MOO N240 S5000 M3 N245 CYCLE T2Z SUB PART 3 50 00000 0 00000 2 00000 5 00000 5 00000 0 00000 0000005 300 200000 10000000 LIL 41 22 3200000 2007000007 12 32200000 N2550 SUPA GOO 273800 DO N255 SUPA GOO X300 Y300 N260 T2 DI N265 MSG Please change to Tool No 2 N270 M05 M09 MOO N2 To 36500 M3 N2890 POCKETS 50 00000 O 00000 1 000005 3 00000 40 00000 30 000005 00000 Se 00000 243 10000 L st 22000002 Oe LOU00 Oe 0000 200 200000 300000003 Oly de TZ30 000 0 4 82 00000 3 00000 15 00000 0400000 200000 NZ65 POCKETS C 30500000 0 00000 1 00000 3 00000 4000000 30 00000 6 00000 36 00000 24 L00000 ks 00000 22000007 0200005 O61 0000 300000007 300 2000007 Oy 12 12 0000 07 3 00000 340000 0 15 20000075 000000 2 00000
48. N290 SUPA GOO Z300 DO N295 SUPA GOO X300 Y300 N300 T6 D1 N305 MSG Please change to Tool No 6 N310 M05 M09 MOO Nols S6000 M3 N320 GOO Z50 X36 Y24 1 N32 MCALLOCYCLE SZ 307000007 3 000005 2 000003 S 000005 0 00000 gt O22000 0 N3320 HOLESZ 36 00000 24 10000 10 00000 90000007 60700700076 N335 gt X36 Y2Z4 21 N340 MCALL Modal Call OFF N345 SUPA GOO 24300 DO N350 SUPA GOO X300 Y300 N3595 TH DL N360 MSG Please change to Tool No 7 N365 M05 M09 MOO N3707 S6000 M3 No73 MCALL CYCLESS1 30 000007 32 00000 T000007 59 24000 z 3 000007 90000007 0270000 0 500007 1 D00005 Op Ur o 00000 1 40000 GOVO 1 60000 N3090 HOLESZ 3600000 24 10000 10 00000 30 00000 60 00000 5 63 N3609 X36 Y2Z4 1 N390 MCALL Modal call Off N395 SUPA GOO 24300 DO N400 SUPA GOO X300 Y300 N405 T8 D1 N410 MSG Please change to Tool No 8 N415 M05 M09 MOO N420 S500 M3 N4239 MCAGLL CYCUES4 50 00000 3 00000 2 00000 46700000 0 70000 3 22 00000 5 00000 5 00000 5 00000 0 1 0 0 5 00000 1 40000 N430 HOLESZ 3000000 24 0000 10 00000 30 00000 60000003 63 N435 X36 Y24 1 N440 MCALL Modal call Off N445 SUPA GOO z500 DO N450 SUPA GOO X500 Y500 Move to the change position Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 215 Ready to start next program or repeat N455 M30 SUbrOUTING namer SUB PART 3 Subroutine content G17 G90 GO
49. Non modal skipping of the settable work 9 Suppression of settable offset work offset non modal G153 Non modal skipping of the settable work offset including base frame Exact stop 10 Approach behavior es Continuous path mode eens Poe Corner deceleration at inside corners when Only in conjunction with G62 Z G1 tool radius offset is active G41 G42 continuous path mode Go Non modal exact stop 11 Exact stop non modal G601 Exact stop window fine with G60 G9 12 Exact stop window G602 Exact stop window coarse with G60 G9 modally effective G621 Corner deceleration at all corners Only in conjunction with G621 AIDS continuous path mode G70 Inch dimension data input 13 Inch metric dimension SS Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 261 Value assignments Metric dimension data input input modally effective G700 Inch dimension data input also for feedrate F G710 Metric dimension data input also for feedrate F 14 Absolute incremental Al Lu ate Sr 15 Feedrate spindle modally eee 16 Feed override modally CFTCP Feedrate override OFF effective G450 G451 Transition circle 18 Behavior at corners when compensation modally effective BRISK Jerking path acceleration 21 Acceleration profile SOFT Jerk limited path acceleration modally effective FFWOF Feedforward control OFF 24 Feedforward control FFWON Feedforwa
50. Parameters RTP REAL Retraction plane absolute RFP REAL Reference plane absolute S DP REAL Pocket depth absolute Starting point absolute first axis of the plane PO REL O Starting point mee second axis of the MD REAL Maximum infeed depth enter without sign oo FAL O REAL Finishing alowance at ne pocket edge enter without sio a I _FFP1 REAL Feedrate for surface machining a REAL Feedrate for depth infeed _CDIR Milling direction enter without sign Values 0 Down cut milling in the spindle direction 1 Conventional milling 2 With G2 independent of spindle direction 3 With G3 _VARI Machining type UNITS DIGIT Values 1 roughing 2 finishing TENS DIGIT Values 0 Perpendicular to the pocket center with GO 1 Perpendicular to the pocket center with G1 2 Along a helix The other parameters can be selected as options They define the insertion strategy and the overlap for solid machining to be entered without sign capt REAL Pockets bork dnension a M 22__REsl_ Bark pocket depth dimension fom lee pe _ _ __ Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 203 Function Use this cycle to machine circular pockets in the machining plane For finishing a face cutter is required The depth infeed always starts at the pocket center point and be performed vertically from there thus it is practical to predrill at this position e The milling direction can
51. Percentage nal acceleration override Absolute coordinate approach position in the positive direction for rotary axis spindle ACN Absolute coordinate approach position in the negative direction for rotary axis spindle Angle for the specification of a straight line for the contour definition ANG Polar angle Aperture angle for circular interpolation Indirect cycle call Chamfer general use Chamfer in the contour definition Radius for circular interpolation COMPCAD Compressor ON Optimum surface quality for CAD programs COMPCUR Compressor ON V Polynomials with constant curvature COMPOF Compressor OFF SS Effective Modal Acceleration override for an axis or spindle specified as a percentage It is also possible to specify the dimensions for the end point of a rotary axis with ACP irrespective of G90 G91 also applies to spindle positioning It is also possible to specify the dimensions for the end point of a rotary axis with ACN irrespective of G90 G91 also applies to spindle positioning Specified in degrees one possibility of specifying a Straight line when using GO or G1 if only one end point coordinate of the plane is known or if the complete end point is known with contour ranging over several blocks 0 00001 359 99999 0 359 99999 Specification in degrees traversing in polar coordinates definition of the pole in addition Polar
52. User defined keys Pressing this in any operating mode switches on off the lamp LED lit The lamp is switched on LED unlit The lamp is switched off Pressing this key in any operating mode switches on off the coolant supply LED lit The coolant supply is switched on LED unlit The coolant supply is switched off When all axes and the spindle stop operation pressing this key unlocks the safety door LED lit The safety door is unlocked LED unlit The safety door is locked Pressing this key rotates the magazine clockwise active only in JOG mode LED lit The magazine rotates clockwise LED unlit The magazine stops clockwise rotation Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 11 Pressing this key approaches the magazine to the reference point ase active only in JOG mode MAG REF LED on The magazine is reference point approached LED off The magazine is not yet referenced pe Pressing this key rotates the magazine counter clockwise active only in JOG mode MAG CCW LED on The magazine rotates counter clockwise LED off The magazine stops counter clockwise rotation Pressing this key in any operating mode starts the forward rotation of the OZ N chip remover active only in JOG mode _ LED lit The chip remover starts forward rotation LED unlit The chip remover stops rotation z Keeping pressing this key in any operating mode rotates the chip ZA 6 remover
53. Z axis DEF REAL RFP RTP DP DTB Definition of parameters RFP 102 RTP 107 DP 72 DTB 3 Value assignments N10 G90 G17 F100 S450 M4 Specification of technology values N20 GO X80 Y90 Z107 Approach drilling position N30 CYCLES RTP RFP 5 DP DTB Cycle call N40 M02 End of program 9 5 Drilling pattern cycles The drilling pattern cycles only describe the geometry of an arrangement of drilling holes in the plane The link to a drilling process is established via the modal call of this drilling cycle before the drilling pattern cycle is programmed 9 5 1 Requirements Drilling pattern cycles without drilling cycle call Drilling pattern cycles can also be used for other applications without prior modal call of a drilling cycle because the drilling pattern cycles can be parameterized without reference to the drilling cycle used If there was no modal call of the subroutine prior to calling the drilling pattern cycle error message 62100 No drilling cycle active appears To acknowledge the error message press the following key A Z ALARM CANCEL To continue the program execution press the following key The drilling pattern cycle will then approach each of the positions calculated from the input data one after the other without calling a subroutine at these points Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 153 Behavior when quantity parameter is zero The number of hole
54. account blank dimensions e g when machining precast parts Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 199 AP1 blank dimension of pocket length AP2 blank hension Pocket width The basic sizes for the length and width _AP1 and _AP2 are programmed without sign and their symmetrical positions around the pocket center point are computed in the cycle You define the part of the pocket which is no longer to be machined by solid machining The blank dimension for the depth _AD is also programmed without sign and taken into account by the reference plane in the direction of the pocket depth The depth infeed when taking into account blank dimensions is carried out according to the programmed type helical path reciprocating vertically If the cycle detects that there is space enough in the pocket center because of the given blank contour and the radius of the active tool the infeed is carried out vertically to the pocket center point as long as it is possible in order not to traverse extensive insertion paths in the open Solid machining of the pocket is carried out starting from the top downwards Explanation of the parameters For an explanation of the parameters _RTP _RFP and _SDIS refer to Section Drilling centering CYCLE81 Page 126 For an explanation of the _DP parameter refer to Section Long holes located on a circle LONGHOLE Page 184 Pocket dimensioned from
55. an explanation of the parameters RTP RFP and SDIS refer to Section Drilling centering CYCLE81 Page 126 Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 189 DP and DPR slot depth The slot depth can be specified either absolute DP or relative DPR to the reference plane With relative specification the cycle calculates the resulting depth automatically using the positions of reference and retraction planes NUM number Use the parameter NUM to specify the number of slots LENG and WID slot length and slot width Use the parameters LENG and WID to define the form of a slot in the plane The milling cutter diameter must be smaller than the slot width Otherwise alarm 61105 Cutter radius too large will be activated and the cycle aborted The milling cutter diameter must not be smaller than half of the groove width This is not checked CPA CPO and RAD center point and radius You define the position of the circle in the machining plane by the center point CPA CPO and the radius RAD Only positive values are permitted for the radius STA1 and INDA starting and incremental angle The arrangement of the slot on the circle is defined by these parameters STA1 defines the angle between the positive direction of the first axis abscissa of the workpiece coordinate system active before the cycle was called and the first groove Parameter INDA contains the angle from one slot to the next If I
56. as required Operating sequence 1 Select the desired operating area OFFSET 2 Open the list of R parameters 3 Use the cursor keys to navigate in the list and enter the values in the input fields to be modified Note You can search for your desired R variable with the following softkey By default the function searches the R number Search You can press the following softkey to activate the option of searching by R name Define the R name as desired if necessary Show R nahe 4 Use this key or move the cursor to confirm your entries A 7 Setting user data Functionality The User data start screen lists the user data that exist within the control system You can set or query these global parameters in any program as required Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 225 Operating sequence 1 Select the desired operating area GUD daca 2 Open the list of user data of ie O0 3 Use the cursor keys to navigate in the list and enter the values in the input fields to be modified Note You can search for your desired user data with the following softkey Search You can press the following softkey to continue searching your desired user data Continue search 4 Use this key or move the cursor to confirm your entries Other settings in JOG mode WA pay A M X ERA NC HPF SIEMENS Reset MX 1 I a E e D 1 MY 1 8 008 em FF e MZ1
57. be determined either using a G command G2 G3 or from the spindle direction as synchronous or up cut milling e For solid machining the maximum infeed width in the plane can be programmed e Finishing allowance also for the pocket base e Two different insertion strategies vertically to the pocket center along a helical path around the pocket center Shorter approach paths in the plane for finishing e Consideration of a blank contour in the plane and a blank dimension at the base optimum machining of preformed pockets possible _MIDA is recalculated during edge machining Sequence Position reached prior to cycle start Starting position is any position from which the pocket center point can be approached at the height of the retraction plane without collision Motion sequence when roughing _VARI X1 With GO the pocket center point is approached at the retraction level and then from this position with GO too the reference plane brought forward by the safety clearance is approached The machining of the pocket is then carried out according to the selected insertion strategy taking into account the programmed blank dimensions Sequence of motions when finishing Finishing is performed in the order from the edge until the finishing allowance on the base is reached and then the base is finished If one of the finishing allowances is equal to zero this part of the finishing process is skipped e Finishing on the edg
58. character Blank Separator between words blank Tab character Reserved do not use A 17 Block format Functionality A block should contain all data required to execute a machining step Generally a block consists of several words and is always completed with the end of block character Lr Linefeed When writing a block this character is automatically generated when pressing the linefeed key on an externally connected keyboard or pressing the following key on the PPU See the following block structure diagram Comment LF iE Space Space End of block character Block instructions only if required is written at the end delimited from the Block number stands in front of instructions Only as needed instead of N main blocks have the symbol Colon woes E remaining part of the block by Block skip only if necessary stands at the beginning Total number of characters in a block 512 characters Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 257 Word order If there are several instructions in a block the following order is recommended N G X Z F S T D M H Note regarding block numbers First select the block numbers in steps of 5 or 10 Thus you can later insert blocks and nevertheless observe the ascending order of block numbers Block skip Blocks of a program which are to be executed not with each program run can be marked by a sl
59. contour as a section of a main program press this softkey contour Press this softkey to open the contour editor Parameterize the contour elements step by step Initially you define a contour starting point and select how to approach the starting point Note Steps 5 to 10 below describe basic steps for contour element edits For more information about programming in the contour editor refer to Section Free contour programming Page 238 Press this softkey to confirm the settings Select a desired machining direction and shape with the corresponding softkey Specify the corresponding coordinates according to the drawings The selected direction appears on the top left of the screen and the corresponding descriptive text is given in the information line at the bottom of the screen P patton Basho N MPFAD SPF AA Straight line vertical Alter native Trans to next element RND O 6 668 Free text input All para meters Contour allowance 8 888 Right O cancel ee End point Y aC Zoom Press this softkey to confirm the settings Select different elements to define the contour until you complete the contour programming Press this softkey to store the contour information Press this softkey to return to the screen form for CYCLE72 Parameterize the cycle technology data as desired Confirm your settings with this softkey The cycle is then automatically transferred to the program editor Note
60. depth is specified as a relative value to the reference plane The circle is defined by the center point X70 Y60 and the radius 42 mm in the XY plane The starting angle is 33 degrees The safety clearance in drilling axis Z is 2 mm N10 G90 F140 S170 M3 T10 D1 Specification of technology values N20 G17 GO X50 Y45 Z2 Approach starting position N30 MCALL CYCLE82 2 0 2 30 0 Modal call of the drilling cycle without dwell time DP is not programmed N40 HOLES2 70 60 42 33 0 4 Call of the circle of holes cycle the incremental angle is calculated in the cycle since the parameter INDA has been omitted N50 MCALL Deselect modal call N60 M02 End of program Programming example 1 Circle of holes Proceed through the following steps 1 Select the desired operating area PROGRAM Y an 2 Open the vertical softkey bar for available drilling cycles Hole 3 Press this softkey from the vertical softkey bar pattern Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 159 Hole 4 Press this softkey to open the window for this cycle Parameterize the cycle as desired circle ai 02 06 39 Ref Point 2012706720 N MPF 1 MPF 1 HOLES2 Center point of hole circle ist axis 6 66666 1 Cancel wif 5 Confirm your settings with this softkey The cycle is then automatically transferred to the program OK editor as a separate block 9 5 4 Arbitrary positions CYCLE802 Progr
61. desired operating area Switch to JOG control mode Open the lower level menu for workpiece measurement Press this vertical softkey to open the window for measurement of a circular workpiece Traverse the tool which has been measured previously in the direction of the orange arrow P1 shown in the measuring window in order to scratch the workpiece edge with the tool tip Workpiece measurement center of circle Work offset G54 O Offset Aq 68 8668 mm Ya 6 6640 mm Press this vertical softkey to save the tool position P1 in the coordinate system Repeat Steps 5 and 6 to save the other two positions P2 and P3 Press this vertical softkey to save the work offsets in the X and Y axes after all three positions are measured Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 27 3 2 7 Verifying the tool offset result in MDA mode In order to ensure the machine safety and correctness you must test the results of the tool offset appropriately Operating sequence M 1 Select the desired operating area li MACHINE 2 Switch to MDA mode MDA PEIEE 3 Press this softkey on the PPU file 4 Enter the test program for example G54 T1 D1 GOO X0 YO Z5 You can alternatively load an existing part program from a system directory using the following softkey if desired t Load file 5 Press this key to ensure the ROV function is active lit up ROV Note The ROV function activates the feed
62. drilling only once and will therefore drill only once DTB dwell time The dwell time to the final drilling depth chip breakage is programmed under DTB in seconds DTS dwell time The dwell time at the starting point is only performed if VARI 1 chip removal FRF feedrate factor With this parameter you can specify a reduction factor for the active feedrate which only applies to the approach to the first drilling depth in the cycle VARI machining type If parameter VARI 0 is set the drill retracts 1 mm after reaching each drilling depth for chip breakage If VARI 1 for chip removal the drill traverses in each case to the reference plane shifted by the amount of the safety clearance Note The anticipation distance is calculated internally in the cycle as follows e lf the drilling depth is 30 mm the value of the anticipation distance is always 0 6 mm e For larger drilling depths the formula drilling depth 50 is used maximum value 7 mm AXN tool axis By programming the drilling axis via AXN it is possible to omit the switchover from plane G18 to G17 when the deep hole drilling cycle is used on turning machines The identifiers have the following meanings First axis of the current plane Second axis of the current plane Third axis of the current plane For example to machine a center hole in Z in the G18 plane you program G18 AXN 1 MDEP minimum drilling depth You can define a minimum dri
63. element up to according to the number of values REP the same value from the specified element up to the end of the field Specified in degrees the thread starting point with G33 will be offset by the specified value not applicable for tapping n 1 axis identifier e g SP1 or C Set values for the variable fields REP Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 Thread starting point 0 001 359 999 when using G33 Converts the spindle number n into the axis identifier N10 IF P_TOOLNO GOTOPF N10 MCALL CYCLE82 Separate block drilling cycle N20 HOLES1 Row of holes N30 MCALL Separate block modal call of CYCLE82 completed N10 MSG MESSAGE TEXT separate block N150 MSG Clear previous message N10 OFFN 12 4 N10 X Y RND 4 5 N11 X Y N10 X Y RNDM 7 3 modal rounding ON N11 X Y N100 RNDM 0 modal rounding OFF See G0 G1 G2 G3 G110 G111 G112 See ROT AROT DEF REAL VAR2 12 REP 4 5 all elements value 4 5 N10 R10 SET 1 1 2 3 4 4 R10 1 1 R11 2 3 R4 4 4 See G33 269 Value assignments SPOS Spindle position 0 0000 359 9999 Specified in degrees the with incremental spindle stops at the specified specification IC position to achieve this the 0 001 99 spindle must provide the 999 999 appropriate technical prerequisites position control STOPFIFO
64. elements sssrin aE aan EAEEREN Ea rE Specifying contour elements in polar coordinates CV CIO SUD DOW O E E EE Programming example for milling ccccccccceecceeeeceeeececeeeeeaeeeeeeecesee cess eeeseeeeseeeeseesesseeeeseeeeseeeesaeeetsneeees Word structure and add ates ae ee ae eee ene enero ee eS ey eee een mee ey CACC SO oer E A A E A A T tee A E E E A A Block format List of INSTFUCTIONS ccccececccccccceccuccecececeueueueaeneneneneneneneneneneneneneneneneneneneneneneneneneneneneneneneneneneneneneneneneneaes Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 1 Introduction 1 1 SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED operator panels 1 1 1 Overview The SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED PPU Panel Processing Unit is available in the following variants e PPU161 2 horizontal panel layout applicable for the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED T turning or SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED M milling control system e PPU160 2 vertical panel layout applicable for the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED T turning or SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED M milling control system PPU161 2 horizontal panel layout SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCEDM o Taw amp HooOP aod Y v Q BOD Gao Goo oad Deo eos uono dka AROSE ann e ELIE E ARED See Bava SHE v PPU160 2 vertical panel layout SIEMENS SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED M POK RDY TEMP e ein ol r iJ h v o aag A Bagg Ae ie Programming and Operating
65. f element 8 CN Dialog 9 select Accept 10 elenent 11 CN Tangent 12 trans Accept 13 element 14 Fa Select a program with cursor keys and press the following key to open the program in the program editor Press this softkey to open the contour editor Define a start point with the following parameters and press this softkey to confirm e Programming plane G17 e X 0 e Y 0 Press this softkey to select a contour element of straight vertical line Enter the parameters for this element and press this softkey to confirm e Y 104 abs Press this softkey to select a contour element of circular arc Enter the parameters for this element and press this softkey to select the desired contour characteristics e Direction of rotation clockwise e R 79 e 0 abs e B62 30 Press this softkey to confirm Press this softkey to select a contour element of circular arc Enter the parameters for this element and press this softkey to select the desired contour characteristics e Direction of rotation clockwise e R 7 5 e 62 180 Press this softkey to confirm Press this softkey to select a contour element of circular arc Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 251 Dialog 15 Enter the parameters for this element and press this softkey to select the desired contour select characteristics e Direction of rotation counter clockwise e 6 R 64 e X 6 abs e
66. for machining plane SAR Approach retraction distance or radius SAR Velocity for the infeed SAR Non modal feedrate for chamfer rounding Modal feedrate for chamfer rounding GoBack instruction GoForward instruction Coordinate specified using incremental dimensions Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 It is also possible to specify the dimensions for the end point of a rotary axis with DC irrespective of G90 G91 also applies to spindle positioning Defining a user variable of the BOOL CHAR INT REAL STRING n type define directly at the beginning of the program Safety clearance for speed switchover for infeed motion note G340 G341 G147 G148 Distance of the cutter edge from the starting or end point of the contour G247 G347 G248 G348 Radius of the tool center pointpath Speed takes effect after the safety clearance is reached for the infeed note G340 G341 When FRC 0 feedrate F will act When FRCM 0 feedrate F will act A GoTo operation is performed to a block marked by a label the jump destination is in the direction of the program start A GoTo operation is performed to a block marked by a label the jump destination is in the direction of the end of the program The dimension can be specified for the end or center point of a certain axis irrespective of G90 Value assignments CYCLE832 High speed settings a N10 CY
67. in reverse order Releasing the key changes the chip remover CHIP REV to the previous forward rotation or stop state active only in JOG mode LED lit The chip remover starts reverse rotation LED unlit The chip remover stops reverse rotation Pre defined insertion strips The MCP machine control panel package includes two sets six pieces each of pre defined insertion strips One set is for the turning variant of the control system and is pre inserted on the back of the MCP The other set is for the milling variant of the control system If your control system is of the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED milling variant replace the pre inserted strips with the milling specific insertion strips Programming and Operating Manual Milling 12 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 Customized insertion strips The MCP package also includes an A4 sized blank plastic sheet with detachable strips You can customize insertion strips if the pre defined strips can not meet your needs In the examples MCP folder of the Toolbox DVD for the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED there is a symbol library file and an insertion strip template file To make customized insertion strips follow the steps below 1 Copy the desired symbols from the symbol library file to the desired locations in the insertion strip template 2 Print the template to the A4 sized blank plastic sheet 3 Detach the insertion strips from the blank plastic sheet 4 Pull out the pre inser
68. influences the actual value display The zero point of this coordinate system is to be found in the pocket center point At the end of the cycle the original coordinate system is active again Programming example Pocket Use this program to machine a pocket in the XY plane which is 60 mm in length 40 mm in width and which has a corner radius of 8 mm and is 17 5 mm in depth The pocket has an angle of 0 degrees to the X axis The final machining allowance of the pocket edges is 0 75 mm 0 2 mm at the base the safety clearance in the Z axis which is added to the reference plane is 0 5 mm The center point of the pocket lies at X60 and Y40 the maximum depth infeed is 4 mm The machining direction results from the direction of rotation of the spindle in the case of down cut milling A milling cutter with 5 mm radius is used Merely a rough machining operation is to be carried out See the following programming example for rectangular pocket N10 G90 T1 D1 S600 M4 Specification of technology values N20 G17 GO X60 Y40 Z5 Approach starting position Programming and Operating Manual Milling 202 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 N30 POCKETS 5 0 0 5 17 5 60 40 8 60 40 0 4 p Cycle cali Oop Oe OOO HO Oy Tels OG oe ee ae eae a N40 M02 End of program 9 6 10 Milling a circular pocket POCKET4 Programming POCKET4 RTP RFP SDIS DP PRAD PA PO MID FAL FALD FFP1 FFD CDIR VARI MIDA _AP1 _AD _RAD1 _DP1
69. line in Z direction Opens the window for programming a horizontal Close straight line in Y direction Pole Bite ce Opens the window for programming an oblique linein Returns to the program editor without transferring the the Y Z direction The end point of the line is entered last edited values to the system using coordinates or an angle Opens the window for programming a circular arc with Returns to the program editor with the last edited values any direction of rotation transferred to the system Further softkey functions The following softkeys are available in corresponding contour element window for programming the contour elements on the basis of pre assigned parameters Tangent to preceding element T This softkey presets the angle a2 to a value of 0 The contour element has a tangential transition to angent i i trang the preceding element i e the angle to the preceding element a2 is set to 0 degree Display all parameters All Press this softkey to display a selection list of all the parameters for the selected contour element If para f waters you leave any parameter input fields blank the control assumes that you do not know the right 7 values and attempts to calculate these from the settings of the other parameters The contour is always machined in the programmed direction Input switchover Alter This softkey is displayed only in cases where the cursor is positioned on an input f
70. milling Down cut and up cut milling are determined internally in the cycle via the direction of rotation of the spindle activated prior to calling the cycle M3 gt G3 M3 gt G2 M4 gt G2 M4 gt G3 VARI machining type Use the parameter VARI to define the machining type Possible values are e 1 roughing e 2 finishing Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 179 AP1 AP2 blank dimensions When machining the spigot it is possible to take into account blank dimensions e g when machining precast parts The basic sizes for the length and width AP1 and AP2 are programmed without sign and their symmetrical positions around the spigot center are computed in the cycle The internally calculated radius of the approach semi circle depends on this dimension AP2 AP 1 Note A tool compensation must be programmed before the cycle is called Otherwise the cycle is canceled and alarm 61009 Active tool number 0 is output Internally in the cycle a new current workpiece coordinate system is used which influences the actual value display The zero point of this coordinate system is to be found in the pocket center point At the end of the cycle the original coordinate system is active again Programming example Spigot Use this program to machine in the XY plane a spigot that is 60 mm long 40 mm wide and has 15 mm corner radius The spigot has an angle of 10 degrees relative to the
71. mm N40 G332 Z5 K0 8 Retraction N50 GO X30 Y30 z720 N60 M30 8 6 Fixed point approach 8 6 1 Fixed point approach G75 Functionality By using G75 a fixed point on the machine e g tool change point can be approached The position is stored permanently in the machine data for all axes A maximum of four fixed points can be defined for each axis No offset is effective The speed of each axis is its rapid traverse G75 requires a separate block and is non modal The machine axis identifier must be programmed In the block after G75 the previous G command of the Interpolation type group GO G1 G2 is active again Programming and Operating Manual Milling 82 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 Programming G75 FP lt n gt X 0 Y 0 Z 0 Note FPn references with axis machine date MD30600 MA_FIX_POINT_POSj n 1 If no FP has been programmed then the first fixed point will be selected Fixed point approach Fixed point that is to be approached The fixed point number is specified lt n gt Value range of lt n gt 1 2 3 4 MD30610 NUM_FIX_POINT_POS should be set if fixed point number 3 or 4 is to be used If no fixed point is specified fixed point 1 is approached automatically Machine axes to be traversed to the fixed point Here specify the axes with value 0 with which the fixed point is to be approached simultaneously Each axis is traversed with the maximum axial velocity Programming example NO5 G7
72. on the abscissa end taken into account Sequence of motions when roughing VARI 1 e Approach retraction from contour Contour approach retraction along semi circle with CW rotating spindle and conventional milling operation Approach to contour Retraction from contour The retraction plane RTP is approached at rapid traverse rate to then be able to position to the starting point in the machining plane at this height The starting point is defined with reference to 0 degrees of the abscissa The tool is fed to the safety clearance SDIS at rapid traverse with subsequent traversing to the machining depth at feedrate To approach the spigot contour the tool travels along a semi circular path The milling direction can be determined either as up cut milling or down cut milling with reference to the spindle direction If the spigot is bypassed once the contour is left along a semi circle in the plane and the tool is fed to the next machining depth The contour is then reapproached along a semi circle and the spigot traversed once This process is repeated until the programmed spigot depth is reached Then the retraction plane RTP is approached at rapid traverse rate e Depth infeed Feeding to the safety clearance Insertion to machining depth Programming and Operating Manual Milling 178 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 The first machining depth is calculated from the total depth finishing allowance and the maximum
73. positioned perpendicular to one another The velocity control makes allowance for the limits defined for the rotations Groove traversing section In the case of axis configuration 1 longitudinal grooves along the rotary axis are subject to parallel limits only if the groove width corresponds exactly to the tool radius Grooves in parallel to the periphery transverse grooves are not parallel at the beginning and end Longitudinal slot Transverse groove without groove wall offset TRAFO_TYPE_n 512 With additional linear axis and groove wall offset transformation type 514 On a machine with a second linear axis this transformation variant makes use of redundancy in order to perform improved tool compensation The following conditions then apply to the second linear axis e A smaller working area e The second linear axis should not be used for traversing the part program Certain machine data settings are assumed for the part program and the assignment of the corresponding axes in the BCS or MCS For more information refer to SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Function Manual Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 67 Offset contour normal OFFN transformation type 513 To mill grooves with TRACYL the following is programmed e Groove center line in the part program e Half the groove width programmed using OFFN To avoid damage to the groove side OFFN acts only when the tool radius compens
74. radius 7 3 mm with special feedrate FRCM modal continue inserting this rounding to N70 Modal rounding OFF When creating programs for machining workpieces it is not necessary to take into account the tool length or the tool radius You program the workpiece dimensions directly for example following the drawing You enter the tool data separately in a special data section Simply call the required tool with its offset data in the program and enable the tool radius compensation if necessary The control system performs the required path compensations based on the data to create the described workpiece See the following illustration for machining of a workpiece with different tool radius T1 tool 1 T2 tool 2 See the following illustration for approaching the workpiece position ZO different length compensations T1 tool 1 Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 F toolholder reference point T2 tool 2 TO no tool 93 8 10 2 Tool T Functionality The tool selection takes place when the T word is programmed Whether this is a tool change or only a preselection is defined in the machine data e The tool change tool call is performed either directly using the T word or e The change takes place after the preselection with the T word by an additional instruction M6 see also Section Miscellaneous function M Page 103 Note If a certain too
75. radius and diameter by either measuring the tool or entering the values in the tool list see Section Creating a new tool Page 19 for more information By using the actual position of point F machine coordinate and the reference point the control system can calculate the offset value assigned to length 1 or the tool radius for the selected axis F toolholder reference point M machine zero W workpiece zero machine Z actual position Intermediate position Known Z machine coordinate value Cc I _ ka pur O am Workpiece Offset Gxx e g G54 machine Figure 3 1 Determination of the length offset using the example of a drill 1 Z axis length milling Operating sequence 1 Select the desired operating area M MACHINE WW 2 Switch to JOG mode UL JOG Heas Open the lower level menu for tool measurement if tool H 3 Open the manual tool measurement window EasuUrFE manual 4 Use the axis traversing keys to move the tool to approach the workpiece in the Z direction X B 5 Switch to handwheel control mode HAND WHEEL Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 23 length Diameter o at Za Hjt ei 8 5 10 11 12 13 14 Select a suitable override feedrate and then use the handwheel to move the tool to scratch the required workpiece edge or the edge of the setting block if it is us
76. rapid traverse Programming and Operating Manual Milling 154 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 Explanation of the parameters SPCA and SPCO reference point on the first axis of the plane and of the second axis of the plane One point along the straight line of the row of holes is defined as the reference point for determining the spacing between the holes The distance to the first hole FDIS is defined from this point STA1 angle The straight line can be arranged in any position in the plane It is specified both by the point defined by SPCA and SPCO and by the angle contained by the straight line and the first axis of the workpiece coordinate system that is active when the cycle is called The angle is entered under STA1 in degrees FDIS and DBH distance The distance of the first hole and the reference point defined under SPCA and SPCO is programmed with FDIS The parameter DBH contains the distance between any two holes NUM number The NUM parameter is used to define the number of holes Programming example Row of holes Use this program to machine a row of holes consisting of five tapped holes arranged parallel to the Z axis of the ZX plane and which have a distance of 20 mm one to another The starting point of the row of holes is at Z20 and X30 whereby the first hole has a distance of 10 mm from this point The geometry of the row of holes is described by the cycle HOLES1 First drilling is carried out using CYCLE8
77. retraction SDR 0 must be set if the spindle direction is to reverse automatically If the machine data is defined such that no encoder is set in this case machine data MD30200 MA_NUM_ENCS is 0 the parameter must be assigned the value 3 or 4 for the direction of rotation otherwise alarm 61202 No spindle direction programmed is output and the cycle is aborted SDAC direction of rotation Because the cycle can also be called modally see Section Graphical cycle support in the program editor Page 124 it requires a direction of rotation for tapping further threaded holes This is programmed in parameter SDAC and corresponds to the direction of rotation programmed before the first call in the higher level program If SDR 0 the value assigned to SDAC has no meaning in the cycle and can be omitted in the parameterization ENC tapping If tapping is to be performed without encoder although an encoder exists parameter ENC must be assigned value 1 If however no encoder is installed and the parameter is assigned the value O it is ignored in the cycle MPIT and PIT thread lead as a thread size and as a value The parameter for the lead is only relevant if tapping is performed with encoder The cycle calculates the feedrate from the spindle speed and the lead The value for the thread lead can be defined either as the thread size for metric threads between M3 and M48 only or as a value distance from one thread turn to the next
78. same behavior can also be applied to braking procedures See the following illustration for basic course of the path velocity when using BRISK SOFT BRISK SOFT time optimized spares the mechanical parts Setpoint Programming BRISK Jerking path acceleration SOFT Jerk limited path acceleration Programming example N10 SOFT Gl X30 Z784 F650 Jerk limited path acceleration N90 BRISK X87 Z104 Continuing with jerking path acceleration 8 7 2 Exact stop continuous path control mode G9 G60 G64 Functionality G functions are provided for optimum adaptation to different requirements to set the traversing behavior at the block boundaries and for block advancing Example For example you would like to quickly position with the axes or you would like to machine path contours over multiple blocks Programming G60 Exact stop modally effective G64 Continuous path mode G9 Exact stop non modally effective G601 Exact stop window fine G602 Exact stop window coarse Programming and Operating Manual Milling 84 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 Exact stop G60 G9 If the exact stop function G60 or G9 is active the velocity for reaching the exact end position at the end of a block is decelerated to zero Another modal G group can be used here to set when the traversing movement of this block is considered ended and the next block is started e G601 Exact stop window fine Block advance takes place when all axes hav
79. system computes the components to a certain dimension e g overall length 1 total radius The respective overall dimension becomes effective when the compensation memory is activated How these values are calculated in the axes is determined by the tool type and the commands G17 G18 G19 see following illustrations e Tool type The tool type drill cutter defines which geometry data are necessary and how they are taken into account Tool special cases For the tool types cutter and drill the parameters for length 2 and length 3 are only required for special cases e g multi dimensional length offset for an angle head construction Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 95 See the following illustration for effect of the tool length compensation 3D special case Effect Length 3 Length 1 in Z Length 2 in Y Length 3 in X Length 2 Radius in X Y Length 1 in Y Length 2 in X Length 3 in Z Radius in Z X Length 1 in X Length 2 in Z Length 3 in Y Radius in Y Z The radius is not taken into account for the drill type F Toolholder reference point Length 1 See the following illustration for effect of the offsets with the tool type drill F toolholder reference point G17 Length 1 in Z Length 1 in Y Length 1 in X See the following illustration for effect of the offsets with the tool type cutter F toolholder reference point G17
80. that the point defined by DISCL lies between P1 and P3 i e with all motions that possess a component which runs vertically to the machining plane this component must have the same sign If a reversal of the direction is detected a tolerance of 0 01 mm is permitted Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 119 See the following sequence of the approach motion dependent on G340 G341 example with G17 Infeed movement in Z Straight line circle or oN Straight line or helix circle G341 P2 P3 Machining plane X Y P4 Programming example Approach along a semi circle with infeed N10 T1 D1 G17 G90 G94 Activate tool X Y plane N20 GO XO YO Z30 Approach PO N30 G41 G347 G340 DISCL 3 DISR 13 Z 0 F500 Approach along a semi circle with radius 13 mn Safety clearance to the plane 3 mm N40 Gl X40 Y 10 N50 G40 X20 Y20 N60 M30 alternatively N30 N40 N30 G41 G347 G340 DISCL 3 DISR 13 X40 Y 10 ZO F500 or N30 G41 G347 G340 DISCL 3 DISR 13 F500 N40 Gl X40 Y 10 ZO Explanation with regard to N30 N40 By using GO from N20 the point P1 starting point of the semi circle corrected by the tool radius is approached in the plane Z 30 then lowering to the depth P2 P3 with Z 3 DISCL The contour is reached at point X40 Y 10 in the depth Z 0 P4 along a helix curve at a feedrate of 500 mm min Approach and retraction velocities e Velocity of the previous block e g GO All motion
81. the USB sticker and the CNC e An external USB keyboard which functions as an external NC keyboard Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 1 2 Machine control panels 1 2 1 Overview Elements on the MCP Machine Control Panel front The SINUMERIK 808D MCP is available in the following variants e Horizontal MCP variant e Vertical MCP variant with a reserved slot for the handwheel e Vertical MCP variant with an override switch for the spindle Horizontal MCP wet od RF PONT AHA Bog Vertical MCP with reserved handwheel slot Vertical MCP with spindle override switch AA Bie FERETE Ce a a i i h E x lt n B p PB gB 0 E a EA FR g d A gti i Ls 5 EGE n 2o Mili g we x eI L Ss 3 fos mf BOB ENG e Programming and Operating Manual Milling 10 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 1 2 2 Control elements on the MCP Elements on the MCP Machine Control Panel front The following illustration uses a horizontal MCP as an example to show control elements available on the MCP unavailable for the vertical MCP with reserved handwheel slot 4 Operating mode keys Feedrate override switch Traverses the selected axis at the specified feedrate override Program control keys Keys for program start stop and reset User defined keys fF For more information refer to the table below Further information
82. the center point _LENG _WID and _CRAD pocket length pocket width and corner radius Use the parameters LENG WID and _CRAD to define the form of a pocket in the plane If you cannot traverse the programmed corner radius with the active tool since its radius is larger then the corner radius of the machine pocket corresponds to the tool radius If the milling tool radius is larger than half of the length or width of the pocket then the cycle will be aborted and alarm 61105 Cutter radius too large is output Programming and Operating Manual Milling 200 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 _PA _PO reference point Use the parameters _PA and _PO to define the reference point of the pocket in the axes of the plane This is the pocket center point _STA angle _STA indicates the angle between the first axis of the plane abscissa and the longitudinal axis of the pocket _MID infeed depth Use this parameter to define the maximum infeed depth when roughing The depth infeed is performed by the cycle in equally sized infeed steps By using _MID and the entire depth the cycle calculates this infeed automatically The minimum possible number of infeed steps is used as the basis _MID 0 means that the cut to pocket depth is made with one feed _FAL finishing allowance at edge The finishing allowance only affects the machining of the pocket in the plane on the edge If the final machining allowance 2 tool diameter the pocket will n
83. the following sequence of motions e Approach of the reference plane brought forward by the safety clearance by using GO e Traversing to final drilling depth with G1 and the feedrate programmed prior to the cycle call e Spindle stop with M5 e Press the following key e Retraction to the retraction plane with GO Programming and Operating Manual Milling 148 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 Explanation of the parameters For the parameters RTP RFP SDIS DP DPR refer to Section Drilling centering CYCLE81 Page 126 gt gt GO gt G1 p gt M5 Mo CIOOOO00n RTP RFP SDIS RFP DP RFP DPR SDIR direction of rotation This parameter determines the direction of rotation with which the drilling operation is carried out in the cycle If values other than 3 or 4 M3 M4 are generated alarm 61102 No spindle direction programmed is generated and the cycle is aborted Programming example Third drilling CYCLE87 is called at position X70 Y50 in the XY plane The drilling axis is the Z axis The final drilling depth is specified as an absolute value The safety clearance is 2 mm N10 GO G17 G90 F200 S300 Specification of technology values N20 D3 T3 2113 Approach retraction plane N30 X70 Y50 Approach drilling position N40 CYCLE87 113 110 2 77 3 Cycle call with programmed direction of rotation of spindle M3 N50 M02 End of program Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP1
84. the following softkey Accept element Select contour element The parameters for the selected element will then be displayed The name of the element appears 2 Position the cursor on the desired contour element in the contour chain and select it using this key at the top of the parameterization window If the contour element can be represented geometrically it is highlighted accordingly in the graphic display area i e the color of the contour element changes from white to black Modifying contour element You can use the cursor keys to select a programmed contour element in the contour chain Press el this key to display the parameter input fields The parameters can now be edited Programming and Operating Manual Milling 242 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 Insert a contour element Use the cursor keys in the contour chain to select the contour element in front of the position for the new element Then select the contour element to be inserted from the softkey bar After you have configured the parameters for the new contour element confirm the insert operation by pressing the following softkey Accept element Subsequent contour elements are updated automatically according to the new contour status Delete contour element Delete Use the cursor keys to select the element you wish to delete The selected contour symbol and elenent associated contour element in the programming graphic are highlighted in red Then press thi
85. the parameter VARI to define the machining type Possible values are e 1 roughing e 2 finishing AP1 diameter of blank spigot Use this parameter to define the blank dimension of the spigot without sign The internally calculated radius of the approach semi circle depends on this dimension Note A tool compensation must be programmed before the cycle is called Otherwise the cycle is canceled and alarm 61009 Active tool number 0 is output Internally in the cycle a new current workpiece coordinate system is used which influences the actual value display The zero point of this coordinate system is to be found in the pocket center point At the end of the cycle the original coordinate system is active again Programming example Circular spigot Machining a spigot from a blank with a diameter of 55 mm and a maximum infeed of 10 mm per cut specification of a final machining allowance for subsequent finishing of the spigot surface The whole machining is performed with reverse rotation See the following programming example for circular spigot N10 G90 G17 GO 81800 M3 D1 T1 Specification of technology values N11 M6 N20 CYCLE 10 0 3 20 50 00 70 10 0 5 0 900 Roughing cycle call 800 dbp 1 55 N30 Dl T2 M6 Change tool N40 S2400 M3 Specification of technology values Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 183 N50 CYCLERS 10 0 37 20 gt 50 60 gt 70 T0 0
86. the safety clearance for swarf removal by using GO Dwell time at the starting point parameter DTS Approach of the drilling depth last reached reduced by anticipation distance by using GO Traversing to the next drilling depth with G1 Sequence of motions is continued until the final drilling depth is reached Retraction to the retraction plane with GO See the following illustration for parameters for CYCLE83 Kanno Deep hole drilling with chip breakage VARI 0 e Approach of the reference plane brought forward by the safety clearance by using GO e Traversing to the first drilling depth with G1 the feedrate for which is derived from the feedrate defined with the program call which is subject to parameter FRF feedrate factor e Dwell time at final drilling depth parameter DTB Retraction by 1 mm from the current drilling depth with G1 and the feedrate programmed in the calling program for chip breaking e Traversing to the next drilling depth with G1 and the programmed feedrate sequence of motions is continued until the final drilling depth is reached e Retraction to the retraction plane with GO G1 cS GO a gt G4 RTP RFP SDIS RFP FDEP DP RFP DPR Explanation of the parameters For the parameters RTP RFP SDIS DP DPR refer to Section Drilling centering CYCLE81 Page 126 Programming and Operating Manual Milling 132 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 Interrelation of the DP or DPR FD
87. therefore be assigned with values in seconds Any deviations from this procedure must be expressly stated 9 4 3 Drilling centering CYCLE81 Programming CYCLE81 RTP RFP SDIS DP DPR Parameters Data type CE REAL Retraction plane absolute REAL Reference plane absolute SDIS REAL Safety clearance enter without sign DP REAL Final drilling depth absolute DPR REAL Final drilling depth relative to the reference plane enter without sign Function The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed and feedrate to the entered final drilling depth Sequence Position reached prior to cycle start The drilling position is the position in the two axes of the selected plane The cycle creates the following sequence of motions Approach of the reference plane brought forward by the safety clearance by using GO e Traversing to the final drilling depth at the feedrate programmed in the calling program G1 e Retraction to the retraction plane with GO Programming and Operating Manual Milling 126 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 Explanation of the parameters RFP and RTP reference plane and retraction plane Normally reference plane RFP and retraction plane RTP have different values The cycle assumes that the retraction plane precedes the reference plane This means that the distance from the retraction plane to the final drilling depth is larger than the distance from the reference plane to the final drilling depth
88. twice Sequence Main program a as re N20 L10 Call Mile E Subroutine L10 ER a ae t N10 R1534 er N20 X Z N80 L10 Call z a Sesh fe o Return SA I Mm Y Subroutine name The program is given a unique name allowing it to be selected from several subroutines When you create the program the program name may be freely selected provided the following conventions are observed The same rules apply as for the names of main programs Example LRAHMEN7 It is also possible to use the address word L in subroutines The value can have 7 decimal places integers only Note With address L leading zeros are meaningful for differentiation Example L128 is not L0128 or L00128 These are three different subroutines Note The subroutine name LL6 is reserved for tool change Subroutine call Subroutines are called in a program main or subroutine with their names To do this a separate block is required Example N10 L785 Call subroutine L785 N20 LRAHMEN7 Call subroutine LRAHMEN7 Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 111 Program repetition P If a subroutine is to be executed several times in succession write the number of times it is to be executed in the block of the call after the subroutine name under the address P A maximum of 9 999 cycles are possible P1 P9999 Example N10 L785 P3 Call subroutine L785 3 cycles Nesting de
89. used FAL is automatically reduced to the maximum possible value In the case of roughing milling is performed with a reciprocating movement and depth infeed at both end points of the slot Programming and Operating Manual Milling 190 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 VARI MIDF FFP2 and SSF machining type infeed depth feedrate and speed Use the parameter VARI to define the machining type Possible values are e 0O complete machining in two parts Solid machining of the slot SLOT1 SLOT2 to the finishing allowance is performed at the spindle speed programmed before the cycle was called and with feedrate FFP1 Depth infeed is defined with MID Solid machining of the remaining finishing allowance is carried out at the spindle speed defined via SSF and the feedrate FFP2 Depth infeed is defined with MIDF If MIDF 0 the infeed is performed right to the final depth If FFP2 is not programmed feedrate FFP1 is active This also applies analogously if SSF is not specified i e the speed programmed prior to the cycle call will apply e 1 Roughing The groove SLOT1 SLOT2 is solid machined up to the finishing allowance at the speed programmed before the cycle call and at the feedrate FFP1 The depth infeed is programmed via MID e 2 Finishing The cycle requires that the slot SLOT1 SLOT2 is already machined to a residual finishing allowance and that it is only necessary to machine the final finishing allowance If FFP2 and SSF are
90. values other than 3 or 4 M3 M4 are generated alarm 61102 No spindle direction programmed is generated and the cycle is not executed Programming and Operating Manual Milling 146 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 RPA retraction path along the first axis Use this parameter to define a retraction movement along the first axis abscissa which is executed after the final drilling depth has been reached and oriented spindle stop has been performed RPO retraction path along the second axis Use this parameter to define a retraction movement along the second axis ordinate which is executed after the final drilling depth has been reached and oriented spindle stop has been performed RPAP retraction path along the drilling axis You use this parameter to define a retraction movement along the drilling axis which is executed after the final drilling axis has been reached and oriented spindle stop has been performed POSS spindle position Use POSS to program the spindle position for the oriented spindle stop in degrees which is performed after the final drilling depth has been reached Note It is possible to stop the active spindle with orientation The angular value is programmed using a transfer parameter CYCLE86 can be used if the spindle to be used for the drilling operation is technically able to execute the SPOS command Programming example Second drilling CYCLE86 is called at position X70 Y50 in the XY plane The drilli
91. window which shows the coordinates of probe the probe Enter the values in the input fields as required see table below for the parameter descriptions Refer to the machine coordinate system for all position values Abs position PS P 1868 nn 6 Feedrate 98 8608 mm min 8 Center point A Aga OEN plane G17 O Center point Y 8 668 mm 8 Spindle speed A ga rpr 4 Dianeter A ppg nn 9 Dir of rotation HS O Thickness 8 6606 mm 10 Safety distance 1 660 mn Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 219 Absolute position of the probe in Z direction The measurement feedrate in JOG mode this parameter is used to create the measuring program The measured probe center the machine G17 G18 and G19 for selection coordinate Spindle speed in r p m The diameter of the probe the measured value Direction of rotation of the spindle M3 M4 or M5 will be shown after calibrating The thickness of the probe The minimum distance between the workpiece surface and the workpiece this parameter is used to create the measuring program Calibrating the probe i 1 Select the desired operating area M MACHINE NNN 2 Switch to JOG mode UL JOG egm 3 Open the lower level menu for tool measurement 7 tool H 4 Open the auto tool measurement window EasuUrFE auto Calibratd 5 Press this vertical softkey to enter the probe calibration screen probe 6 Move the calibrating tool unti
92. yet synchronized In this case the direction is specified in machine data Other movement specifications for the spindle are possible with SPOS ACP SPOS ACN as for rotary axes The spindle movement takes place parallel to any other axis movements in the same block This block is ended when both movements are finished Programming SPOS Absolute position 0 lt 360 degrees SPOS ACP Absolute dimensions approach position in positive direction SPOS ACN Absolute dimensions approach position in negative direction SPOS IC Incremental dimensions leading sign determines the traversal direction SPOS DC Absolute dimensions approach position directly on the shortest path Programming example N10 SPOS 14 3 Spindle position 14 3 degrees N80 GO X89 Z300 SPOS 25 6 Positioning spindle with axis movements This block is ended when all movements have finished N81 X200 2300 The N81 block only begins once the spindle position from N80 is reached 8 9 Contour programming support 8 9 1 Contour definition programming Functionality If the end points for the contour are not directly specified in the machining drawing it is also possible to use an angle specification ANG to determine the straight line In a contour corner you can insert the elements chamfer or rounding The respective instruction CHR or RND is written in the block which leads to the corner The blueprint p
93. 0 0BA1 01 2014 RNDM Modal rounding Value gt 0 Radius of chamfer modal rounding ON This rounding is inserted in all contour corners Value 0 Modal rounding OFF FRC Non modal feedrate for chamfer rounding Value gt 0 feedrate in mm min G94 or mm rev G95 FRCMe Modal feedrate for chamfer rounding Value gt 0 Feedrate in mm min G94 or mm rev G95 Modal feedrate for chamfer rounding ON Value 0 Modal feedrate for chamfer rounding OFF Feedrate F applies to the chamfer rounding Information The chamfer rounding functions are executed in the current planes G17 to G19 The appropriate instruction CHF or CHR or RND or RNDMz is written in the block with axis movements leading to the corner The programmed value for chamfer and rounding is automatically reduced if the contour length of an involved block is insufficient No chamfer rounding is inserted if e more than three blocks in the connection are programmed that do not contain any information for traversing in the plane e ora plane change is carried out F FRC FRCM are not active when a chamfer is traversed with GO If the feedrate F is active for chamfer rounding it is by default the value from the block which leads away from the corner Other settings can be configured via machine data Chamfer CHF or CHR A linear contour element is inserted between linear and circle contours in any combination The edge is broken See th
94. 0 0BA1 01 2014 149 9 4 11 Drilling with stop 2 CYCLE88 Programming CYCLE88 RTP RFP SDIS DP DPR DTB SDIR Parameters Data type REAL Retraction plane absolute REAL Reference plane absolute SDIS REAL Safety clearance enter without sign DP REAL Final drilling depth absolute DPR REAL Final drilling depth relative to the reference plane enter without sign REAL Dwell time at final drilling depth chip breakage SDIR INT Direction of rotation Values 3 for M3 4 for M4 Function The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed and feedrate to the entered final drilling depth When drilling with stop a spindle stop without orientation M5 and a programmed stop MO are generated when the final drilling depth is reached Pressing the following key traverses the outward movement at rapid traverse until the retraction plane is reached Sequence Position reached prior to cycle start The drilling position is the position in the two axes of the selected plane The cycle creates the following sequence of motions e Approach of the reference plane brought forward by the safety clearance by using GO e Traversing to final drilling depth with G1 and the feedrate programmed prior to the cycle call e Dwell time at final drilling depth e Spindle and program stop with M5 MO After program stop press the following key e Retraction to the retraction plane with GO Programming and Operating Manual Mill
95. 0 G17 X Y plane Z standing vertically on it N20 GO z50 N30 G1 X0 Y50 F300 Approach starting point N40 G3 X0 YO 233 I0 J 25 TURN 3 Helix M30 8 4 5 Feedrate override for circles CFTCP CFC Functionality For activated tool radius compensation G41 G42 and circle programming it is imperative to correct the feedrate at the cutter center point if the programmed F value is to act at the circle contour Internal and external machining of a circle and the current tool radius are taken into account automatically if the tool radius compensation is enabled This feedrate correction override is not necessary for linear paths The path velocities at the cutter center point and at the programmed contour are identical Programming and Operating Manual Milling 78 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 If you wish the programmed feedrate always to act at the cutter center point path then disable the feedrate override The modally acting G group that contains CFTCP CFC G functions is provided for switching Programming CFTCP Feedrate override OFF the programmed feedrate acts at the milling cutter center point CFC Feedrate override with circle ON See the following illustration for feedrate override G901 with internal external machining Programmed feedrate value F _ Corrected feedrate at the cutter center point prog corr Corrected feedrate e External machining Fcorr Fprog rcont rtool Font e Internal machinin
96. 0 abs e RND 5 A 16 Press this softkey to confirm ccept element 17 Press this softkey to select a contour element of straight vertical line EERE 18 Enter the parameters for this element and press this softkey to confirm elenent e q1 90 e RND 5 Vai 19 Press this softkey to select a contour element of circular arc Dialog 20 Enter the parameters for this element and press this softkey to select the desired contour Se aor characteristics e Direction of rotation clockwise e R 25 e xX 0 abs e Y 0 abs e 0 abs A 21 Press this softkey to confirm ccept element Now you can see the programmed contour in the graphics window 10 48 09 2612 12 18 Circular arc Dir of rot Oo 25 088 8 008 abs O 8 886 abs O 8 808 abs O 25 0099 abs O Trans to next element RND 8 888 Free text input Contour allowance kancel 8 608 Right O S Follower Zoom a Programming and Operating Manual Milling 252 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 Example 3 Starting point X 0 abs Y 5 7 abs machining plane G17 The contour is programmed in a clockwise direction Starting point X 0 Y 5 7 Operating sequence E 1 Select the desired operating area MANAGER 2 Enter the desired program folder o Select a program with cursor keys and press this key to open the program in the program editor ae 4 Press this softkey to open the contour editor rr 5 Define a start point
97. 000 1 00000 X 35725 XII C rors Nala XSOYZS MCALL GOZ100 M30 Programming example 2 12 24 bag NS GLY G90 G54 Gil Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 213 N10 N15 N20 SUPA G00 2300 DO SUPA GOO X300 Y300 Tak Ae N25 MSG Please change to Tool No 1 N30 MO5 MO9 MOO N35S4000 M3 NAO CYCLE 0 90 00000 2200000 2200000 0 200000 2 00000 404000007 2 00000 N45 S4500 M3 No CYGCEB COO ere ge 207 LOO yes a0 ey Ue Ayo Ope g N55 SUPA GOO 24300 DO N60 SUPA GOO X300 Y300 Noo To D1 N70 MSG N75 M05 M09 MOO N80 S5000 M3 G94 F300 Neo GOO HG Y9 NID GOO Az N93 GOL F300 4 10 N100 G41 Y 90 N105 GOL X10 NLTO GOT X37 NLL GOL X70 NIZO GO1 Y 30 N125 G01 G40 N L30 G00 ZAQ N135 SUPA GOO 2300 DO N140 SUPA GOO X300 Y300 N145 T4 D1 N150 NISS 0 00000 0 20000 Please change to Tool No 3 RND 5 CHR 2 RND 4 X80 MSG Please change to Tool No 4 MO5 MO9 MOO NEGO 5 50 00 M3 NIGD POCKET4 220000 0 200007 0 20000 2 000007 10750000 NiO 35300 M3 NiO POCKET 290900 2 000003 N180 N185 N190 Ni9S N200 5000000 0 00000 2 00000 300700000 254 O00007 200400000 07 50 00000 OQ 0 20000 0 20000 0 50000 SUPA GOO 2300 DO SUPA GOO X300 Y300 Oy DL MSG Please change to MO5 M09 MOO N205 S7000 M3 NZ1LO SLOTA S0e000007 0000007 2200000 LOLOOO00 7 ZOO 000 es 00000 90 00000 9400000 290000007 90007000005
98. 01 2014 63 Rotary axis The rotary axis cannot be programmed as it is occupied by a geometry axis and thus cannot be programmed directly as channel axis Meaning TRACYL d Activates the first TRACYL function specified in the channel machine data d is the parameter for the working diameter TRACYL d n Activates the n th TRACYL function specified in the channel machine data The maximum for n is 2 TRACYL d 1 corresponds to TRACYL q D Value for the working diameter The working diameter is double the distance between the tool tip and the turning center This diameter must always be specified and be larger than 1 n Optional 2nd parameter for the TRACYL data block 1 preselected or 2 Slot side compensation Optional 3rd parameter whose value for TRACYL is preselected using the mode for machine data Value range 0 Transformation type 514 without groove wall offset as previous 1 Transformation type 514 with groove wall offset TRAFOOF Transformation OFF BCS and MCS are once again identical OFFN Offset contour normal Distance of the groove side from the programmed reference contour Note An active TRACYL transformation is likewise deactivated if one of the other transformations is activated in the relevant channel e g TRANSMIT OFFN address Distance from the groove side wall to the programmed path The groove center line is generally programmed OFFN defines the half groove width for activated milling cutter radius compensati
99. 1 Page 126 i DIATH KDIAM and PIT nominal diameter core diameter and thread pitch These parameters are used to determine the thread data nominal diameter core diameter and pitch The parameter DIATH is the external and KDIAM is the internal diameter of the thread The travel in travel out movements are created internally in the cycle based on these parameters FFR feedrate The value of the parameter FFR is specified as the current feedrate value for thread milling It is effective when thread milling on a helical path This value will be reduced in the cycle for the travel in travel out movements The retraction is performed outside the helix path using GO CDIR direction of rotation This parameter is used to specify the value for the machining direction of the thread If the parameter has an illegal value the following message will appear Wrong milling direction G3 is generated In this case the cycle is continued and G3 is automatically generated TYPTH thread type The parameter TYPTH is used to define whether you want to machine an external or an internal thread CPA and CPO center point These parameters are used to define the center point of the drill hole or of the spigot on which the thread will be produced Note The cutter radius is calculated internally in the cycle Therefore a tool compensation must be programmed before calling the cycle Otherwise the alarm 61000 No tool compensation ac
100. 1 R2 R3 e lf the option orientation transformation is available then NC blocks in which the tool orientation and where relevant also the tool rotation is programmed using direction vectors can also be compressed e tis interrupted by any other type of NC instruction e g an auxiliary function output Examples Example 1 COMPON Program code Comment N10 COMPON N11 G1 X0 37 Y2 9 F600 N12 X16 87 N13 X16 865 Y 698 Y 72 N14 X16 91 Y 799 N1037 COMPOF Example 2 COMPCAD Program code Compressor function COMPON on G1 before end point and feed Compressor function off Comment GOO X30 Yo Z40 Gl F10000 G642 SOFT COMPCAD STOPFIFO N24050 N24051 N24052 N24053 N24054 N24055 N24056 COMPOF GOO Z50 M30 62 Z232 x41 X43 X43 X43 X43 X44 499 365 115 365 556 818 076 Z232 Z232 Z232 Z232 Z232 Loe 500 497 477 449 1307 300 Blending function G642 on Jerk limiting SOFT on Compressor function COMPCAD on Compressor function off Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 8 2 12 Cylinder surface transformation TRACYL Functionality e The TRACYL cylinder surface transformation function can be used to machine Longitudinal grooves on cylindrical bodies Transverse grooves on cylindrical objects Grooves with any path on cylindrical bodies The path of the groov
101. 100 00000 8000000 72200000 3000000 020000 1500 00000 LZ J T2 M06 S4000M3 CYCLE 70 2000000 0400000 2 00000 10 00000 2000000 70 00000 1 090000 0 00000 OvO0000 pas 00000 0 50000 1200200000 1000 00000 0 Ly 100 00000 8280 00000 POCKET4 20 00000 0 200000 2 00000 5 00000 20 00000 0500000 O U0000 2 00000 UsoU000 Os20000 L000 00000 20000000 Oz 21 5 00000 z 2600000 2 00000 Ta M06 M8 S5000M3 CYCLE76 20 00000 0 00000 2 00000 10 00000 90 00000 70 00000 1 00000 0 00000 Programming and Operating Manual Milling 212 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 00000 gi2 00000 0 90000 4 1000 00000 1000 00000 Oy 2 1200 00000 8000000 POCKET4 20 00000 0 00000 200000 5 00000 20 00000 0 00000 0 00000 G 00000 0 50000 0 20000 1000 00000 1000 00000 0 127 300000 z 7 2 00000 2 00000 T20 M06 S4000M3 M8 SOLA 20 00000 O2 00000 2 00000 b 00000 yar 4000000 2 00000 7 00000 0200000 2ps 00000 0 00000 L80 00000 200 00000 5200 00000 2 00000 3 0 10000 UU 2 00000 500 Q00000 5000 00000 500 00000 TLL M06 S1200M3 MCALL CYCLE83 20 00000 0 00000 2 00000 10 00000 0 00000 5 00000 5 00000 1 00000 010000 100000 0 327 2200000 1200000 0 10000 1 00000 A 3OY 25 KSOYH 25 RH 3OY7 5 XIXI MCALL T14 M06 M05 MC Ai CYOCORSAT 20700000 U00000 2 00000 6 00000 0 00000 0210000 37 l 00000 0 00000 600 00000 8800 00000 3 0 Up T 3 00
102. 2 and then tapping is performed using CYCLE84 tapping without compensating chuck The holes are 80 mm in depth difference between reference plane and final drilling depth Yb Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 155 N10 G90 F30 S500 M3 T10 D1 Specification of the technological values for the machining step N20 G17 G90 X20 2105 Y30 Approach start position N30 MCALL CYCLE82 105 102 2 22 O 1 Modal call of drilling cycle N40 HOLES1 20 30 0 10 20 5 Call of row of holes cycle the cycle starts with the first hole only the drill positions are approached in this cycle N50 MCALL Deselect modal call Change tool N60 G90 GO X30 2110 Y105 Approach position next to 5th hole N70 MCALL CYCLE84 105 102 2 22 O Sr 4 2 300 Modal call of the tapping cycle N80 HOLES1 20 30 0 10 20 5 Call of row of holes cycle starting with the fifth hole in the row N90 MCALL Deselect modal call N100 M02 End of program Programming example Grid of holes Use this program to machine a grid of holes consisting of five rows with five holes each which are arranged in the XY plane with a spacing of 10 mm between them The starting point of the grid is at X30 Y20 The example uses R parameters as transfer parameters for the cycle R10 102 Reference plane R11 105 Retraction plane R12 2 Safety clearance R13 75 Drilling depth R14 30 Reference point for th
103. 2 SIN R1 R6 Calculation and assignment to axis addresses N30 R1 R1 R3 R4 R4 1 N40 IF R4 gt 0 GOTOB MC1 N50 M2 Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 109 Explanation In block N10 the starting conditions are assigned to the corresponding arithmetic parameters The calculation of the coordinates in X and Z and the processing takes place in N20 In block N30 R1 is incremented by the clearance angle R3 and R4 is decremented by 1 If R4 gt 0 N20 is executed again otherwise N50 with End of program 8 14 4 Jump destination for program jumps Functionality A label or a block number serve to mark blocks as jump destinations for program jumps Program jumps can be used to branch to the program sequence Labels can be freely selected but must contain a minimum of 2 and a maximum of 8 letters or numbers of which the first two characters must be letters or underscore characters Labels that are in the block that serves as the jump destination are ended by a colon They are always at the start of a block If a block number is also present the label is located after the block number Labels must be unique within a program Programming example N10 LABEL1 Gl X20 F100 LABEL1 is the label jump destination N20 GO X10 Y10 TR789 GO X10 Zz20 TR789 is the label jump destination N30 GO X30 230 No block number existing N100 GO X40 240 Block number can be jump target M30 8 15 Subroutine tech
104. 4 G90 G94 Tool selection clamping compensation F1000 N20 SPOS 0 Approach the starting position N30 SETMS 2 Set the second spindle as the main spindle N40 M3 S2000 Run the spindle N50 DIAMOF Change the diameter dimensioning to radius dimensioning N60 GO X23 Z105 N70 TRACYL 20 Activate cylinder surface transformation N80 G19 Plane selection Machining a hook shaped groove Program code Comment N90 Gl YO Z 10 Approach starting position N100 G42 OFFN 4 5 Tool radius compensation right of contour on N110 X19 F500 N120 Z 25 N130 Y30 N140 OFFN 3 5 N150 YO N160 2 10 N170 X25 N180 TRAFOOF N190 DIAMON Diameter dimensioning N200 G40 Tool radius compensation off N210 GO X80 z100 Retraction in rapid traverse N220 M30 End of program Description Without groove wall offset transformation type 512 The controller transforms the programmed traversing movements of the cylinder coordinate system to the traversing movements of the real machine axes e Rotary axis e Infeed axis perpendicular to rotary axis e Longitudinal axis parallel to rotary axis The linear axes are positioned perpendicular to one another The infeed axis cuts the rotary axis Programming and Operating Manual Milling 66 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 With groove wall offset transformation type 513 Kinematics as above but an additional longitudinal axis parallels to the peripheral direction The linear axes are
105. 4500 M3 POCKET4 50 00000 0 00000 2 00000 5 00000 7 50000 0 00000 Q 00000 5 00000 O LO000 Us LOVU 3200 00000 400 000007 Oy Lap 2 00000 y 4 00000 1 200000 GO Z100 T3 DL DRILL DS M6 S5000 M3 GO XO YO MCAIIy CYCLES Li S0 00000 gt 0200000 2200000 5 00000 0 00000 HOLES2 0 00000 0 00000 10 00000 45 00000 60 00000 6 MCALL M30 Programming example 4 50 43 91 G17 G90 G60 G54 T1 D1 FACEMILL D50 M6 S3500 M3 GO XO YO Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 217 GO AZ CYCLE I4 50 00000 1 00000 2 00000 0 00000 0 00000 0 00000 50 00000 S0 00000 rka 000007 40 00000 0 140000 300 00000 Ll J S4000 M3 CYCLE L 20000003 0 10000 2 00000 000000 0s000007 0 00000 S000000 50 00000 yu sJ0000 A000000 0200000 250 00000 Sar T2 D2 ENDMILL M6 S3500 M6 CYCLEJ2 SUB PART 2 50 00000 0 00000 2 00000 30 0000 2 00000 010000 010000 30000000 20000000 lily 427 L 4 00000 300 00000 1 2 00000 T4 D1 ENDMILL D10 M6 S4000 M3 GO Xaoo YS GO Z2 Gl F300 Z 8 G42 Gl Y 15 X50 Gl X44 Y 2 RND 2 G1 YO X 22 G40 Y30 M30 Subroutine name SUB PART 2 Subroutine content G17 G90 GO X3 Y3 G2 X327 Y 40 91 ISAC 7532 703 J AC 719 298 G3 X46 27 Y 47 I AC 38 745 J AC 54 722 Gl X42 Y 8 X3 Y3 M2 end of contour A Appendix A 1 Creating a new cutting edge Note You can load the machine
106. 5 FP 1 Z 0 Approach fixed point 1 in Z N10 G75 FP 2 X 0 Y 0 Approach fixed point 2 in X and Y e g to change a tool N30 M30 End of program Note The programmed position values for X Y Z any value here 0 are ignored but must still be written 8 6 2 Reference point approach G74 Functionality The reference point can be approached in the NC program with G74 The direction and speed of each axis are stored in machine data G74 requires a separate block and is non modal The machine axis identifier must be programmed In the block after G74 the previous G command of the Interpolation type group GO G1 G2 is active again Programming example N10 G74 X 0 Y 0 Z 0 Note The programmed position values for X Y Z any value here 0 are ignored but must still be written Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 83 8 7 Acceleration control and exact stop continuous path 8 7 1 Acceleration pattern BRISK SOFT BRISK The axes of the machine change their velocities using the maximum permissible acceleration value until reaching the final velocity BRISK allows time optimized working The set velocity is reached in a short time However jumps are present in the acceleration pattern SOFT The axes of the machine accelerate along a non linear constant characteristic until reaching the final velocity With this jerk free acceleration SOFT allows for reduced machine load The
107. 5 Y35 in the XY plane the tapping axis is the Z axis The parameters SDR and SDAC for the direction of rotation must be assigned parameter ENC is assigned the value 1 the value for the depth is the absolute value Lead parameter PIT can be omitted A compensating chuck is used in machining Programming and Operating Manual Milling 142 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 N10 G90 GO T11 D1 S500 M3 Specification of technology values N20 G17 X35 Y35 260 Approach drilling position N30 G1 F200 Setting the path feedrate N40 CYCLE840 20 0 3 15 1 4 3 1 6 3 Cycle call dwell time 1 s direction of rotation for retraction M4 direction of rotation after cycle M3 no safety clearance parameters MPIT and PIT have been omitted N50 M02 End of program Programming example Tapping with encoder In this program a thread is tapped with encoder at position X35 Y35 in the XY plane The drilling axis is the Z axis The lead parameter must be defined automatic reversal of the direction of rotation is programmed A compensating chuck is used in machining N10 G90 GO T11 D1 S500 M4 Specification of technology values N20 G17 X35 Y35 260 Approach drilling position N30 CYCLE840 20 0 3 15 1 3 4 1 6 3 Cycle call without safety clearance with absolute depth specification N40 M02 End of program Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 143 9 4 8 Reaming 1 CYCLE85 Programming CYCLE85 RTP
108. 7 ATR Proceed as follows to transfer a part program from external through the RS232 interface 1 Select the desired operating area on the PPU PROGRAM MANAGER Bes eens 2 Press this softkey to go to the RS232 directory 3 Press this vertical softkey in the RS232 window Receive eee 4 Press this button on the main screen of SinuComPCIN and select the desired program for execution for example Test mpf The data transferring starts On the NC side Receiving of data 115266 68 1 HOHE _N_TEST_HPF RSZ3Z 7 _H_MPF_DIR 11008 On the SinuComPCIN side 11776 Bytes send of 33761636 File 0 04 Falcon D ata for test customer mp moditedstest MPF Abort d ee nacu Abort 2 Wait until SinuComPCIN has finished data transfer and click this button Transfer Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 45 5 6 Machining at a specific point Functionality The block search function provides advance of the program to the required block in the part program You can start machining from a specified program block after stopping interrupting the program execution or during remachining Operating sequence M 1 Select the desired operating area __ MACHINE gt AUTO 2 Switch to AUTO mode Block 3 Press this softkey to open the block search window k search Al 4 Search for the required starting point with cursor keys or the following softkey Search AA If the part program is sto
109. 8 1 2 POO C E T 8 2 F OSIMOMAl da e E saieinui tani ianinnlousie Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 3 Programming dimensions vesesssts ccectcrwesncencccaeeyanecwceceleccusd denn oneasesteebaenctenelecses EAs Eiaa sE aria Plane selection G17 to GTO ececacecesesecczsceinteenteicteiestinnessaersGnacdesdedeeriseiestisie euece tinge esdsdaercianensdbeaese iiinis Absolute incremental dimensioning G90 G91 AC IC oo ecccccccccceeeeceeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeceseeeesseeesaeeeeeneeesaes Dimensions in metric units and inches G71 G70 G710 G700 0o cece ececceceececeeeeeeenecesaeeeeaeeeeaeens Polar coordinates pole definition G110 G111 G112 ccc ccccseeeseeeneeeteeeeeeeeseeseeeeeaneeseeeteeeeaeenes Programmable work offset TRANS ATRANS cccccccccseececeececeececeeeeceeeeeseeeeseecesseeessesetseeeeseeeeseeeesaaees Programmable rotation ROT AROT o csceccteneinasesdecccadenctaaneahenedacuasceaaeahenaeedensiaateatenedecsasiha seadudene denebanseahetense Programmable scaling factor SCALE ASCALE ccccccecccceeccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeceseecesseeeeseeeeseeeesaneetaaees Programmable mirroring MIRROR AMIRROR ccccccecccceececeeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeseecesseeesaueeeseeeeseeeeseeeesaaees Workpiece clamping settable work offset G54 to G59 G500 G53 G153 NC block compression COMPON COMPCURV COMPCAD nee e ieee rete e teen 61 Cylinder surface transformation TRACYL
110. 800g IS 8 G1 ROY Position Repos offset TFS Axis feedrate 56 nn min 85 G566 6 G68 226 Act val Work WCS Act val Mach MCS Pe erae fab ee ee Opens the T S M window where you can activate tools see Section Activating the tool Page 20 set spindle speed and direction see Section Activating the spindle Page 22 and select a G code or other M functions for activating the settable work offset Switches the display to the relative coordinate system You can set the reference point in this coordinate system For detailed information refer to Section Setting the relative coordinate system REL Page 227 Opens the workpiece measurement window where you determine the work offset data For detailed information about this window refer to Section Setting up the workpiece Page 25 Opens the tool measurement window where you determine the tool offset data For detailed information about this window refer to Sections Measuring the tool manually Page 23 Measuring the tool with a probe auto Page 220 and Calibrating the tool probe Page 219 Opens the face cutting window where you specify parameters for machining the end face or peripheral surface of a blank without creating a special part program For detailed information about this window refer to Section milling Page 228 Opens the settings window where you can se
111. AL Reference plane absolute SDIS REAL Safety clearance enter without sign REAL Final drilling depth absolute eR _ ReAL__ REAL Final drilling depth relative to the reference plane enter without sign DTB RL Dwell time at thread depth chip breakage m Direction of rotation after end of cycle Values 3 4 or 5 for M3 M4 or M5 MPIT REAL Thread lead as a thread size signed Range of values 3 for M3 to 48 for M48 the sign determines the direction of rotation in the thread REAL Thread lead as a value signed Range of values 0 001 2000 000 mm the sign determines the direction of rotation in the thread POSS POSS REAL Spindle position for oriented spindle stop in the cycle in degrees SST REAL Speed for tapping SST REAL Speed for retraction Speed for retraction Values 1 1 1st axis of the current plane 2 2nd axis of the current plane 3 3rd axis of the current plane PSYS OOOO ON O PSYS Internal parameter only the default value 0 is possible PSYS INT sd Internal parameter only the default value 0 is possible Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 135 Data type Description VARI INT Machining type Values 0 Tapping in one pass 1 Deep hole tapping with chip breakage 2 Deep hole tapping with chip removal DAM REAL Incremental drilling depth value range 0 lt Max value VRT REAL Variable retraction value for chip breakage value range 0 lt Max value
112. CLE90 separate block N10 LONGHOLE separate block N10 CYCLE832 separate block N10 A DC 45 3 Approach absolute position of the A axis directly N20 SPOS DC 33 1 Position spindle DEF INT VARI1 24 VARI2 two variables of the INT type name defined by the user DEF STRING 12 VARS3 HELLO max 12 characters See G147 G148 G247 G248 G347 G348 See G147 G148 G247 G248 G347 G348 See G147 G148 G247 G248 G347 G348 For the unit see F and G94 G95 for chamfer rounding see CHF CHR RND For the unit see F and G94 G95 for rounding modal rounding see RND RNDM N10 LABEL1 N100 GOTOB LABEL N10 GOTOF LABEL2 N130 LABEL2 N10 G90 X10 Z IC 20 Z incremental dimension X absolute dimension 267 Address A _DBBIn A DBWin A _DBDIn A _DBRIn SAC _MEAI1 268 MEAS MEAW Jump condition Measuring with deletion of distance to go Measuring without deletion of distance to go Data byte Data word Data double word Real data Measurement result for an axis in the machine coordinate system Measurement result for an axis in the workpiece coordinate system Timer for runtime AN_SETUP_TIME AN_POWERON_TI ME AC_OPERATING_ TIME AC_CYCLE_TIME AC_CUTTING_TIM E Workpiece counter AC_TOTAL_PART S AC_REQUIRED_P ARTS AC_ACTUAL_PAR TS AC_SPECIAL_PAR TS Measuring task status min value read only
113. Calculating the end point 1 Activate the calculator when you are in any input screen HEEE 2 Open the lower level menu for contour elements selection 3 Select the desired calculation function NM This function calculates the missing end point of the straight line straight line contour section whereby the second straight line stands vertically on the first straight line Press this softkey to define the given end point when the ordinate value is given Press this softkey to define the given end point when the abscissa value is given Press this softkey to define the second straight line which is rotated counter z clockwise by 90 degrees against the first straight line Press this softkey to define the second straight line which is rotated clockwise by a 90 degrees against the first straight line 4 Enter the PP coordinates angle A EP abscissa ordinate and L length in the respective input fields The following values of the straight line are known Straight line 1 Starting point and slope angle Straight line 2 Length and one end point in the Cartesian coordinate system 5 Press this softkey to calculate the missing end point Accept The abscissa value is displayed in the input field from which the calculator function has been called and the value of the ordinate is displayed in the next input field If the function is called from the part program editor the coordinates are saved with the axis
114. EP or FDPR and DAM parameters The intermediate drilling depth is calculated in the cycle on the basis of final drilling depth first drilling depth and amount of degression as follows e Inthe first step the depth parameterized with the first drilling depth is traversed as long as it does not exceed the total drilling depth e From the second drilling depth on the drilling stroke is obtained by subtracting the amount of degression from the stroke of the last drilling depth provided that the latter is greater than the programmed amount of degression e The next drilling strokes correspond to the amount of degression as long as the remaining depth is greater than twice the amount of degression e The last two drilling strokes are divided and traversed equally and are therefore always greater than half of the amount of degression e f the value for the first drilling depth is incompatible with the total depth the error message 61107 First drilling depth defined incorrectly is output and the cycle is not executed The FDPR parameter has the same effect in the cycle as the DPR parameter If the values for the reference and retraction planes are identical the first drilling depth can be defined as a relative value If the first drilling depth is programmed larger than the final drilling depth the final drilling depth is never exceeded The cycle will reduce the first drilling depth automatically as far as the final drilling depth is reached when
115. FF 5 Press this key on the MCP to close the door in the machine if you do not use this function just close the door in the machine manually Make sure the feedrate override is 0 DOOR FA 6 Press this key on the MCP to run the program T Turn the feedrate override switch slowly to the desired value 8 Press this key to stop the program test YE y p prog RESET 5 4 Starting and stopping interrupting a part program Starting a part program Before starting a program make sure that both the control system and the machine are set up Observe the relevant safety notes of the machine manufacturer Operating sequence i 1 Select the desired operating area MANAGER 2 Press a horizontal softkey to go to the desired directory 3 Select the program that you desire to start Programming and Operating Manual Milling 42 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 4 Place the cursor bar on the desired program and press this softkey iil For some directories press the following softkey instead Ext exe cution The system automatically changes to AUTO mode in the machining operating area after the key press Prog 5 If desired you can use this softkey to specify how you want the program to be executed for more Nc D information of the program control refer to Section Program control Page 39 A 6 Press this key to start the automatic machining of the program Stopping interrupting a part program 7 P
116. L L LI LI E RTP RFP SDIS RFP DP RFP DPR Programming and Operating Manual Milling 136 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 DTB dwell time The dwell time must be programmed in seconds When tapping blind holes it is recommended that you omit the dwell time SDAC direction of rotation after end of cycle Under SDAC the direction of rotation after end of cycle is programmed For tapping the direction is changed automatically by the cycle MPIT and PIT thread lead as a thread size and as a value The value for the thread lead can be defined either as the thread size for metric threads between M3 and M48 only or as a value distance from one thread turn to the next as a numerical value Any parameters not required are omitted in the call or assigned the value zero RH or LH threads are defined by the sign of the lead parameters e Positive value gt right same as M3 e Negative value gt left same as M4 If the two lead parameters have conflicting values alarm 61001 Thread lead wrong is generated by the cycle and cycle execution is aborted POSS spindle position Before tapping the spindle is stopped with orientation in the cycle by using the command SPOS and switched to position control The spindle position for this spindle stop is programmed under POSS SST speed Parameter SST contains the spindle speed for the tapping block with G331 SST1 retraction speed The speed for retraction from the tapped hol
117. L10 Contour enlarged and offset Subroutine call see Section Subroutine technique Page 110 8 2 9 Programmable mirroring MIRROR AMIRROR Functionality MIRROR and AMIRROR can be used to mirror workpiece shapes on coordinate axes All traversing motions of axes for which mirroring is programmed are reversed in their direction Programming and Operating Manual Milling 58 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 Programming MIRROR X0 YO ZO Programmable mirroring clears old instructions for offset rotation scaling factor mirroring AMIRROR X0 YO Z0 Programmable mirroring additive to existing instructions MIRROR Without values clears old instructions for offset rotation scaling factor mirroring The instructions that contain MIRROR or AMIRROR each require a separate block The axis value has no influence A value however must be specified Note Any active tool radius compensation G41 G42 is reversed automatically when mirroring The direction of rotation of the circle G2 G3 is also reversed automatically when mirroring See the following illustration for example for mirroring with the tool position shown Y Workpiece mirrored in X rigina mirrored in Y and X miroredin Workpiece lt o TP n gt G3 G2 a G41 Programming example Mirroring in different coordinate axes with influence on an active tool radius compensation and G2 G3 N10 G17 X Y plane Z standing vertically on it N20 L10 Programmed contour
118. M3 Specification of the technological values N20 GO Y50 225 X5 Approach starting position N30 LONGHOLE 5 0 1 23 4 30 40 45 20 45 90 100 Cycle call r 320 6 N40 M02 End of program 9 6 7 Slots on a circle SLOT1 Programming SLOT1 RTP RFP SDIS DP DPR NUM LENG WID CPA CPO RAD STA1 INDA FFD FFP1 MID CDIR FAL VARI MIDF FFP2 SSF FALD STA2 DP1 Parameter Safety clearance enter without sign DP REAL Slot depth absolute DPR REAL Slot depth relative to the reference plane enter without sign CPA REAL Center point of circle absolute first axis of the plane CPO REAL Center point of circle absolute second axis of the plane RAD O REAL Radius of the circle enter T sign STA1 REAL Starting angle INDA REAL Incrementing angle Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 187 Data type REAL Feedrate for depth infeed FFP1 REAL Feedrate for surface machining REAL Maximum infeed depth for one infeed enter without sign CDIR INT Milling direction for machining the slot Values 2 for G2 3 for G3 REAL Finishing allowance at the slot edge enter without sign VARI INT Machining type Values 0 complete machining 1 roughing 2 finishing MIDF Note The cycle requires a milling cutter with an end tooth cutting across center DIN844 Function The cycle SLOT1 is a combined roughing finishing cycle Use this cycle
119. Milling 28 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 3 2 8 Entering modifying the tool wear data Note You must distinguish the direction of tool wear compensation clearly Operating sequence tE a Select the desired operating area OFFSET 2 Open the tool wear window 3 Use the cursor keys to select the required tools and their edges 4 Enter the tool length wear parameter and the tool radius wear parameter Positive value The tool moves away from the workpiece Negative value The tool moves closer to the workpiece 5 Press this key or move the cursor to activate the compensation x Jog Tool wear Type T D Hear Length Radius dh Ia 4 666 8 866 Hh Z H 666 H Hbi Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 3 3 Operating area overview When working with the CNC you need to set up the machine and the tools etc as follows e Create the tools and cutting edges e Enter modify the tool and work offsets e Enter the setting data Softkey functions Pressing this key on the PPU allows you to open the following window MW 14 56 25 i Ws O Jog 2012712704 Tool list Heasure tool Edges O pa Delete 1 0 tool Search A WT WT Tool 7 Work ISIR lania gt Faun U GEIS veo E Sor SO soe om ats Displays and modifies the tool offsets Measures the tool manually or automatically Displays and modifies the tool wear data Creates a new tool For more information see Section
120. Milling 98 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 8 10 5 Corner behavior G450 G451 Functionality By using the functions G450 and G451 you can set the behavior for a non continuous transition from one contour element to another contour element corner behavior when G41 G42 is active The internal and external corners are detected by the control system itself For internal corners the intersection of the equidistant paths is always approached Programming G450 gt Transition circle G451 Point of intersection See the following illustration for corner behavior at an external corner Transition circle radius tool radius Point of intersection p External corner External corner G450 G451 P it is possible to execute an intermediate block without plane information here See the following illustration for corner behavior at an internal corner Internal corner Point of intersection Transition circle G450 The tool center point travels around the workpiece external corner in an arc with the tool radius In view of the data for example as far as the feedrate value is concerned the transition circle belongs to the next block containing traversing movements Point of intersection G451 For a 6451 intersection of the equidistant paths the point intersection that results from the center point paths of the tool circle or straight line is approached With acute contour angles and active point of intersectio
121. NDA 0 the incrementing angle is calculated from the number of slots so that they are arranged equally around the circle FFD and FFP1 feedrate for depth and surface The feedrate FFD is active for all infeed movements perpendicular to the machining plane The feedrate FFP1 is active for all movements in the plane traversed at feedrate when roughing MID infeed depth Use this parameter to define the maximum infeed depth The depth infeed is performed by the cycle in equally sized infeed steps Using MID and the total depth the cycle automatically calculates this infeed which lies between 0 5 x maximum infeed depth and the maximum infeed depth The minimum possible number of infeed steps is used as the basis MID 0 means that the cut to slot depth is made with one feed The depth infeed commences at the reference plane moved forward by the safety clearance CDIR milling direction Use this parameter to specify the machining direction for the groove Possible values are e 2 for G2 e 3 for G3 If the parameter is set to an illegal value then the message Wrong milling direction G3 will be generated will be displayed in the message line In this case the cycle is continued and G3 is automatically generated FAL finishing allowance Use this parameter to program a finishing allowance at the slot edge FAL does not influence the depth infeed If the value of FAL is greater than allowed for the specified width and the milling cutter
122. Note A tool compensation must be programmed before the cycle is called Otherwise the cycle is aborted and alarm 61000 No tool compensation active is output If mutual contour violations of the slots result from incorrect values of the parameters that determine the arrangement and the size of the slots the cycle will not start the machining The cycle is aborted and the error message 61104 Contour violation of slots elongated holes is output During the cycle the workpiece coordinate system is offset and rotated The values in the workpiece coordinate system are shown on the actual value display such that the longitudinal axis of the long hole being machined is positioned on the first axis of the current machining plane After the cycle has been completed the workpiece coordinate system is in the same position again as it was before the cycle was called Programming and Operating Manual Milling 186 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 Programming example Machining slots By using this program you can machine four slots of the length 30 mm and the relative depth 23 mm difference between the reference plane and the slot root which are arranged on a circle with the center point Y40 Z45 and the radius 20 mm in the YZ plane The starting angle is 45 degrees the incremental angle is 90 degrees The maximum infeed depth is 6 mm the safety clearance 1 mm See the following programming example for machining slots N10 G19 G90 D9 T10 S600
123. Page 258 Example SCALE Enable scaling factor Extended address With the following addresses the address is extended by 1 to 4 digits to obtain a higher number of addresses In this case the value must be assigned using an equality sign R Arithmetic parameters H H function I J K Interpolation parameters intermediate point M Special function M affecting the spindle with other options 5 Spindle speed Examples R10 6 234 H5 12 1 11 32 67 M2 5 S1 400 Programming and Operating Manual Milling 256 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 A 16 Character set The following characters are used for programming They are interpreted in accordance with the relevant definitions Letters digits A B C D E F G K I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V WX Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 No distinction is made between lowercase and uppercase letters Printable special characters Open parenthesis Inverted commas Close parenthesis 2 Underscore belongs to letters Open square bracket l Decimal point Close square bracket Comma separator lt less than Comment start gt greater than Reserved do not use Main block end of label amp Reserved do not use Assignment part of equation Reserved do not use skip System variable identifiers Multiplication Reserved do not use Addition and positive sign Reserved do not use Subtraction minus sign Non printable special characters Lr End of block
124. R is active in drilling RFF retraction feedrate The feedrate value programmed under RFF is active when retracting from the hole to the reference plane safety clearance Programming example First drilling CYCLE85 is called at position Z70 X50 in the ZX plane The drilling axis is the Y axis The value for the final drilling depth in the cycle call is programmed as a relative value no dwell time is programmed The workpiece upper edge is at Y102 N10 T11 D1 Gl F200 M3 S200 N20 G18 2770 X50 Y105 Approach drilling position N30 CYCLE85 105 102 2 25 300 450 Cycle call no dwell time programmed N40 M02 End of program 9 4 9 Boring CYCLE86 Programming CYCLE86 RTP RFP SDIS DP DPR DTB SDIR RPA RPO RPAP POSS Parameters Safety clearance enter without sign OP REAL Final drilling depth absolute DPR REAL Final drilling depth relative to the reference plane enter without sign Values 3 for M3 4 for M4 RPO REAL_ ___ Retraction path along the second axis of the plane incremental enter with sign Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 145 Data type RPAP REAL Retraction path along the drilling axis incremental enter with sign POSS REAL Spindle position for oriented spindle stop in the cycle in degrees Function The cycle supports the boring of holes with a boring bar The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed and feedrate velocity
125. RFP SDIS DP DPR DTB FFR RFF Parameters DP REAL Finaldrilling depth absolutey S DPR REAL Final drilling depth relative to the reference plane enter without sign REAL Function The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed and feedrate velocity to the entered final drilling depth The inward and outward movement is performed at the feedrate assigned to FFR and RFF respectively Sequence Position reached prior to cycle start The drilling position is the position in the two axes of the selected plane The cycle creates the following sequence of motions e Approach of the reference plane brought forward by the safety clearance by using GO e Traversing to the final drilling depth with G1 and at the feedrate programmed under the parameter FFR e Dwell time at final drilling depth J Retraction to the reference plane brought forward by the safety clearance with G1 and the retraction feedrate defined under the parameter RFF e Retraction to the retraction plane with GO Explanation of the parameters For the parameters RTP RFP SDIS DP DPR refer to Section Drilling centering CYCLE81 Page 126 O gt GO gt G1 E gt G4 OOO0O0O0ODI RTP RFP SDIS RFP DP RFP DPR Programming and Operating Manual Milling 144 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 DTB dwell time The dwell time to the final drilling depth is programmed under DTB in seconds FFR feedrate The feedrate value programmed under FF
126. SIEMENS SINUMERIK SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Programming and Operating Manual Milling User Manual Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety as well as to prevent damage to property The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger AXDANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken A WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken AXCAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken If more than one degree of danger is present the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage Qualified Personnel The product system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation in particular its warning notices and safety instructions Qualified personnel are those who based on their training and
127. UM to specify the number of long holes LENG long hole length The length of the long hole is programmed under LENG If it is detected in the cycle that this length is smaller than the milling diameter the cycle is aborted with alarm 61105 Milling radius is too large MID infeed depth Use this parameter to define the maximum infeed depth The depth infeed is performed by the cycle in equally sized infeed steps Using MID and the total depth the cycle automatically calculates this infeed which lies between 0 5 x maximum infeed depth and the maximum infeed depth The minimum possible number of infeed steps is used as the basis MID 0 means that the cut to pocket depth is made with one feed The depth infeed starts from the reference plane brought forward by the safety clearance depending on _ZSD 1 FFD and FFP1 feedrate for depth and surface The feedrate FFP1 is active for all movements in the plane traversed at feedrate FFD acts for infeeds vertically to this plane CPA CPO and RAD center point and radius You define the position of the circle in the machining plane by the center point CPA CPO and the radius RAD Only positive values are permitted for the radius STA1 and INDA starting and incremental angle The arrangement of the long holes on the circle is defined by these parameters If INDA 0 the indexing angle is calculated from the number of long holes so that they are equally distributed around the circle
128. X axis and is premanufactured with a length allowance of 80 mm and a width allowance of 50 mm See the following programming example for rectangular spigot N10 G90 GO G17 X100 Y100 T20 D1 S3000 M3 Specification of technology values N11 M6 N30 CYCLE76 10 0 2 17 5 60 40 15 80 60 10 11 Cycle call Programming and Operating Manual Milling 180 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 ror 900 800 Oy 1 80 50 N40 M30 End of program 9 6 5 Milling a circular spigot CYCLE77 Programming CYCLE77 RTP RFP SDIS DP DPR PRAD PA PO MID FAL FALD FFP1 FFD CDIR VARI AP1 Parameters The following input parameters are always required DP REAL Depth absolute S O DPR _ REAL Depth relative to the reference plane enter without sign PO REAL Center point of spigot ordinate absolute CDIR INT Milling direction enter without sign Values 0 Down cut milling 1 Conventional milling 2 With G2 independent of spindle direction 3 With G3 VARI INT Machining type Values 1 Roughing to final machining allowance 2 Finishing allowance X Y Z 0 REAL Length of blank spigot Function Use this cycle to machine circular spigots in the machining plane For finishing a face cutter is required The depth infeed is always performed in the position before the semi circular approach to the contour Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 181 Sequence Position re
129. X7 YO Gl Xolsa G2 X13 499 Y86 I AC 57 Gl X63 RND 2 YO M2 end of contour J AC 61 35 Programming example 3 G17 G90 G54 G60 ROT T1 Dl FACEMILL M6 S4000 M3 M8 GO X 40 YO N60 GO 22 N70 CYCLE 1 50 00000 N80 S4500 N30 CYCLETL 20700000 30400000 O00000 1 00000 N100 GO Z100 NO T2 DL N120 M6 N130 S4000 M3 N140 M8 GO X 13 YL6 N150 GO 22 ANF NLOU POCKETS 3000000 0 00000 2 00000 13600000 Le 00000 0 00000 5 00000 22000005 y y y2 00000 2 00000 AROT 290 _END REPEAT ANF END P 3 N10 N20 N30 N40 Nag g0 00000 000000 1 00000 T000 0gy r0 00000 2 U00007 0 00000 40000000 113 L 00000 2 00000 rO 00000 0 Q0000 400 00000 32 ENDMILL D8 o eV0000 0 10000 216 2 5 00000 29 00000 L3 00000 a LOO 20 00000 2000000 saas 00000 20200000 10 00000 4 00000 300 00000 200 00000 2 11 Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 ROT S4500 M3 ANF1 N1160 POCKETS 30 00000 0 00000 2 00000 5 00000 13 00000 10 00000 4 00000 13 00000 16 00000 0 00000 2 50000 0 10000 0 10000 300 00000 200 00000 2 2 2 000007 y g2800000 2200000 AROT 290 _END1 REPEAT ANF1 END1 P 3 ROT GO XO YO POCKET4 9000000 0 00000 2 00000 3 00000 7 50000 0 00000 0 00000 2 50000 0 LOODU Us LOUVO 23200 00000 200 00000 Oy Aly 2 lt 00000 a 4 00000 1 00000 S
130. a maximum of 10 function outputs of this type are possible in a part program block 8 13 Arithmetic parameters LUD and PLC variables 8 13 1 Arithmetic parameter R Functionality The arithmetic parameters are used if an NC program is not only to be valid for values assigned once or if you must calculate values The required values can be calculated or set by the control system during program execution Another possibility consists of setting the arithmetic parameter values by operator inputs If values have been assigned to the arithmetic parameters they can be assigned to other variable setting NC addresses in the program Programming RO to R299 Assign values to the arithmetic parameters R RO Indirect programming Assign a value to the arithmetic parameter R whose number can be found e g in RO X RO Assign arithmetic parameters to the NC addresses e g for the X axis Value assignments You can assign values in the following range to the R parameters 0 000 0001 9999 9999 8 decimal places arithmetic sign and decimal point The decimal point can be omitted for integer values A plus sign can always be omitted Example RO 3 5678 R1 37 3 R2 2 R3 7 R4 45678 123 Use the exponential notation to assign an extended range of numbers 1079010299 The value of the exponent is written after the EX characters maximum total number of characters 10 including leading signs and decimal point Range
131. ached prior to cycle start The starting point is a position in the positive range of the abscissa with the approach semi circle and the programmed raw dimension taken into account Sequence of motions when roughing VARI 1 e Approach retraction from contour Approach to and retraction from the contour along a semicircle with the spindle rotating clockwise and synchronous milling Approach to contour Cy Retraction from contour The retraction plane RTP is approached at rapid traverse rate to then be able to position at this height to the starting point in the machining plane The starting point is defined with reference to 0 degrees of the axis of the abscissa The tool is fed to the safety clearance SDIS at rapid traverse with subsequent traversing to the machining depth at feedrate To approach the spigot contour the tool is approached along a semi circular path using the programmed blank spigot The milling direction can be determined either as up cut milling or down cut milling with reference to the spindle direction If the spigot is bypassed once the contour is left along a semi circle in the plane and the tool is fed to the next machining depth The contour is then reapproached along a semi circle and the spigot traversed once This process is repeated until the programmed spigot depth is reached Then the retraction plane RTP is approached at rapid traverse rate e Depth infeed Feeding to the sa
132. achining plane GO is possible since infeed in the open is possible There are several roughing strategies paraxial in one direction or back and forth Sequence of motions when roughing Face milling can be performed in several planes based on the programmed values _DP MID and _FALD Machining is carried out from the top downward i e one plane each is removed and then the next depth infeed is carried out in the open _FDP parameters The traversing paths for solid machining in the plane depend on the values of the parameters _LENG WID MIDA FDP FDP1 and the cutter radius of the active tool The first path to be milled is always traversed such that the infeed depth exactly corresponds to _MIDA ensuring that no width infeed larger than the maximum possible width infeed occurs The tool center point therefore does not always travel exactly on the edge only if _MIDA cutter radius The dimension by which the tool traverses outside the edge is always equal to the cutter diameter _MIDA even if only one surface cut is performed i e area width overrun is less than _MIDA The other paths for width infeed are calculated internally so as to produce a uniform path width lt _MIDA Sequence of motions when finishing When finishing the surface is milled in the plane once This means that the finishing allowance when roughing has to be selected also such that the residual depth can be removed with the finishing tool in one step Afte
133. ae ie seme E se ee E 1 1 SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED operator Ppanels ccccccccccceeccceeeecececeeeeeaeeceseecessecessueeeseeeeseeeesaeeesaaees 1 1 1 ON arses EE E serene deere eieesieve E tees aresauecuuesneenaceueeece vaste 1 1 2 Control elements on the PPU cccccccsssecceeececceescecceueeeceaueeeceaseecseeeeseeeecseseessaueeessueeeesegeeesseseessaneeesas 1 2 Machine control panels sxe seaeesacsceis scores coed ucevece de deen cca etdx eciedede a arn NE aaeain EE a EET dele raie ii 1 2 1 E N EE E E E E E 1 2 2 Conirol elements On the MCP serisiseensarenrddi aire raio ni a e i aia eane 1 3 oo 645151 IBLE bY 6 0 E ee E EE E E E E EEE EE E E EEE EE E EE S 1 4 Protection TOV GIS a age va np iad aac ki AERE EA AEE E REEE AEA rE EEEE a aaa 1 5 Setting user interface language ccccccseececcsseeccceeseecaeseeccsuececseueeccsuseeessaeceeseuseessuseeessueeessaueeessaneeesaaeees Turning on reference point approach ccceecceeccseecseeceeceeceeeceeecaeecseecaeeceeeeeesaeeeanesaeeeanecseeteeseeeseetaeesaeesaeesenens FSE D iE AE E EE E EE E E AE E 3 1 Coordinate systems cccccccssscccceeeecceeececceeeecseuseesauececseseesseuseessesesseueeessaeceessaseessaueessaueeessaueeesseneeesaeees 3 2 Setting up tools xosenus cave cecusencensdanceestctanesenusiecenecs henosnedaeceae s saad zaneshsenecetansanddandevelusancsaescnceceas hanesendseeeaeebanosaexves 3 2 1 Creaung a New COON 2 Se aca occa eae cree cal ace eas a
134. al blocks For non tangential transitions corners the velocity can be reduced rapidly enough so that the axes are subject to a relatively high velocity change over a short period of time This may lead to a significant jerk acceleration change The size of the jerk can be limited by activating the SOFT function Programming example N10 G64 Gl X10 Y20 F1000 Continuous path mode N20 X30 Y30 Continuous path control mode continues to be active N30 G60 250 Switching over to exact stop M30 Look ahead velocity control In the continuous path control mode with G64 the control system determines the velocity control for several NC blocks in advance automatically This enables acceleration and deceleration across multiple blocks with approximately tangential transitions For paths that consist of short travels in the NC blocks higher velocities can be achieved than without look ahead See the following illustration for comparison of the G60 and G64 velocity behavior G64 Continuous path control mode with LookAhead l l l l l G60 Exact stop 8 7 3 Dwell time G4 Functionality Between two NC blocks you can interrupt the machining for a defined time by inserting a separate block with G4 e g for relief cutting The words with F or S are only used in this block for the specified time Any previously programmed feedrate F or a spindle speed S remain valid Programming G4 F
135. amming CYCLE802 111111111 111111111 XO YO X1 Y1 X2 Y2 X3 Y3 X4 Y4 Parameters Programming and Operating Manual Milling 160 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 Function This cycle allows you to freely program positions i e rectangular or polar Individual positions are approached in the order in which you program them Y Sequence The drilling tool in the program traverses all programmed positions in the order in which you program them Machining of the positions always starts at the reference point If the position pattern consists of only one position the tool is retracted to the retraction plane after machining Explanation of the parameters XO YO0 X4 Y4 All positions will be programmed absolutely Programming example Drilling in G17 at the Positions X20 Y20 X40 Y25 X30 Y40 N10 G90 G17 N20 T10 N30 M06 S800 M3 M08 F140 GO X0 YO 220 MCALL CYCLE82 2 0 2 5 5 0 N40 CYCLE802 111111111 111111111 20 20 40 25 30 40 N50 MCALL N60 M30 9 6 Milling cycles 9 6 1 Requirements Call and return conditions Absolute dimension data X Y plane Selects the tool Tool change Spindle speed clockwise rotation of the spindle Feedrate Coolant on Approach starting position Modal call of the drilling call cycle positions gt Deselect modal call End of the program Milling cycles are programmed independently of the particular axis name Before
136. and PLC data of the volatile memory into a non volatile memory area Prerequisite e A valid system password has been set on the control system e There is no program currently executing Proceed through the following steps to save data 1 Select the desired operating area SYSTEM o A SHIFT ALARM 5 2 Open the window for data saving qaVeE data J 3 Press this softkey to start saving Do not carry out any operator actions while the data OK backup is running There are two methods to call the saved data Method 1 1 Press this key when the control system is booting 2 Select Reload saved user data in the setup menu 3 Press this key to confirm Method 2 4 N 1 Select the desired operating area SHIFT ALARM mr Start 2 Open the window for selecting the start up modes up 3 Select this softkey A 4 Use the cursor keys to select the third start up mode gO Standard power up AA gO Pover up with default data J 5 Press this softkey to confirm The control system restarts with the saved data OK Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 47 Overview of the system data management operating area SYSTEM fA SHIFT ALARM Pressing the above key combination allows you to open the following window This operating area includes functions required for parameterizing and analyzing the NCK the PLC and the drive nh 15 33 13 AS One 2013 07 25 Machine confi
137. ar eed Gee ee Adee ede Sees aa eeesa ae eessaeeeesaaeeeesaeeeeeas 9 4 7 Tapping with compensating chuck CYCLE840 9 4 8 Reaming 4 CY CLE G9 Decedra dana aiiin aE EEE iarr ier ie En aien Einin r iiiad enini 9 4 9 BOLNO C Ge LEDaren nei n nee ee ene E ee eee ee eee ere 9 4 10 OMG with SOC CO ad cog conc zeecces seen cangecssacesicenseacenaeceneseeanageceassssiesaasegosesanteesacacnesecanosenees 9 4 11 Drilling with Stop 2 CYCLE88 00 0 cccccccseeeee eee eee ee eee ees eeeeee eee ee ease eeesaeeeeeseeeeeesaeeeesaeeeeeseeeeesaeeeeesaeeeeeas 9 4 12 Reaming 2 lt Ora ON es Meer meee hee eter eee te ete ter tr an tee he tre t eente ereocne eat e rte mre ee eee ere eee 9 5 Drilling pattern CY ClOS sssusa a ERAAN AAN EEE S EENE Er Ee ANEN rE omvenelaeadstas 9 5 1 PICT Se Mioceen E AE A E 9 5 2 BO ge Wale oto HOLE GT emenerieeer errr ese ee een erm rere edna eerie eet ene ee ee eee ee eee es 9 5 3 Sete Wd 2 aaron ca pee cen E E E EE E E E E EE A E 9 5 4 Arbitrary positions CYCLE802 nsnennneennneennsnrnretrrrnrrrrtrrrntrrrnerrrntnrtntrttntntrntntrnnrEne rtre rrene rnrn n neren een 9 6 MNO Y E ais sie acters et E E E E eases E E E e neh ARE eee esate sae 9 6 1 REJUN ICIS arere a ENN ENRE a AET AREE eNEAN 9 6 2 Face miling CYCLE T rsisi ee a aA 9 6 3 Contour miling CCST sses EE E ween twadwece es 9 6 4 Milling a rectangular spigot CYCLE76 cccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeesaaeeesseeeeesaeeeeesaneenea
138. art point and CHR or a radius RND CHR 0 or RND 0 means no programmed contour elements The current position in transition element the chain is color highlighted 3 Input field for supplementary comments such as F1000 The graphics window which displays the progress of the feedrate values H or M functions If comments are contour as you configure the parameters for the contour entered as text they must always be started with a elements semicolon All para The following additional parameters are displayed after you press this softkey meters Length of the straight line Pitch angle with reference to Y axis Parameters for programming circular arcs Followe element 09 05 82 ie 2012 12 18 Circular arc Alter native abs O abs O abs O Trans to next element RND 6 6868 All para Free text input meters Contour allowance Lancel 6 606 Right O arene element a Zoom a ko E Eo wet room Direction of rotation of the circular arc clockwise or Absolute abs incremental inc positions of circle counter clockwise center point in Y 1 and X K directions Radius of circle The contour chain which displays the start point and programmed contour elements The current position in the chain is color highlighted Absolute abs incremental inc end positions in X and The graphics window which displays the progress of the Y directions contour as you configure th
139. as a numerical value Any parameters not required are omitted in the call or assigned the value zero If the two lead parameters have conflicting values alarm 61001 Thread lead wrong is generated by the cycle and cycle execution is aborted Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 141 Note Depending on the settings in machine data MD30200 MA_NUM_ENCS the cycle selects whether tapping is to be performed with or without encoder The direction of rotation for the spindle must be programmed with M3 or M4 In thread blocks with G63 the values of the feedrate override switch and spindle speed override switch are frozen to 100 A longer compensating chuck is usually required for tapping without encoder AXN tool axis The following figure presents the options for the drilling axes to be selected With G17 e AXN 1 Corresponds to X e AXN 2 Corresponds to Y e AXN 3 Corresponds to Z SN AD SI a S_ SS y 6ue7 ISA SSA Sx SS Xe WW NIN uoesuadwoo B N Using AXN number of the drilling axis to program the drilling axis enables the drilling axis to be directly programmed 1st axis of the current plane 2nd axis of the current plane 3rd axis of the current plane For example to machine a hole in the G17 plane with Z axis you program G17 AXN 3 Programming example Tapping without encoder In this program a thread is tapped without encoder at position X3
140. ash in front of the block number The block skip itself is activated via Operation program control SKP or by the programmable controller signal A section can be skipped by several blocks in succession using If a block must be skipped during program execution all program blocks marked with are not executed All instructions contained in the blocks concerned will not be considered The program is continued with the next block without marking Comment remark The instructions in the blocks of a program can be explained using comments remarks A comment always starts with a semicolon and ends with end of block Comments are displayed together with the contents of the remaining block in the current block display Messages Messages are programmed in a separate block A message is displayed in a special field and remains active until a block with a new message is executed or until the end of the program is reached Up to 65 characters can be displayed in message texts A message without message text cancels a previous message MSG THIS IS THE MESSAGE TEXT Programming example N10 G amp S company order no 12A71 N20 Pump part 17 drawing no 123 677 N30 Program created by H Adam Dept TV 4 N40 MSG DRAWING NO 123677 50 G54 F4 7 8220 D2 M3 Main block N60 GO G90 X100 2200 N70 Gl 2185 6 N80 X112 N90 X118 Z180 Block can be suppressed N100 X118 2120 N110 GO G90 X200 N120 M2 End of pr
141. ation is active Furthermore OFFN should also be gt the tool radius to avoid damage occurring to the opposite side of the groove A part program for milling a groove generally comprises the following steps 1 Selecting a tool Select TRACYL Select suitable coordinate offset frame Positioning Program OFFN Select TRC Approach block position TRC and approach groove side NS oS YN Groove center line contour 9 Deselect TRC 10 Retraction block retract TRC and move away from groove side 11 Positioning 12 Deselect OFFN 13 TRAFOOF 14 Re select original coordinate shift frame Special features e TRC selection TRC is not programmed in relation to the groove side but relative to the programmed groove center line To prevent the tool traveling to the left of the groove side G42 is entered instead of G41 You avoid this if in OFFN the groove width is entered with a negative sign e OFFN acts differently with TRACYL than it does without TRACYL As even without TRACYL OFFN is included when TRC is active OFFN should be reset to zero after TRAFOOF e It is possible to change OFFN within a part program This could be used to shift the groove center line from the center see diagram Programming and Operating Manual Milling 68 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 e Guiding grooves TRACYL does not create the same groove for guiding grooves as it would be with a tool with the diameter producing the width of the g
142. axis in both cases is the Z axis N10 GO G17 G90 F50 S500 M4 Specification of technology values N20 D1 T12 Approach retraction plane NSO z155 N40 X80 Y120 Approach first drilling position N50 CYCLE83 20703415 6yr lydy i710 374747 te Call of cycle depth parameters with absolute values N60 X80 Y6O0 Approach next drilling position N70 CYCLE83 20 0 3 15 6 1 1 1 1 0 3 4 3 1 2 Cycle call with relative data for final drilling depth and first drilling depth the safety clearance is 1 mm and the feedrate factor is 0 5 N80 M02 End of program Programming example 2 Deep hole drilling Proceed through the following steps 7 1 Select the desired operating area P 2 Open the vertical softkey bar for available drilling cycles Drill Programming and Operating Manual Milling 134 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 Deep hole 3 Press this softkey to open the window for CYCLE83 Parameterize the cycle as desired drilling by 13 41 55 ads 2012 12 03 N MPF 1 MPF 1 Retract plane absolute 6 66666 1 66666 6 66660 6 66060 8 88008 Cancel Fi 4 Confirm your settings with this softkey The cycle is then automatically transferred to the program Ok editor as a separate block 9 4 6 Rigid tapping CYCLE84 Programming CYCLE84 RTP RFP SDIS DP DPR DTB SDAC MPIT PIT POSS SST SST1 AXN 0 0 VARI DAM VRT Parameters Data type REAL Retraction plane absolute RE
143. ber N4 Y 825 1 SEEE NS Y 65 Z 9194 f NG X 6625 Y 1 N7 X0 Y 075 f N8 X 6875 Y f N X8 Y 1 f N16 X 6938 Y 0542 f N11 X 161 Y 8583 Z 9195 1 N12 X Y 125 f N13 X 1155 Y 6667 1 N14 X 1227 Y 6768 f N15 X8 Y 15 f N16 X 1165 Y 1165 f N17 X 1625 Y f N18 X 1193 Y 1193 1 5 Edit the blocks in the window as required Any program changes are automatically stored See below for the detailed description of the editing options 6 After finishing the editing you can press this softkey to execute the program The system switches Execute to the AUTO mode in the machining area Renumbering blocks With this softkey the system automatically assigns block numbers to each block The block Renumber numbers are inserted in front of each block in the ascending order in a step of 10 Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 33 Searching for blocks Proceed through the following steps to search for a block 1 Press this softkey in the opened program editor window Search 2 Press this softkey to search via text Alternatively you can search with a given line number by Text pressing the following softkey Line no 3 Enter the search text or line number in the input field Press this key to select a starting point for search if you choose to search via text J 4 Press this softkey to start the search or otherwise press the following softkey to cancel the search Cancel
144. chine See the following illustration for various workpiece clamping positions when drilling milling Y1 Machine Machine Programming and Operating Manual Milling 60 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 Programming example N10 G54 Call first settable work offset N20 L47 Machining of workpiece 1 here using L47 N30 G55 Call second settable work offset N40 L47 Machining of workpiece 2 here using L47 N50 G56 Call third settable work offset N60 L47 Machining of workpiece 3 here using L47 N70 G57 Call fourth settable work offset N80 L47 Machining of workpiece 4 here using L47 N90 G500 GO X Deactivate settable work offset Subroutine call see Section Subroutine technique Page 110 8 2 11 NC block compression COMPON COMPCURV COMPCAD Functionality CAD CAM systems normally produce linear blocks which meet the configured accuracy specifications In the case of complex contours a large volume of data and short path sections can result The short path sections restrict the processing rate By using a compressor function the contour specified by using linear blocks is approached using polynomial blocks This has the following advantages e Reduction of the number of required part program blocks for describing the workpiece contour e Continuous block transitions e Higher maximum path velocities The following compressor functions are available e COMPON The block transitions are only constant in
145. cification in SD42700 EXT_PROGRAM_PATH EXTCALL lt program name gt Parameter EXTCALL Keyword for subroutine call lt program name gt Constant variable of STRING type Example EXTCALL RECTANGULAR POCKET Programming without path specification in SD42700 EXT_PROGRAM_PATH EXTCALL lt path program name gt Parameter EXTCALL Keyword for subroutine call lt Path program name gt Constant variable of STRING type Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 113 Example EXTCALL D EXTERNE_UP RECHTECKTASCHE Note External subroutines must not contain jump statements such as GOTOF GOTOB CASE FOR LOOP WHILE Or REPEAT I F ELSE ENDIF constructions are possible Subroutine calls and nested EXTCALL calls may be used RESET POWER ON RESET and POWER ON cause external subroutine calls to be interrupted and the associated load memory to be erased Example Processing of external customer USB memory stick The Main mpf main program is stored in NC memory and is selected for execution N010 PROC MAIN NO20 GO X10 YI NO30 EXTCALL D EXTERNE UP BOHRUNG NO40 G0 X20 20 NO50 M30 The BOHRUNG SPE subprogram to be reloaded is located on the USB memory sticker NO10 PROC BOHRUNG NO20 G1 F1000 NO30 X 10 Z 10 NO40 GO X50 Y50 NO50 M17 8 16 Timers and workpiece counters 8 16 1 Runtime timer Functionality The timers are prepared as system variables A t
146. ck with G41 for example P2 end point block with G40 Programming and Operating Manual Milling 100 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 Programming example N10 GO X20 Y20 T1 D1 M3 S500 N20 G41 Gl X10 Y10 F100 N30 G2 X20 Y20 CR 20 Last block on the contour circle or straight line P1 N40 G40 Gl X10 Y10 Switch off tool radius compensation P2 N50 M30 8 10 7 Special cases of the tool radius compensation Repetition of the compensation The same compensation e g G41 gt G41 can be programmed once more without writing G40 between these commands The last block in front of the new compensation call ends with the normal position of the compensation vector at the end point The new compensation is carried out as a compensation start behavior as described for change in compensation direction Changing the offset number The offset number D can be changed in the compensation mode A modified tool radius is active with effect from the block in which the new D number is programmed Its complete modification is only achieved at the end of the block In other words The modification is traversed continuously over the entire block also for circular interpolation Change of the compensation direction The compensation direction G41 lt gt G42 can be changed without writing G40 The last block with the old compensation direction ends with the normal position of the compensation vector at the end point The new compensation direction is
147. cted tangentially to the previous path segment circle or straight line in this plane This defines the radius and center point of the circle from the geometric relationships of the previous path section and the programmed circle end point See the following illustration for circle with tangential transition to the previous path section N20 CT Asa Vics End point of the circle Programming example N10 G1 X20 F300 Straight line N20 CT X Y Circle with tangential connection Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 Tf 8 4 4 Helix interpolation G2 G3 TURN Functionality With helix interpolation two movements are overlaid e Circular movement in the G17 G18 or G19 plane e Linear movement of the axis standing vertically on this plane The number of additional full circle passes is programmed with TURN These are added to the actual circle programming The helix interpolation can preferably be used for the milling of threads or of lubricating grooves in cylinders Programming G2 G3 X Y 1 J TURNS Center and end points G2 G3 CR X Y TURNE Circle radius and end point G2 G3 AR I J TURNS Opening angle and center point G2 G3 AR X Y TURNS Opening angle and end point G2 G3 AP RP TURNS Polar coordinates circle around the pole See the following illustration for helical interpolation Programming example N1
148. ctive auxiliary and M functions block skipping and auxiliary function lock Finds the desired block location Displays the axis feedrate in the selected coordinate system Activates the simulation function Displays the information of part machining time part timer and part counter Corrects a wrong program block Any changes will be Switches over the coordinate system in the actual value stored immediately window Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 37 Parameters HCS Position Dist to go Mx 1 O B eo My 1 0 BBA eee MZ1 NII 22e m Gi GS6H CH GEH Block display Current program HPFE Displays the axes that exist in the machine coordinate Displays the remaining distance for the axes to system MCS workpiece coordinate system WCS or traverse relative coordinate system REL Displays the current position of the axes in the selected Displays seven subsequent blocks of the currently coordinate system active part program The display of one block is limited to the width of the window 5 1 Performing the simulation Functionality By using the broken line graphics the programmed tool path can be traced Before the automatic machining you need to perform the simulation to check whether the tool moves in the right way Operating sequence 1 Select the desired operating area PROGRAM MANAGER A 2 Select a part program for simulation 2 3 Press thi
149. cycle call SDIS 3mm MID imme _FAL Finishing allowance in the plane 1mm FALD Finishing allowance in depth _FFP1 Feedrate in the plane 800 mm min _FFD Feedrate depth infeed 400 mm min _VARI Machining type 111 Roughing up to finishing allowance intermediate paths with G1 for intermediate paths retraction in Z to RFP _SDIS Parameters for approach G41 left of the contour i e external machining Approach and retraction in a quadrant in the plane Retraction feedrate 1000 mm min N10 T3 D1 T3 Milling cutter with radius 7 N20 S500 M3 F3000 Program feedrate and spindle speed N30 Gly GO G90 X100 Y200 2250 G94 Approach start position N40 CYCLE72 EX72CONTOUR 250 200 3 175 10 1 1 5 Cycle call 800 400 111 41 2 20 1000 2 20 N50 X100 Y200 N60 M2 End of program EX72CONTOUR SPF Subroutine for contour milling for example N100 G1 G90 X150 Y160 Starting point of contour N110 X230 CHF 10 N120 Y80 CHF 10 Programming and Operating Manual Milling 174 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 N130 X125 N140 Y135 N150 G2 X150 Y160 CR 25 N160 M2 Programming example 2 Milling around a closed contour externally With this program the same contour is milled as in example 1 The difference is that the contour programming is now in the calling program N10 T3 D1 N20 S500 M3 F3000 N30 G17 GO G90 X100 Y200 2250 G94 N40 CYCLE72 1 5 800 400 N50 X100 Y200 PIECE2Z45 PIECE245E 11
150. d by the tool radius is approached in the plane Z 30 then lowering to the depth P2 with Z 5 DISCL Using a feedrate of FAD 500 mm min it is lowered to a depth of Z 0 P3 G341 Then the contour is approached at point X40 Y 10 along a quadrant in the plane P4 using F 800 mm min Intermediate blocks A maximum of five blocks without moving the geometry axes can be inserted between an SAR block and the next traversing block Information Programming when retracting e With an SAR block with a geometry axis programmed the contour ends at P2 The positions on the axes that constitute the machining plane result from the retraction contour The axis component perpendicular to this is defined by DISCL With DISCL 0 the motion will run completely in the plane e If in the SAR block only the axis is programmed vertically to the machining plane the contour will end at P1 The positions of the remaining axes will result as described above If the SAR block is also the TRC disable block an additional path from P1 to PO is inserted such that no motion results at the end of the contour when disabling the TRC e f only one axis on the machining plane is programmed the missing second axis is modally added from its last position in the previous block 9 Cycles 9 1 Overview of cycles Cycles are generally applicable technology subroutines that can be used to carry out a specific machining process such as drilling of a thread tapping or
151. d instructions for offset rotation scaling factor mirroring The instructions which contain TRANS or ATRANS each require a separate block See the following illustration for the example for programmable offset TRANS Y TRANS X Programming example N20 TRANS X20 Y15 Programmable translation N30 L10 Subroutine call contains the geometry to be offset N70 TRANS Offset cleared Subroutine call see Section Subroutine technique Page 110 8 2 7 Programmable rotation ROT AROT Functionality The rotation is performed in the current plane G17 or G18 or G19 using the value of RPL specified in degrees Programming ROT RPL Programmable rotation deletes old instructions for offsetting rotation scaling factor mirroring AROT RPL Programmable rotation additive to existing instructions ROT Without values clears old instructions for offset rotation scaling factor mirroring Programming and Operating Manual Milling 56 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 The instructions which contain ROT or AROT each require a separate block See the following illustration for definition of the positive direction of the angle of rotation in the individual planes G17 Rotated system wv See the following illustration for programming example for programmable offset and rotation Programming example N10 G17 2a X Y plane N20 TRANS X20 Y10 Programmable translation N30 L10 Subroutine call contains t
152. data by changing the angle when the thread cutting operation is repeated Setting the time counter Operating sequence 1 Select the desired operating area OFFSET Catt 2 Open the setting data window SD data Tine 3 Open the time counter window counter 4 Position the cursor bar in the input fields to be modified and enter the values see table below for A the parameter descriptions 5 Use this key or move the cursor to confirm your entries Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 223 Parameters in the window for timers and workpiece counters Times Counter Parts in total Parts required Part count Run tine Cycle time Cutting tine Setup tine Q2eMA QQOoXD Power on tine A H HH66H BHM BAS HH66H BHM Hs HH6bHH BHM HAs HH17H ZZM HH66HH 46m The total number of workpieces produced total The run time of the selected NC program in seconds actual The default value is 0 each time a new NC program starts up MD27860 can be set to ensure that this value will be deleted even if there is a jump to the beginning of the program with GOTOS or in the event of ASUBS used for tool change in JOG and MM modes and PROG_EVENTs starting The number of workpieces required workpiece Processing time in seconds setpoint The number of all workpieces produced since the The time since the last control power up with default start
153. e While finishing on the edge the tool traverses around the pocket contour only once For finishing on the edge the path includes one quadrant reaching the pocket radius The radius of this path is 2 mm as the maximum or if less space is provided equals to the difference between the pocket radius and the milling radius The depth infeed is performed with GO in the open towards the pocket center and the starting point of the approach path is also reached with GO e Finishing on the base During finishing on the base the machine performs GO towards the pocket center until reaching a distance equal to pocket depth finishing allowance safety clearance From this point onwards the tool is always fed in vertically at the depth since a tool with a front cutting edge is used for base finishing The base surface of the pocket is machined once Insertion strategies Refer to Section Milling a rectangular pocket POCKET3 Page 197 Taking into account the blank dimensions During solid machining of the pockets it is possible to take into account blank dimensions e g when machining precast parts With circular pockets the blank dimension _AP1 is also a circle with a smaller radius than the pocket radius Programming and Operating Manual Milling 204 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 Explanation of the parameters For an explanation of the parameters _RTP RFP and _SDIS refer to Section Drilling centering CYCLE8 Page
154. e ae ee eee eee AAA eee AAAS eEEA GSS EEEA Ga eeesA aS eeeGa ae eesa aa eeesaaeetaaaeeeeaaey 9 7 4 Messages in the cycles sett iutassni tment icereutanvinl cides eels eeauetie anid oaruiele ld ames etnies 10 Fypical MINO OT OCA atest te sees pce ccs eae escent ae eet a a a a A Ea EANA A APPONI wahscsesantacasessecceysteccencans segseatececestatsennsemsanasenceinactpsceneuensasananamsacanseasceaeteasdeaeen saecansemaceedeatocenstensesancaayeansean A 1 Creating a NEW cutting edge ccccecccccssecccceeecceeececceeeccseuseeseuueeeseaseesseeeessueeessaecessegecessassessseesessenseeeas A 2 Calibrating the tool proDE ccs ecanttes eho crens nearenasebeceneentetanscatanineduibetenssebaceuanenetetsesCecandrebeberoustaceudeasetodanebensceents A 3 Measuring the tool with a probe QUtO cc eccceceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeseeeeesseeeeesaeeeeesaeeeeeas A 4 Entering modifying Work offsets ccccceccccseecccceseecceeeseeceeeecseeeeceuseeeseeeecseeeessaeeesseeesseseeessueeesseneeesas Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 5 Entering modifying the Setting data cccccccecsseeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeesseeeeeseeeeesaeeseeseeeeeesaeeeeeaeeeesanees Setting R Parameters cccccccccsscccssceceeeeccseecceececaeeeceueesesaeseaececaueesagaeseseeecaeeecaeeeseueessseceeaseesaeeesauaessaes Setting user Ilo este oes ected EE cence esas cheek EEEE EE E onesie Other settings in
155. e block N90 M30 Programming and Operating Manual Milling 112 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 8 15 3 Modal subroutine call Functionality The subroutine in the block containing MCALL is called automatically after each successive block containing a path motion The call acts until the next MCALL is called The modal call of the subroutine which contains MCALL or quitting of the call requires a separate block MCALL is advantageous for example when producing drill patterns Programming example Application example Drilling a row of holes N10 MCALL CYCLE82 100 0 1 10 2 Drilling cycle 82 N20 HOLES1 1 2 45 2 2 1 Cycle for row of holes after each approach of the hole position CYCLE82 will be called with the transfer parameters N30 MCALL Modal call of CYCLE82 completed N40 M30 8 15 4 Execute external subroutine EXTCALL Function With the EXTCALL command you can reload and execute programs stored on an external USB memory stick Machine data The following machine data is used for the EXTCALL command e MD10132 MN_MMC_CMD_TIMEOUT Monitoring time for the command in part program e MD18362 MN_MM_EXT_PROG_NUM Number of program levels that can be processed simultaneously from external e D42700 SC_EXT_PROGRAM_PATH Program path for external subroutine call Note When using SD42700 SC_EXT_PROGRAM_PATH all subprograms called with EXCALL are searched under this path Programming with path spe
156. e cutting 2mm edge geometry A milling cutter with 10 mm radius is used N10 T2 D2 N20 G17 GO G90 G54 G94 F2000 XO YO 220 Approach start position N30 CYCLE71 10 0 2 11 100 100 60 40 10 6 10 5 Cycle call 0 4000 31 2 N40 GO G90 X0 YO N50 M02 End of program 9 6 3 Contour milling CYCLE72 Programming CYCLE72 _KNAME RTP RFP SDIS DP MID FAL FALD FFP1 FFD VARI RL _AS1 _LP1 FF3 AS2 _LP2 Parameters Data type _KNAME STRING Name of contour subroutine REAL Retraction plane absolute _RTP Retraction plane absolute REAL Reference plane absolute _SDIS REAL Safety clearance to be added to the reference plane enter without sign DP REAL Depth absolute REAL Maximum infeed depth incremental enter without sign Finishing allowance at the base incremental enter without sign Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 167 Data type _VARI INT Machining type enter without sign UNITS DIGIT Values 1 roughing 2 finishing TENS DIGIT Values 0 intermediate travel with GO 1 intermediate travel with G1 HUNDREDS DIGIT Values 0 Retraction at the end of contour to RTP 1 Retraction at the end of contour to _RFP _SDIS 2 Retraction by _SDIS at the end of contour 3 No retraction at the end of contour RL INT Traveling around the contour either centrally to the right or to the left with G40 G41 or G42 enter without sign Values
157. e eee es seid cess eed een connec sees ces aene R r i ark 3 2 2 PACU AIC Me NOON a deteseetieciat steed i Eaa Oaa wabedandriiadeubets 3 2 3 Assigning the NANGWNEED tesesceccncinantsecdconrinowabattanteunhinaibnldliduneliavabehiniyshitsumieldndunrisaitilianteuehiicmiibdeaiwed 3 2 4 Activating the spindle xitesiinisncsearaneaaeutsaniuen iecasandaioeutindaadmntsatea vie dacammadsiwnibiadsadnetiaies Veiddedamsiianawaiediganwaesuaten 3 2 0 Measuring the tool manually 02s cccc0civscsencst wexesehaces cndaanese cxhies anecesesneesodeeredsasictescnedddeudesbonsdencssendseeeteccbusesehes 3 2 6 Setting UP the WOLKPICCE cccccecccsecccceececeeeeceeeeeeeeeeceeceseeeeceecessaeeeseeeeseaeessaeessaeeesaeeeseueessaeesseeeeseeeseneeseas 3 2 7 Verifying the tool offset result in MDA MOdE ccccccecccseeeeceececeeeeeaeeceseeceseeceeseeeeseeeeseeesseesseeeseeeesaes 3 2 8 Entering modifying the tool wear data ccccccsseeeccessceccseececceseeecsuscecseeeesseeecsseeeeseueeessaeeeessueeessneeessags 3 3 Operating area OVEFVICW c cceccccseeccccsescecceueeeccuusecceuscecceeeecsuuseesaueeeeseueeessueeesseeessaueessauseeesageeessaneeesaeees A Pan progranm O perenna AEE aE aE a she es EAA EEN 4 1 Creating part progra ssz csee aesies sce ceesenessedadensetecatniesncedaneac AERIANA ae E dider NEA basse teeeves e EEEak anaoa 4 2 EditNO DAME Di OOF ANS sessa EARE E RE ERRE eE EEE EREE 4 3 Managing part PrograMiS sn ca tecemusn tarts en cceumip
158. e following illustration for inserting a chamfer with CHF using the example Between two straight lines N10 G1 CHF Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 91 See the following illustration for inserting a chamfer with CHR using the example Between two straight lines N10 G1 CHR r Angle bisector Programming examples of chamfer N5 G17 G94 F300 GO X100 Y100 N10 G1 X85 CHF 5 Insert chamfer with chamfer length of 5 mm N20 X70 Y70 N30 GO X60 Y6O0 N100 G1 X50 CHR 7 Insert chamfer with leg length of 7 mm N110 X40 Y40 N200 G1 FRC 200 X30 CHR 4 Insert chamfer with feedrate FRC N210 X20 Y20 M30 Rounding RND or RNDM A circle contour element can be inserted with tangential connection between the linear and circle contours in any combination See the following examples for inserting roundings Straight line straight line l l l Straight line circle Rounding Rounding N10 G1 RND N50 G1 RND Programming and Operating Manual Milling 92 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 Programming examples for rounding N10 N20 N30 N40 N50 NoO N70 N80 N90 G17 G94 F300 GO X100 Y100 G1 X85 RND 8 X70 Y70 GO X60 Y6O G1 X50 FRCM 200 RNDM 7 3 G3 X40 Y40 CR 20 G1 X30 Y30 RNDM 0 x20 Y20 M30 8 10 Tool and tool offset 8 10 1 General Information Functionality Insert 1 rounding with radius 8 mm feedrate F Modal rounding
159. e is programmed under SST1 If this parameter is assigned the value zero retraction is carried out at the speed programmed under SST AXN tool axis The identifiers have the following meanings 1st axis of the current plane 2nd axis of the current plane 3rd axis of the current plane For example to machine a center hole in Z in the G17 plane you program G17 AXN 3 Deep hole tapping VARI DAM VRT With the VARI parameter it is possible to distinguish between simple tapping VARI 0 and deep hole tapping VARI 0 In conjunction with deep hole tapping it is possible to choose between chip breaking retraction by variable distance from current drilling depth parameter VRT VARI 1 and chip removal withdrawal from reference plane VARI 2 These functions work analogously to the normal deep hole drilling cycle CYCLE83 The incremental drilling depth for one pass is specified via parameter DAM The cycle internally calculates the intermediate depth as follows e The programmed incremental drilling depth is executed in each step until the rest up to the final drilling depth is less than lt 2 x DAM e The remaining drilling depth is halved and executed in two steps Thus the minimum drilling depth is not smaller than DAM 2 Note The direction of rotation when tapping in the cycle is always reversed automatically Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 137 Programming example
160. e parameters for the contour elements ALL parad The following additional parameters are displayed after you press this softkey meters lot Starting angle with reference to Y axis a2 Angle to preceding element tangential transition a2 0 uo End angle with reference to Y axis Angle of aperture of circle Programming and Operating Manual Milling 244 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 Machine manufacturer The names of the identifiers X or Y are defined in the machine data where they can also be changed Transition to next element A transition element can be used whenever there is a point of intersection between two neighboring elements this can be calculated from the input values You can choose to insert either a radius RND a chamfer CHR or an undercut as the transition element between any two contour elements The transition is always appended to the end of a contour element You select transition elements in the parameter input screen for the relevant contour element Radius or chamfer at the start or the end of a turning contour In simple turning contours a chamfer or radius must often be appended at the start and end of the contour A chamfer or radius terminates an axis parallel contour section on the blank You select the direction of transition for the contour start in the starting point screen You can choose between chamfer and radius The value is defined in the same manner as for the transition elements I
161. e reached the Exact stop window fine value in the machine data e G602 Exact stop window coarse Block advance takes place when all axes have reached the Exact stop window coarse value in the machine data The selection of the exact stop window has a significant influence on the total time if many positioning operations are executed Fine adjustments require more time See the following illustration for exact stop window coarse or fine in effect for G60 G9 Block change enable for coarse for fine __46602 coarse 6601 L fine l Programming example N5 G602 Exact stop window coarse N10 GO G60 X20 Exact stop modal N20 X30 Y30 G60 continues to act N30 Gl G601 X50 Y50 F100 Exact stop window fine N40 G64 X70 Y60 Switching over to continuous path mode N50 GO X90 Y90 N60 GO G9 X95 Exact stop acts only in this block N70 GO X100 Y100 Again continuous path mode M30 Note The G9 command only generates exact stop for the block in which it is programmed G60 however is effective until it is canceled by G64 Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 85 Continuous path control mode G64 The objective of the continuous path control mode is to avoid deceleration at the block boundaries and to switch to the next block with a path velocity as constant as possible in the case of tangential transitions The function works with look ahead velocity control over sever
162. e row of holes in the first axis of R15 20 the plane RIG O Reference point for the row of holes in the second axis of the plane R17 10 Starting angle R18 10 2 d OE Distance from first hole to reference point Distance between the holes R20 5 Number of holes per row R21 0 Number of rows R22 10 Row counter Distance between the rows Programming and Operating Manual Milling 156 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 N10 G90 F300 S500 M3 T10 D1 Specification of the technological values N20 G17 GO X R14 Y R15 Z105 Approach starting position N30 MCALL CYCLE82 R11 R10 R12 R13 Modal call of drilling cycle O 1 N40 LABELI1 Call of row of holes cycle N41 HOLES R14 R15 R16 R17 R18 R19 N50 RI5 R15 R22 Calculate y value for the next line N60 R21 R21 1 Increment line counter N70 IF R21 lt R20 GOTOB LABEL1 Return to LABELI if the condition is fulfilled N80 MCALL Deselect modal call N90 G90 GO X30 Y20 z105 Approach starting position N100 M02 End of program 9 5 3 Circle of holes HOLES2 Programming HOLES2 CPA CPO RAD STA1 INDA NUM Parameters CPA REAL Center point of circle of holes absolute first axis ofthe plane So REN Genier porni of oe of oles absolt second anis ofte plane _ RAD REAL STA1 REAL Starting angle Range of values 180 lt STA1 lt 180 degrees INDA REAL Incrementing angle Number of holes Function Use this cycle to machine a circle of holes T
163. ecial signal Program control M01 is present Automatic gear stage changeover re M41 to M45 Gear stage 1 to gear stage 5 re m70 M19 Re served do not use Remaining M functions Functionality is not defined by the control system and can therefore be used by the machine manufacturer freely Block number 0 9999 9999 Can be used to identify blocks subblock only integer no sign with a number is written at the beginning of a block Block number of a 0 9999 9999 Special block identification main block only integer no sign used instead of N such a block should contain all instructions for a complete subsequent machining step Number of 1 9999 Is used if the subroutine is run subroutine passes only integer no sign several times and is contained in the same block as the call N10 L781 P separate block N10 L871 P3 three cycles Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 263 Value assignments RO Arithmetic 0 0000001 R1 7 9431 R2 4 to parameters 9999 9999 with specification of an R299 8 decimal places exponent or with specification R1 1 9876EX9 R1 1 987 of an exponent 600 000 10 300 10 300 In addition to the 4 basic Arithmetic functions arithmetic functions using the operands there are the following arithmetic functions Z Degrees Degrees TAN Degrees Arctangent2 TRUNC LN EXP Exponentia
164. ecification of technology values N20 D3 T3 27110 Approach retraction plane N30 X40 Y120 Approach of the first drilling position N40 CYCLE81 110 100 2 35 Cycle call with absolute final drilling depth safety clearance and incomplete parameter list N50 Y30 Approach next drilling position N60 CYCLE81 110 102 35 Cycle call without safety clearance N70 GO G90 F180 S300 M03 Specification of technology values N80 X90 Approach next position N90 CYCLE81 110 100 2 65 Cycle call with relative final drilling depth and safety clearance N100 M02 End of program 9 4 4 Drilling counterboring CYCLE82 Programming CYCLE82 RTP RFP SDIS DP DPR DTB Parameters Data type REAL Retraction plane absolute REAL Reference plane absolute Safety clearance enter without sign DP REAL Final driling depth absolute DPR REAL Final drilling depth relative to the reference plane enter without sign Function The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed and feedrate to the entered final drilling depth A dwell time can be allowed to elapse when the final drilling depth has been reached Programming and Operating Manual Milling 128 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 Sequence Position reached prior to cycle start The drilling position is the position in the two axes of the selected plane The cycle creates the following sequence of motions e Approach of the reference plane brought forward by the sa
165. ect a contour element of straight line in any direction Enter the parameters for this element and press this softkey to confirm e X 43 972 inc e q1 55 Press this softkey to select a contour element of straight horizontal line Enter the parameters for this element and press this softkey to confirm e X 5 67 abs Press this softkey to select a contour element of circular arc Enter the parameters for this element and press this softkey to select the desired contour characteristics e Direction of rotation clockwise e R 72 e X 5 67 abs e Y 0 abs Press this softkey to confirm Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 249 Now you can see the programmed contour in the graphics window 16 11 41 2612 12 18 Circular arc Delete element Dir of rot QO R 72 668 x 5 678 abs O Y 0 800 abs O I 40 889 abs O J 62 799 abs O Trans to next element CHR O 8 BBA Free text input Contour allowance Lancel 8 008 Right z Follower element Example 2 Starting point X 0 abs Y 0 abs machining plane G17 The contour is programmed in the clockwise direction with dialog selection Starting point X 0 Y 0 Operating sequence E 1 Select the desired operating area MANAGER 2 Enter the desired program folder Programming and Operating Manual Milling 250 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 A i 4 P Cont Accept 5 element m 6 Accept
166. ed Press this key to set the reference point as required for example the workpiece Enter the distance between the tool tip and the reference point in the ZO field for example 0 This value is the thickness of a setting block if it is used Tool measurement manual T 1 D 1 Ref point Werkpieell ZA H HHH mn y LengthiL i H HHH mn Save the tool length value in the Z axis The tool diameter radius and cutting edge position are all taken in to account Press this vertical softkey to open the window for measuring the tool diameter Use the axis traversing keys to move the tool to approach the workpiece in the X direction Switch to handwheel control mode Select a suitable override feedrate and then use the handwheel to move the tool to scratch the required workpiece edge or the edge of the setting block if it is used Enter the distance to the workpiece edge in the X and Y directions in the XO and YO fields respectively for example enter 0 at X0 and 0 at YO This is the value of the width of a setting block if it is used Select one of X0 YO as required Tool measurement manual 7 T 1 D i AR H Hhh mm Yg 8l mm Y y Diameter H HHh mm Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 Set 15 Save the tool diameter value dianeter 16 Press this softkey and you can see that the compensation data values have been Ye automatically added to the tool data Re
167. ed with the appropriate functions e g Section Support for the contour definition programming The individual planes are also used to define the direction of rotation of the circle for the circular interpolation CW or CCW In the plane in which the circle is traversed the abscissa and the ordinate are designed and thus also the direction of rotation of the circle Circles can also be traversed in a plane other than that of the currently active G17 to G19 plane For more information refer to Section Circular interpolation Page 72 Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 51 The following plane and axis assignments are possible G function Plane abscissa ordinate Vertical axis on plane length compensation axis when drilling milling See the following illustration for planes and axes when drilling milling Programming example N10 G17 T D M X Y plane selected N20 see Ke e Yene iiei tool length compensation lengthl in Z axis 8 2 3 Absolute incremental dimensioning G90 G91 AC IC Functionality With the instructions G90 G91 the written positional data X Y Z are evaluated as a coordinate point G90 or as an axis position to traverse to G91 G90 G91 applies to all axes Irrespective of G90 G91 certain positional data can be specified for certain blocks in absolute incremental dimensions using ACIIC These instructions do not determine the path by which the end p
168. el Recompiling Recompiling of program codes serves to make modifications to an existing program using the cycle support Re Position the cursor on the line to be modified and press this softkey This reopens the input screen from EZ comp which the program piece has been created and you can modify and accept the values Programming and Operating Manual Milling 124 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 9 4 Drilling cycles 9 4 1 General information Drilling cycles are motional sequences specified according to DIN 66025 for drilling boring tapping etc They are called in the form of a subroutine with a defined name and a parameter list The drilling cycles can be modal that is they are executed at the end of each block containing motion commands Further cycles created by the user can also be called modally There are two types of parameters e Geometrical parameters e Machining parameters The geometrical parameters are identical for all drilling cycles drilling pattern cycles and milling cycles They define the reference and retraction planes the safety clearance and the absolute or relative final drilling depth Geometrical parameters are assigned once during the first drilling cycle CYCLE81 See the following illustration for drilling centering CYCLE81 Geometrical parameters Retraction plane Safety clearance Reference plane Final drilling depth The machining parameters have a different meaning and effect in the indi
169. elative coordinate system REL Operating sequence M 1 Select the desired operating area MACHINE 2 Switch to JOG mode 3 Press this softkey to switch the display to the relative coordinate system 4 Use the cursor keys to select the input field and then enter the new position value of the reference point in the relative coordinate system f A18 H 660 mm K Y A 8A 8 666 mn L E ST Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 2217 5 Use this key to activate the values after each entry You can use the following vertical softkeys to set the reference point to zero Set the X axis to zero azh Veo Set the Y axis to zero Set the Z axis to zero Add Set the spindle to zero one All Set all axes to zero to zero A 8 2 Face milling Functionality Use this function to prepare a blank for the subsequent machining without creating a special part program Operating sequence 1 Select the desired operating area M MACHINE Ww 2 Switch to JOG mode UL JOG Face 3 Open the face milling window cutt 4 Move the cursor keys to navigate in the list and enter the desired values for the selected parameters see table below for the parameter descriptions 5 Confirm your entries with the appropriate key 6 Select the cutting path of the tool during machining Programming and Operating Manual Milling 228 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 Jf ie OK Ka i
170. element plus the angular increment It is not necessary here for the preceding element to have been entered as polar In contour programming the contour calculator converts the Cartesian coordinates of the preceding end point using the definitive pole into polar coordinates This also applies if the preceding element has been given in polar coordinates since this could relate to another pole if a pole has been inserted in the meantime Pole change example Polar coordinates Predecessor ref to pole Li 3 6603 9 0 4 p0 Ao j VA oor Polar coordinates referring to Pole O input Figure A 1 pole change milling Pole Xpole 0 0 Ypole 0 0 Pole 0 End point L1abs 10 0 dabs 30 0 Calculated Cart Coordinates Xabs 8 6603 Yabs 5 0 New pole Xpole1 5 0 Ypole1 5 0 Pole 1 Calculated polar coord Predecessor L1abs 3 6603 dabs 0 0 Next point L1inc 2 0 pinc 45 0 Absolute polar coordinates for current element Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 247 Liabs 1 6603 dabs 45 0 Calculate Cartesian coordinates Xabs 1 1740 Yabs 1 1740 A 14 6 Cycle support Functionality The technologies below are provided with the additional support in the form of pre defined cycles which then must be parameterized e Drilling e Milling For more information refer to the Programming and Operati
171. eparation in the NC is aborted 62000 62999 Clear key The block preparation is interrupted the cycle can be continued with the following key after the alarm has been cleared 9 7 3 Overview of cycle alarms The error numbers are classified as follows Oo fe Ke fe O O e X 0 General cycle alarms e X 1 Alarms generated by the drilling drilling pattern and milling cycles 9 7 4 Messages in the cycles The cycles display their messages in the message line of the control system These messages do not interrupt the program execution Messages provide information with regard to a certain behavior of the cycles and with regard to the progress of machining and are usually kept beyond a machining step or until the end of the cycle An example of messages is as follows Depth according to the value for the relative depth from all drilling cycles Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 211 10 Blank data Blank material Cube aluminum Blank length 100 mm Blank width 80 mm Typical milling program Blank height 60 mm machining length 46 mm clamping length 10 mm Required tools T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T11 T14 T20 Programming example 1 A 5 10 A A T A M06 G54G90 S4000M3 CYCLE TL 2000000 2 00000 2 00000 0 00000 20 00000 40000007 10000000 2000000 oe00000 2000000 020000 150000000 3b 3 CYCLET1I4 2000000 2 00000 2 00000 0700000 50 00000 40 00000
172. er point and be performed vertically from there thus it is practical to predrill at this position e The milling direction can be determined either by using a G command G2 G3 or from the spindle direction as synchronous or up cut milling e For solid machining the maximum infeed width in the plane can be programmed e Finishing allowance also for the pocket base e There are three different insertion strategies vertically to the pocket center along a helical path around the pocket center oscillating at the pocket central axis Shorter approach paths in the plane for finishing e Consideration of a blank contour in the plane and a blank dimension at the base optimum machining of preformed pockets possible Sequence Position reached prior to cycle start Starting position is any position from which the pocket center point can be approached at the height of the retraction plane without collision Sequence of motions when roughing With GO the pocket center point is approached at the retraction level and then from this position with GO too the reference plane brought forward by the safety clearance is approached The machining of the pocket is then carried out according to the selected insertion strategy taking into account the programmed blank dimensions Programming and Operating Manual Milling 198 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 Sequence of motions when finishing Finishing is performed in the order
173. er point traverses along the helical path determined by the radius _RAD1 and the depth per revolution _DP1 The feedrate is also programmed under _FFD The direction of rotation of this helical path corresponds to the direction of rotation with which the pocket will be machined The insertion depth programmed under _DP1 is taken into account as the maximum depth and is always calculated as an integer number of revolutions of the helical path If the current depth required for an infeed this can be several revolutions on the helical path is reached a full circle is still executed to eliminate the inclined path of insertion Pocket solid machining then starts in this plane and continues until it reaches the final machining allowance The starting point of the described helical path is at the longitudinal axis of the pocket in plus direction and is approached with G1 Insertion with oscillation to the central axis of the pocket means that the cutter center point is inserted oscillating on a straight line until it reaches the next current depth The maximum immersion angle is programmed under _RAD1 and the length of the oscillation travel is calculated in the cycle If the current depth is reached the travel is executed once more without depth infeed in order to eliminate the inclined insertion path The feedrate is programmed under _FFD Taking into account the blank dimensions During solid machining of the pockets it is possible to take into
174. erating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 107 8 14 2 Conditional program jumps Functionality Jump conditions are formulated after the IF instruction If the jump condition value not Zero is satisfied the jump takes place The jump destination can be a block with a label or with a block number This block must be located within the program Conditional jump instructions require a separate block Several conditional jump instructions can be located in the same block By using conditional program jumps you can also considerably shorten the program if necessary Programming IF condition GOTOF label Jump forward IF condition GOTOB label Jump backwards GOTOF Jump direction forward in the direction of the last block of the program GOTOB Jump direction backwards in the direction of the first block of the program Label Selected string for the label jump label or block number IF Introduction of the jump condition Condition Arithmetic parameter arithmetic expression for formulating the condition Comparison operations Operators Meaning S O Equal to Not equal to greater than ps estan o O greater than or equal to less than or equal to The comparison operations support formulating of a jump condition Arithmetic expressions can also be compared The result of comparison operations is satisfied or not satisfied Not satisfied sets the value to zero Programming example
175. es Tapping with compensating chuck G63 ccc ceccceecccceececee cece eeeeeececeeeesaeeeeaeeeeseeeeseecesseeeeseeeesaeeesaeeesseeees 80 Thread interpolation G39 GIJ 2 aenta r E EEN Fixed pont approdare E A A E eaten EENE eee Eat Fixed point approach G75 cincesca sees dese tecleesatediatestaccecpivwivecetectteghtieditdeaiecenaieotitciaiasctegieetiieentersecdieriitecateriead Reference point approach G74 eccccsecccceeccceececeeeeceeeeseeeeeseeeeceucessacesseeeeseeeeseueessaeessaeesseeeseusesseeesaaes Acceleration control and exact stop continuous path nansennennnnnnnnnennsnnnnnnrnnnrrsnrnnrnnrnrrrnnrnnrnrrrerrsrrnnnne Acceleration pattern BRISK SOFT ccccccccssccceeeeeeeeeeeceeeteneeseeeteeeeaneenaeeseeeeaneeseeeteeeeaneeseeeteeeeaneeseeees Exact stop continuous path control mode G9 G60 G64 ec cccccseeeaeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeteeeeaneenes VS UTS a E oven qedeaa acacia E E SES OV MMS acces a ae ence ace ca whe cc ts wt ee eosin gee sa sin ene nee ee AN SS eases EEE EE eee SNE A ties EE NEA A EEN EEN E ST Spindle speed S directions Of POLALIOMN s2cctcccscxecnsse dente rinine aa aes e ie iai nas iee deis Spindle positioning SPOS race desisacedence ede dccntacsncdecaat e K a REA nRa smededeatdanelaespsdetadetenalacuesdadeatdanndeenesdesead Conto r programming SUD DON sriccececcseiansacdecseesciesaneieencesestidsenueedhssescicsnbarencenesciciueeredhenaeieieasteidiecenestieieesees Contour definition P
176. es is programmed with reference to the unwrapped level surface of the cylinder e The control system transforms the programmed traversing movements in the Cartesian coordinate X Y Z system into the traversing movements of the real machine axes The main spindle functions here as the machine rotary axis e TRACYL must be configured using special machine data The rotary axis position at which the value Y 0 is also defined here TRACYL transformation types There are three forms of cylinder surface coordinate transformation e TRACYL without groove wall offset TRAFO_TYPE_n 512 e TRACYL with groove wall offset TRAFO_TYPE_n 513 e TRACYL with additional linear axis and groove wall offset TRAFO_TYPE_n 514 The groove wall offset is parameterized with TRACYL using the third parameter For cylinder peripheral curve transformation with groove side compensation the axis used for compensation should be positioned at zero y 0 so that the groove centric to the programmed groove center line is finished Axis utilization The following axes cannot be used as a positioning axis or a reciprocating axis e The geometry axis in the peripheral direction of the cylinder peripheral surface Y axis e The additional linear axis for groove side compensation Z axis Programming TRACYL d or TRACYL d n or for transformation type 514 TRACYL d n groove side offset TRAFOOF Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1
177. esired operating area Switch to JOG mode Open the lower level menu for tool measurement Open the auto tool measurement window The tool length in the Z direction is measured by default Change the tool number T or cutting edge number D in the following window if necessary Tool measurement auto 4 T I Gi D i Length n Length 8 666 mn Note Only when you measure the tool without the tool carrier that can be oriented it is necessary to change the cutting edge number e f you change the tool number you still need to use the T S M function to change the tool before measurement refer to Section Activating the tool Page 20 for more information Manually position the tool in the vicinity of the probe in a way that the collision can be avoided when the probe is traversing Press this key on the MCP The tool traverses at the measurement feedrate to the probe and gets back The tool length is calculated and entered in the tool list with the cutting edge position and tool radius or diameter taken into consideration as well Note that if several axes move simultaneously no offset data can be calculated Press this vertical softkey to measure the tool diameter in the X and Y planes Change the tool number T or cutting edge number D in the following window if necessary Tool measurenent auto Gi D 1 T a Y e neter kd Manually position the tool in the vicinity of the probe in a way that the co
178. ess both lt CTRL gt and this key as shortcuts for displaying pre defined slides on the screen The icon on the key is a hint that you can press this key to call the calculator function Cursor keys e Toggles between entries in the input field Se e Enters the Set up menu dialog at NC start up Icons on both keys are available only with PPU161 2 and PPU160 2 The icon on the key is a hint that you can press both lt CTRL gt and the key to adjust the screen backlight brightness Control keys The icon on the key is available only with PPU161 2 and PPU160 2 The icon is a hint that this key can be used together with another key to function as a key combination Operating area To open the system data management operating area press the following key keys combination Enables user defined extension applications for example generation of user dialogs with the EasyXLanguage function For more information about this function refer to SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Function Manual Status LEDs LED RDY Lights up green The CNC is ready and the PLC is in running mode Lights up orange e On The PLC is in stop mode e Flashing The PLC is in power up mode Lights up red The CNC is in stop mode LED TEMP Unlit The CNC temperature is within the specified range Lights up orange The CNC temperature is out of range USB interface Connects to a USB device for example e An external USB memory sticker to transfer data between
179. ete cycle of tapping with compensating chuck is provided by the standard cycle CYCLE840 See the following illustration for tapping using G33 Programming example metric thread 5 pitch as per table 0 8 mm rev hole already premachined N10 G54 GO G90 X10 Y10 Z5 S600 M3 Approach starting point clockwise spindle rotation N20 G33 Z 25 K0 8 Tapping end point 25 mm N40 Z5 K0 8 M4 Retraction counter clockwise spindle rotation N50 GO X30 Y30 220 N60 M30 Axis velocity With G33 threads the velocity of the axis for the thread lengths is determined on the basis of the spindle speed and the thread pitch The feedrate F is not relevant It is however stored However the maximum axis velocity rapid traverse defined in the machine data can not be exceeded This will result in an alarm Note Override switch e The spindle speed override switch should remain unchanged for thread machining e The feedrate override switch has no meaning in this block 8 5 2 Tapping with compensating chuck G63 Functionality G63 can be used for tapping with compensating chuck The programmed feedrate F must match with the spindle speed S programmed under the address S or specified speed and with the thread pitch of the drill F mm min S rpm x thread pitch mm rev Programming and Operating Manual Milling 80 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 The compensating chuck compensates the resulting path differences to a certain li
180. ewing and executing recent programs 1 PROGRAM MANAGER Recent 2 files Select the desired operating area Press this softkey to open the list of recent files Note that even the deleted files are also displayed in the list Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 3 Select the program file that you would like to execute 4 Press this vertical softkey to start executing the selected program Execute To clear the current file list press the following softkey Clear history 5 Automatic machining Overview The machine must have been set up for AUTO mode according to the specifications of the machine manufacturer You can perform such operations as program start stop control block search and real time simulation etc Softkey functions Fal M Pressing machine Key on the PPU and then auto key on the MCP allows you to open the following window Mm ii NC MPF SIEMENS A Reset ROY function HCS Position Dist to go Lp Auxiliary function Mx 1 0 008 em MY 1 B08 es MZ1 0 008 ee oo F A Ae 50 Axis a z nn min feedrate 85 GSeae a Block display Current program MPF Act val Work WCS Act val Hach HCS Prog Block Real Corr Oo Bamba am De Zooms in the actual value window Displays important G functions Performs the program test dry run conditional stop Displays currently a
181. executed as a compensation start default setting at starting point N21 G41 X For example For example N10 G42 N20 G42 G1 X Y N21 X N20 G1 X N22 G41 Y N21 G41 X Y N23 X N22 X N24 G42 Y N25 X Cancellation of compensation by M2 If compensation mode is canceled using M2 end of program without writing the command G40 the last block with coordinates of the plane G17 to G19 will end in the normal position of the compensation vector No compensating movement is executed The program ends with this tool position Critical machining cases When programming pay special attention to cases where the contour travel is smaller than the tool radius Such cases should be avoided Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 101 Also check over multiple blocks that the contour contains no bottlenecks When carrying out a test dry run use the largest tool radius you are offered Acute contour angles If very sharp outside corners occur in the contour with active G451 intersection the control system automatically switches to transition circle This prevents long idle motions 8 10 8 Example of tool radius compensation See the following illustration for example of tool radius compensation 70 80 90 100 110 120 Programming example N1 T1 Tool 1 with offset D1 N5 GO G17 G90 X5 Y55 Z50 Approach starting point N6 Gl ZO F200 S80 M3 N10 G41 G450 X30 Y60 F400
182. experience are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products systems Proper use of Siemens products Note the following Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation If products and components from other manufacturers are used these must be recommended or approved by Siemens Proper transport storage installation assembly commissioning operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with The information in the relevant documentation must be observed Siemens AG 2014 All rights reserved 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 1 Preface Applicable products This manual is applicable to the following control system Control system SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED M Milling Documentation components and target groups Component User documentation Programming and Operating Manual Turning Programming and Operating Manual Milling Programming and Operating Manual ISO Turning Milling Programming and Operating Manual Manual Machine Plus Programmers and operators of turning machines Turning Diagnostics Manual Mechanical and electrical designers commissioning engineers machine operators and service and maintenance personnel Manufacturer service documentation Commissioning Manual Installatio
183. factors Contour starting point first point in the subroutine Direction of the contour at the starting point Approach mode and its parameters Tool radius The cutter radius compensation is activated in this block e Depth infeed to the first or next machining depth plus programmed safety clearance with GO G1 The first machining depth results from the following data Total depth Finishing allowance The maximum possible depth infeed e Approach of the contour vertically with depth infeed _FFD and then in the plane at the programmed feedrate _FFP1 or 3D with the feedrate programmed under _FAD according to the programming for smooth approach e Milling along the contour with G40 G41 G42 e Smooth retraction from the contour with G1 while continuing feed for the surface machining by the retraction amount e Retraction with GO G1 and feedrate for intermediate paths _FF3 depending on the programming e Retraction to the depth infeed point with GO G1 and _FF3 e This sequence is repeated on the next machining plane up to finishing allowance in the depth Upon completion of roughing the tool stands above the point calculated internally in the control system of retraction from the contour at the height of the retraction plane The cycle generates the following sequence of motions when finishing During finishing milling is performed at the relevant infeed along the base of the contour until the final dimension
184. fety clearance Insertion to machining depth The first machining depth is calculated from the total depth finishing allowance and the maximum possible depth infeed Sequence of motions when finishing VARI 2 According to the set parameters FAL and FALD either finishing is carried out at the surface contour or at the base or both together The approach strategy corresponds to the motions in the plane as with roughing Explanation of the parameters For an explanation of the parameters RTP RFP SDIS DP and DPR refer to Section Drilling centering CYCLE81 Page 126 For an explanation of the parameters MID FAL FALD FFP1 and FFD refer to Section Milling a rectangular pocket POCKET3 Page 197 PRAD diameter of spigot Enter the diameter without sign Programming and Operating Manual Milling 182 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 PA PO spigot center point Use the parameters PA and PO to define the reference point of the spigot CDIR milling direction Use this parameter to specify the machining direction for the spigot Using the parameter CDIR the milling direction can be programmed directly with 2 for G2 and 3 for G3 or alternatively with synchronous milling or conventional milling Down cut and up cut milling are determined internally in the cycle via the direction of rotation of the spindle activated prior to calling the cycle M3 gt G3 M3 gt G2 M4 gt G2 M4 gt G3 VARI machining type Use
185. fety clearance by using GO e Traversing to the final drilling depth with the feedrate G1 programmed prior to the cycle call e Dwell time at final drilling depth e Retraction to the retraction plane with GO Explanation of the parameters For the parameters RTP RFP SDIS DP DPR refer to Section Drilling centering CYCLE81 Page 126 L LI L L K U Liz DTB dwell time The dwell time to the final drilling depth chip breakage is programmed under DTB in seconds Programming example Drilling_counterboring The program machines a single hole of a depth of 27 mm at position X24 Y15 in the XY plane with cycle CYCLE82 The dwell time programmed is 2 s the safety clearance in the drilling axis Z is 4 mm Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 129 N10 GO G17 G90 F200 S300 M3 Specification of technology values N20 D1 T10 Z110 Approach retraction plane N30 X24 Y15 Approach drilling position N40 CYCLE82 110 102 4 75 2 Cycle call with absolute final drilling depth and safety clearance N50 M02 End of program Programming example2 Drilling_counterboring Proceed through the following steps q 1 Select the desired operating area 2 Open the vertical softkey bar for available drilling cycles a Drill prema 3 Press this softkey from the vertical softkey bar ele SEER CENTER 4 Press this softkey to open the window for CYCLE82 Parameteri
186. for comparison operators R1 gt 1 R1 greater than 1 1 lt R1 1 less than R1 RI lt R2 R3 R1 less than R2 plus R3 R6 gt SIN R7 R7 R6 greater than or equal to SIN R7 squared Programming example N10 IF R1 GOTOF LABEL1 If RI is not null then go to the block having LABEL1 GO X30 Y30 N90 LABEL1 GO X50 Y30 N100 IF R1 gt 1 GOTOF LABEL2 If Rl is greater than 1 then go to the block having LABEL2 GO X40 Y40 N150 LABEL2 GO X60 Y60 GO X70 Y70 N800 LABEL3 GO X80 Y80 GO X100 Y100 N1000 IF R45 R7 1 GOTOB LABEL3 If R45 is equal to R7 plus 1 then go to the block having LABEL3 Programming and Operating Manual Milling 108 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 M30 Several conditional jumps in the block N10 MC1 GO X20 Y20 N15 GO X0 YO N20 IF R1l 1 GOTOB MC1 IF R1 2 GOTOF MA2 N30 GO X10 Y10 N50 MA2 GO X50 Y50 N60 M30 Note The jump is executed for the first fulfilled condition 8 14 3 Program example for jumps Task Approaching points on a circle segment Existing conditions Start angle 30 in R1 Circle radius 32 mm in R2 Position spacing 10 in R3 Number of points 11 in R4 Position of circle center in Z 50 mm in R5 Position of circle center in X 20 mm in R6 See the following illustration for linear approach of points on a circle segment R4 11 number of points Programming example N10 R1 30 R2 32 R3 10 R4 11 R5 50 R6 20 Assignment of initial values N20 MC1 GO Z R2 COS R1 R5 X R
187. from the edge until the finishing allowance on the base is reached and then the base is finished If one of the finishing allowances is equal to zero this part of the finishing process is skipped Finishing on the edge While finishing on the edge the tool traverses around the pocket contour only once For finishing on the edge the path includes one quadrant reaching the corner radius The radius of this path is normally 2 mm or if less space is provided equals to the difference between the corner radius and the mill radius If the final machining allowance on the edge is larger than 2 mm the approach radius is increased accordingly The depth infeed is performed with GO in the open towards the pocket center and the starting point of the approach path is also reached with GO Finishing on the base During finishing on the base the machine performs GO towards the pocket center until reaching a distance equal to pocket depth finishing allowance safety clearance From this point onwards the tool is always fed in vertically at the depth since a tool with a front cutting edge is used for base finishing The base surface of the pocket is machined once Insertion strategies Inserting vertically to the pocket center means that the current infeed depth calculated internally in the cycle lt maximum infeed depth programmed under _ MID is executed in a block containing GO or G1 Insertion at a helical path means that the cutter cent
188. g Fkorr F prog rcont E tool feont cont Radius of the circle contour tool Tool radius Programming example N10 G42 G1 X30 Y40 F1000 Tool radius compensation ON N20 CFC F350 Feedrate override with circle ON N30 G2 X50 Y40 I10 J 7 F350 Feed value acts on contour N40 G3 X70 Y40 I10 J6 F300 Feed value acts on contour N50 CFTCP Feedrate override OFF programmed feedrate value acts at the milling cutter center point N60 M30 8 5 Thread cutting 8 5 1 Thread cutting with constant lead G33 Functionality This requires a spindle with position measuring system The function G33 can be used to machine threads with constant lead of the following type If an appropriate tool is used tapping with compensating chuck is possible The compensating chuck compensates the resulting path differences to a certain limited degree Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 79 The drilling depth is specified by specifying one of the axes X Y or Z the thread pitch is specified via the relevant I J or K G33 remains active until canceled by another instruction from this G group GO G1 G2 G3 Right hand or left hand thread Right hand or left hand thread is set with the rotation direction of the spindle M3 right CW M4 left CCW see Section Spindle movements Page 87 To do this the rotation value must be programmed under address S or a rotation speed must be set Note A compl
189. g and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 205 Programming example Circular pocket With this program you can machine a circular pocket in the YZ plane The center point is determined by Y50 Z50 The infeed axis for the depth infeed is the X axis Neither finishing dimension nor safety clearance is specified The pocket is machined with down cut milling Infeed is performed along a helical path A milling cutter with 10 mm radius is used See the following programming example for circular pocket N10 G17 G90 GO S650 M3 T1 D1 Specification of technology values N20 X50 50 Approach starting position N30 POCKET4 3 0 0 20 25 50 60 6 0 O 200 100 1 Cycle call 41 0 0 0 2 3 Parameters FAL and FALD are omitted N40 M02 End of program 9 6 11 Thread milling CYCLE90 Programming CYCLE90 RTP RFP SDIS DP DPR DIATH KDIAM PIT FFR CDIR TYPTH CPA CPO Parameters DP REAL Final drilling depth absolute DPR REAL Final drilling depth relative to the reference plane enter without sign Core diameter internal diameter of the thread Direction of rotation for thread milling Values 2 for thread milling with G2 3 for thread milling with G3 Thread type Values O internal thread 1 external thread REAL Center point of circle abscissa absolute CPO Center point of circle ordinate absolute Programming and Operating Manual Milling 206 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 Func
190. g is available with the angle specification ANG For more information see Section Contour definition programming definition programming Page 88 See the illustration for linear interpolation with rapid traverse from point P1 to P2 Straight path _ gt __ Programming example N10 GO X100 Y150 265 Cartesian coordinate N50 GO RP 16 78 AP 45 Polar coordinate Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 69 Information Another group of G functions exists for movement to the position see Section Exact stop continuous path control mode G9 G60 G64 Page 84 For G60 exact stop a window with various precision values can be selected with another G group For exact stop an alternative instruction with non modal effectiveness exists G9 You should consider these options for adaptation to your positioning tasks 8 3 2 Feedrate F Functionality The feed F is the path velocity and represents the value of the geometric sum of the velocity components of all axes involved The individual axis velocities therefore result from the portion of the axis path in the overall distance to be traversed The feedrate F is effective for the interpolation types G1 G2 G3 CIP and CT and is retained until a new F word is written Programming F Note For integer values the decimal point is not required e g F300 Unit of measure for F with G94 G95 The dimension unit for the F w
191. g used must be specified when the cycle is called In this parameter list the following parameters can be transferred e R parameters only numerical values e Constants If R parameters are used in the parameter list they must first be assigned values in the calling program Proceed as follows to call the cycles e With an incomplete parameter list or e By omitting parameters If you want to exclude the last transfer parameters that have to be written in a call you can prematurely terminate the parameter list with If any parameters are to be omitted within the list a comma must be written as a placeholder No plausibility checks are made for parameter values with a limited range of values unless an error response has been specifically described for a cycle If when calling the cycle the parameter list contains more entries than parameters are defined in the cycle the general NC alarm 12340 Too many parameters is displayed and the cycle is not executed Note Axis specific and channel specific machine data of the spindle must be configured Cycle call The individual methods for writing a cycle are shown in the programming examples provided for the individual cycles Simulation of cycles Programs with cycle calls can be tested first in simulation During simulation the traversing movements of the cycle are visualized on the screen Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 123
192. grees in front of the input cursor is replaced by the sin X value O Cosine function The X value in degrees in front of the input cursor is replaced by the cos X value Q Square function The X value in front of the input cursor is replaced by the X value R Square root function The X value in front of the input cursor is replaced by the VX value Bracket function X Y Z Calculation examples Input gt Result 100 67 3 100 67 3 gt 301 sin 45_ 45 S gt 0 707107 eC S aooo e To calculate auxiliary points on a contour the pocket calculator offers the oe functions e Calculating the tangential transition between a circle sector and a straight line e Moving a point in the plane e Converting polar coordinates to Cartesian coordinates e Adding the second end point of a straight line straight line contour section given from an angular relation A 13 Calculating contour elements Function You can use the calculator to calculate the contour elements in the respective input screens Programming and Operating Manual Milling 234 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 Calculating a point in a circle 1 Activate the calculator when you are in an input screen 2 Open the lower level menu for contour elements selection Hore 3 Select the desired calculation function Press this softkey to define the direction of rotation of the circle G2 G3 4 Enter the circle center the angle of the tangent a
193. guration Set password Axis index Nane Axis type Drive number 1 HX1 Linear axis Change T 2 HY1 Linear axis password 10 3 HZ1 Linear axis STEES 4 MSP1 Spindle password 41 Change language data Fa Fs sis E orm f ose 0000 password and end user password for different access levels Sets the system machine data Changes the password as per the corresponding access levels Configures the connected drives and motors Deletes the current password Provides PLC commissioning and diagnostics Selects the user interface language Note that the HMI is automatically restarted when a new language Sets the NC PLC and HMI start up modes W Enters the corresponding password manufacturer is selected Sets the system date and time and adjusts the 4 Configures the access right for the remote control brightness of the screen through the Ethernet connection Backs up and restores system data Switches to the ISO programming mode _ Creates and restores startup archives data archive 45 Saves the contents of the volatile memory into a non volatile memory area Performs the axis optimization pe An extended horizontal softkey bar can be accessed via this key on the PPU Two extended horizontal softkeys are provided An extended horizontal softkey bar can be accessed via this key on the PPU Two extended horizontal softkeys are provided Ly capy Views the service informatio
194. h G17 to G19 S The pole is a contour element that can be edited which itself does not contribute to the contour It T can be entered when the starting point of the contour is defined or anywhere within the contour The pole cannot be created before the starting point of the contour This softkey allows you to specify a pole and can only be entered in absolute Cartesian Pole coordinates This softkey is also present in the starting point screen This enables the pole to be g entered at the start of a contour so that the first contour element can be entered in polar coordinates Further notes If the straight line that was generated with close contour is linked to the start element of the contour with a radius or chamfer the radius or chamfer must be specified explicitly as follows e Close contour input key enter radius chamfer accept element The result then corresponds exactly to what would occur if the closing element were to be entered with the radius or chamfer Close contour can only be used for entering contour elements in polar coordinates if the starting point of the contour was set to polar and the same pole is still valid when the contour is closed Input switchover Cartesian polar The following contour elements can be entered optionally in polar coordinates only after a pole has been defined whether this was done at the outset or later in the process e Circular arcs e Straight lines horizontal vertical any direct
195. hat can be used for monitoring the technological processes in the program or only in the display These timers are read only There are timers that are always active Others can be deactivated via machine data Timers always active e AN_SETUP_TIME Time since the last control power up with default values in minutes It is automatically reset in the case of a Control power up with default values e AN_POWERON_TIME Time since the last control power up in minutes It is reset to zero automatically after each power up of the control system Timers that can be deactivated The following timers are activated via machine data default setting The start is timer specific Each active run time measurement is automatically interrupted in the stopped program state or for feedrate override zero The behavior of the activated timers for active dry run feedrate and program testing can be specified using machine data Programming and Operating Manual Milling 114 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 AC_OPERATING_TIME Total execution time in seconds of NC programs in AUTO mode In AUTO mode the runtimes of all programs between program start and end are summed up The timer is zeroed after each power up of the control system AC_CYCLE_TIME Runtime of the selected NC program in seconds The runtime between program start and end is measured in the selected NC program The timer is reset with the start of a new NC program AC_CUTTING_TIME
196. he geometry to be offset N40 TRANS X30 Y26 New offset N50 AROT RPL 45 Additive 45 degree rotation N60 L10 Subroutine call N70 TRANS Offset and rotation cleared Subroutine call see Section Subroutine technique Page 110 Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 57 8 2 8 Programmable scaling factor SCALE ASCALE Functionality A scale factor can be programmed for all axes with SCALE ASCALE The path is enlarged or reduced by this factor in the axis specified The currently set coordinate system is used as the reference for the scale change Programming SCALE X Y Z Programmable scaling factor clears the old instructions for offset rotation scaling factor mirroring ASCALE X Y Z Programmable scaling factor additive to existing instructions SCALE Without values clears the old instructions for offset rotation scaling factor mirroring The instructions which contain SCALE or ASCALE each require a separate block Note For circles the same factor should be used in both axes If ATRANS is programmed with SCALE ASCALE active these offset values are also scaled See the following illustration for example for scaling and offset Y Workpiece X Workpiece Programming example N10 G17 X Y plane N20 L10 Programmed contour original N30 SCALE X2 Y2 Contour in X and Y enlarged two times N40 L10 N50 ATRANS X2 5 Y18 Values are also scaled N60
197. he machining plane must be defined before the cycle is called The type of hole is determined through the drilling cycle that has already been called modally Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 157 Sequence In the cycle the drilling positions are approached one after the other in the plane with GO Explanation of the parameters CPA CPO and RAD center point position and radius The position of the circle of holes in the machining plane is defined via center point parameters CPA and CPO and radius parameter RAD Only positive values are permitted for the radius STA1 and INDA starting and incremental angle These parameters define the arrangement of the holes on the circle of holes The STA1 parameter defines the angle of rotation between the positive direction of the first axis abscissa in the workpiece coordinate system active before the cycle was called and the first hole The INDA parameter contains the angle of rotation from one hole to the next If the INDA parameter is assigned the value zero the indexing angle is calculated internally from the number of holes which are positioned equally in a circle NUM number The NUM parameter defines the number of holes Programming and Operating Manual Milling 158 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 Programming example Circle of holes The program uses CYCLE82 to produce four holes having a depth of 30 mm The final drilling
198. he program the individual field elements can be reached via the field index and can be treated like individual variables The field index runs from 0 to a small number of the elements Example N10 PVAR7 2 24 The third field element with index 2 is assigned the value 24 Value assignment for field with SET instruction N20 PVAR5 2 SET 1 2 3 After the 3rd field element different values are assigned Value assignment for field with REP instruction N20 PVAR7 4 REP 2 After field element 4 all are assigned the same value here 2 8 13 3 Reading and writing PLC variables Functionality To allow rapid data exchange between NC and PLC a special data area exists in the PLC user interface with a length of 512 bytes In this area PLC data are compatible in data type and position offset In the NC program these compatible PLC variables can be read or written To this end special system variables are provided A_DBBJn Data byte 8 bit value A_DBW n Data word 16 bit value A_DBDJn Data double word 32 bit value A_DBR n REAL data 32 bit value n stands here for the position offset start of data area to start of variable in bytes Programming and Operating Manual Milling 106 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 Programming example R1 SA_DBR 4 Reading a REAL value offset 4 starts at byte 4 of range Note The reading of variables generates a preprocessing stop internal STOPRE Note
199. ield with several native switchover settings Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 241 Select dialog Dialog Some parameter configurations can produce several different contour characteristics In such Sel eee cases you will be asked to select a dialog By clicking this softkey you can display the available o selection options in the graphic display area Select this softkey to make the correct selection green line Confirm your choice with the following softkey v Accept Change a selected dialog enanae If you want to change an existing dialog selection you must select the contour element in which the selection dialog was originally chosen Both alternatives are displayed again when you select this softkey Clear a parameter input field Delete You can delete the value in the selected parameter input field with this softkey or the following key value DEL Save a contour element MEEEDE If you have entered the available data for a contour element or selected a desired dialog pressing element this softkey allows you to store the contour element and return to the main screen You can then OO program the next contour element Append contour element Use the cursor keys to select the element in front of the end marker Use the softkeys to select the contour element of your choice and enter the values you know in the input screen for that element Confirm your inputs with
200. iles can be backed up onto an external PC PG via the RS232 interface Operating sequence 1 Connect the control system with the PC PG using an RS232 cable 2 Configure the communication settings for the RS232 interface see Section Configuring RS232 communication Page 43 PESE 3 Press this button on the main screen of SinuComPCIN and input the name for the text file for Data example Test txt T 4 Select the desired operating area on the PPU MANAGER 5 Enter the program directory Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 49 A 6 Select the program file you desire to back up f Press this softkey to copy it to the clipboard Copy 8 Enter the RS232 directory RSZ32Z PE 9 Press this vertical softkey in the RS232 window The file transferring starts Abort 10 Wait until SinuComPCIN has finished data transfer and click this button Transfer For more information refer to SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Diagnostics Manual 8 Programming principles 8 1 Fundamentals of programming 8 1 1 Program names Each program must have a program name The program name must follow the conventions below e Use a maximum of 24 letters or 12 Chinese characters for a program name the character length of the file extension excluded e Separate the file extension only with a decimal point e Enter the file extension SPF if the current default program type is MPF main pr
201. in polar coordinates G1 AP RP F or with additional axis G1 AP RP Z F e g with G17 axis Z Circular interpolation in clockwise direction G2 X Y in conjunction with a third axis and point and center point TURN also helix interpolation gt see G2 X Y CR F under TURN Radius and end point Aperture angle and center point G2 AR X Y F Aperture angle and end point in polar coordinates G2 AP RP F or with additional axis G2 AP RP Z F e g with G17 axis Z Circular interpolation in counter clockwise G3 otherwise as for G2 direction in conjunction with a third axis and TURNE also helix interpolation gt see under TURN CIP Circular interpolation through intermediate CIP X Y Z I1 point K1 F Circular interpolation tangential transition N10 N20 CT X Y F circle G33 Thread cutting tapping with constant pitch tangential transition to the previous path segment S M Spindle speed direction G33 Z K Thread drilling with compensating chuck e g in Z axis Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 259 Value assignments G331 Thread interpolation N10 SPOS Spindle in position control N20 G331 Z K S tapping without compensating chuck e g in Z axis RH or LH thread is defined via the sign of the pitch e g K
202. ing 150 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 Explanation of the parameters For the parameters RTP RFP SDIS DP DPR refer to Section Drilling centering CYCLE81 Page 126 c gt GO gt G1 G4 M5 MO L LI LI LI E DTB dwell time The dwell time to the final drilling depth chip breakage is programmed under DTB in seconds SDIR direction of rotation The programmed direction of rotation is active for the distance to be traversed to the final drilling depth If values other than 3 or 4 M3 M4 are generated alarm 61102 No spindle direction programmed is generated and the cycle is aborted Programming example Fourth drilling CYCLE88 is called at position X80 Y90 in the XY plane The drilling axis is the Z axis The safety clearance is programmed with 3 mm the final drilling depth is specified relative to the reference plane M4 is active in the cycle N10 G17 G90 F100 S450 Specification of technology values N20 GO X80 Y90 z105 Approach drilling position N30 CYCLE88 105 102 3 72 3 4 Cycle call with programmed spindle direction M4 N40 M02 End of program 9 4 12 Reaming 2 CYCLE89 Programming CYCLE89 RTP RFP SDIS DP DPR DTB Parameters Data type REAL Retraction plane absolute REAL Reference plane absolute DP REAL Finaldriling depth absolute DPR REAL Final drilling depth relative to the reference plane enter without sign Programming and Operating Manual Mi
203. ing time and the run time of all programs between NC start values cold restart in minutes restart in minutes and end of program RESET The timer is set to The total run time of NC programs in AUTO mode The time since the last normal control power up warm zero with each power up of the control system Note The timer is automatically reset to zero in case of a control power up with default values Modifying miscellaneous setting data Operating sequence 1 OFFSET N SD data Hisc gt General Axis specific Channel specific 224 Select the desired operating area Open the setting data window Open the window for miscellaneous setting data Select a group of setting data you desire to modify Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 5 Use these softkeys to search for your desired setting data with the data number name Search Continue search 6 Position the cursor bar in the input fields to be modified and enter the values You can use the following softkeys to switch to the desired axis when modifying the axis specific setting data Axis Axis 7 Use this key or move the cursor to confirm your entries A 6 Setting R parameters Functionality The R variables start screen lists the R parameters that exist within the control system You can set or query these global parameters in any program
204. ion To switchover between Cartesian and polar coordinates additional toggle fields are displayed in the programming windows for the contour elements of oblique lines and circular arcs A toggle field is not displayed if no pole exists Input fields and display fields are then only available for Cartesian values Absolute incremental input Absolute and incremental polar coordinates can be input for polar Cartesian The input fields and display fields are labeled inc and abs Absolute polar coordinates are defined by an absolute distance to the pole that is always positive and an angle in the range of 0 360 When absolute dimensions are specified the angular reference is based on a horizontal axis of the working plane e g X axis with G17 The positive direction of rotation runs counter clockwise If there are several input poles the definitive pole is always the last pole before the input or edited element Incremental polar coordinates relate to both the definitive pole and the end point of the preceding element Programming and Operating Manual Milling 246 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 For an incremental input the absolute distance to the pole is calculated using the absolute distance from the end point of the preceding element to the pole plus the length increment that was entered The increment can be positive or negative The absolute angle is calculated accordingly using the absolute polar angle of the preceding
205. ion as it is to be milled and must consist of a minimum of two contour blocks start and end point since the contour subroutine is called directly internally in the cycle See the following illustration for path milling 1 Contour starting point See the following illustration for path milling 2 Contour starting point a A Functions of the cycle e Selection of roughing single pass traversing parallel to contour taking into account a finishing allowance if necessary at several depths until the finishing allowance is reached and finishing single pass traversing along the final contour if necessary at several depths e Smooth approach to and retraction from the contour either tangentially or radially quadrant or semi circle e Programmable depth infeeds e Intermediate motions either at rapid traverse rate or at feedrate Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 169 Sequence Position reached prior to cycle start Starting position is any position from which the contour starting point can be approached at the height of the retraction plane without collision The cycle generates the following sequence of motions when roughing The depth infeeds are distributed equally with the maximum possible value of the specified parameters e Traversing to the starting point for first milling with GO G1 and FF3 This point is calculated internally in the control system and depends on the following
206. ion groups together the important G codes machine data and setting data that are required for high speed cutting machining Explanation of the parameters TOL Tolerance This refers to the tolerance of axes involved in machining The tolerance value is written to the relevant machine or setting data depending on the G codes Programming and Operating Manual Milling 210 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 TOLM Machining types This parameter determines which technological machining type is to be used 9 7 Error messages and error handling 9 7 1 General Information If error conditions are detected in the cycles an alarm is generated and the execution of the cycle is aborted Furthermore the cycles display their messages in the message line of the control system These messages do not interrupt the program execution The errors with their reactions and the messages in the message line of the control system are described in conjunction with the individual cycles 9 7 2 Error handling in the cycles If error conditions are detected in the cycles an alarm is generated and the machining is aborted Alarms with numbers between 61000 and 62999 generated in the cycles This range of numbers in turn is divided again with regard to alarm responses and cancel criteria The error text that is displayed together with the alarm number gives you more detailed information on the error cause Clearing criterion 61000 61999 NC_RESET Block pr
207. ired operating area OFFSET iJ Tool 2 Open the tool list window IAL vist 3 Open the lower level menu for tool type selection 4 Select a desired tool type with the corresponding softkey Drilling tool l Tapping tool 5 Enter the tool number value range 1 to 31999 preferentially enter a value less than 100 in the following window Hew milling tool Note Select the corresponding tool edge position code according to the actual tool point direction J 6 Use this softkey to confirm your settings The window below shows the information of the new tool OK created 1 Tool list 4 Type T D Geometry 2 G Length Radius a 11 6 688 6 666 Tool type Cutting edge number Tool number D Tool length and radius Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 19 2 T Enter the tool radius data and confirm your settings 3 2 2 Activating the tool Operating sequence M 1 Select the desired operating area MACHINE WW 2 Switch to JOG mode UL JOG 3 Open the T S M window Ls T S M 4 Enter the desired tool number for example 1 in the T S M window T 5 H Tool change Spindle speed rpm Spindle direction oO Activate WO Oo Other H function Press CYCLE START to activate above functions 267 Set Heas T 5 H ee REL T tool 5 Use this key or move the cursor to confirm your entries P
208. is reached Smooth approach and retraction of the contour is carried out according to the existing parameters The appropriate path is calculated internally in the control system At the end of the cycle the tool is positioned at the contour retraction point at the height of the retraction level Note Contour programming When programming the contour observe the following e No programmable offset may be selected in the subroutine prior to the first programmed position e The first block of the contour subroutine is a straight line block containing G90 GO or G90 G1 and defines the start of the contour e The starting condition of the contour is the first position in the machining plane which is programmed in the contour subroutine e The cutter radius compensation is selected deselected by the higher level cycle therefore no G40 G41 G42 is programmed in the contour subroutine Programming and Operating Manual Milling 170 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 Explanation of the parameters For an explanation of the parameters _RTP RFP and _SDIS refer to Section Drilling centering CYCLE8 For an explanation of the parameters _MID FAL FALD FFP1 FFD and _DP refer to Section Milling a rectangular pocket POCKET3 Page 197 ft Reference plane RFP j Finishing allowance depth FALD A Finishing dimension depth DP _KNAME name The contour to be milled is programmed completely in a subroutine
209. ition of the rectangle with reference to PA and _PO results from the sign MIDA max infeed width Use this parameter to define the maximum infeed width when machining in a plane Analogously to the known calculation method for the infeed depth equal distribution of the total depth with maximum possible value the width is distributed equally maximally with the value programmed under _MIDA If this parameter is not programmed or has value 0 the cycle will internally use 80 of the milling tool diameter as the maximum infeed width _FDP retraction travel Use this parameter to define the dimension for the retraction travel in the plane This parameter should reasonably always have a value greater than zero _FDP1 overrun travel Use this parameter to specify an overrun travel in the direction of the plane infeed _MIDA Thus it is possible to compensate the difference between the current cutter radius and the tool nose radius e g cutter radius or cutting tips arranged at an angle The last milling cutter center point path therefore always results as LENG or _WID _FDP1 tool radius from the compensation table Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 165 Cutter diameter from tool table _FALD finishing allowance When roughing a finishing allowance in the depth is taken into account which is programmed under this parameter The residual material remained as the finishing allo
210. k offsets are activated immediately A 5 Entering modifying the setting data Entering modifying the setting data Operating sequence 1 Select the desired operating area OFFSET Cott Open the setting data window SD data Al 3 Position the cursor bar in the input fields to be modified and enter the values see table below for the parameter descriptions A 4 Use this key or move the cursor to confirm your entries Programming and Operating Manual Milling 222 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 Parameters in the setting data window JOG data O JOG feedrate 6 688 nn min 2 Spindle speed H 668 rpr Spindle data 3 Hininunm A ga rpn 4 Haximun 1060 86 rph Limitation with G96 166 666 rpm DRY 6 Dry run feedrate GAAQ 868 mm min Start angle T Start angle for thread H 666 The feedrate in JOG mode If the feedrate value Programmable upper speed limitation at constant cutting is zero then the control system will use the value rate G96 stored in the machine data The speed of the spindle The feedrate which can be entered here will be used instead of the programmed feedrate in AUTO mode if the corresponding function is selected A limitation of the spindle speed in the Max For thread cutting a start position for the spindle is G26 Min G25 fields can only be performed displayed as the start angle A multiple thread can be cut within the limit values defined in the machine
211. l Copying and pasting programs PROGRAM MANAGER Copy Paste 1 Select the desired operating area Open the desired directory Select the program file that you would like to copy Press this softkey to copy the selected file or directory Select the target directory with the horizontal softkeys Press this softkey to paste the file or directory from the clipboard to the current directory Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 35 Deleting restoring programs 1 MANAGER 2 A i 4 DEL wd 5 OK Renaming programs 1 PROGRAM MANAGER A x Renane g OK Select the desired operating area Open the desired directory Select the program file that you would like to delete Press this key and the following message appears on the screen Do you want to delete the file selected Press this softkey to confirm the deletion or press the following softkey to cancel Cancel If you want to restore the last deleted file press the following softkey Undo Select the desired operating area Open the desired directory Select the program file that you would like to rename Press the extension softkey to access more options Press this vertical softkey to open the window for renaming Enter a desired new name with the extension in the input field Press this softkey to confirm your entry or press the following softkey to cancel Cancel Vi
212. l radius compensation TRC The G41 and G42 commands determine the approach retraction direction to the left or right of the contour The approach retraction path straight line quarter or semi circle is selected using a group of G commands To parameterize this path circle radius length approach straight line special addresses can be used this also applies to the feedrate of the infeed motion The infeed motion can additionally be controlled via another G group Programming G147 Approach with a straight line G148 Retraction with a straight line G247 Approach with a quadrant G248 Retraction with a quadrant G347 Approach with a semi circle G348 Retraction with a semi circle G340 Approach and retraction in space basic setting G341 Approach and retraction in the plane DISR Approach and retraction with straight lines G147 G148 Distance of the cutter edge from the start or end point of the contour Approach and retraction along circles G247 G347 G248 G348 Radius of the tool center point path Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 117 DISCL Distance of the end point for the fast infeed motion from the machining plane safety clearance FAD Speed of the slow infeed motion The programmed value acts according to the active command of the G group 15 feed G94 G95 See the following illustration for approaching along a straight line using the example of
213. l function RET Subroutine end R1 SIN 17 35 R2 COS R3 R4 TAN R5 R10 ASIN 0 35 R10 20 487 degrees R20 ACOS R2 R20 Degrees The angle of the sum vector is R40 ATAN2 30 5 80 1 R40 calculated from 2 vectors 20 8455 degrees standing vertically one on another The 2nd vector specified is always used for O O L angle reference Result in the range 180 to 180 degrees R6 SQRT R7 SQRT POT ABS Used instead of M2 to RET separate block maintain the continuous path control mode Spindle speed 0 001 99 999 999 Unit of measurement of the Dus spindle speed rom Dwell time 0 001 99 999 999 Dwell time in spindle G4 S separate block in block with G4 revolutions T ATAN2 Tool number 1 32 000 The tool change can be only integer no sign performed either directly using the T command or only with M6 This can be set in the machine data Axis 0 001 99 Positional data X 999 999 Axis 0 001 99 Positional data h aie 999 999 Axis 0 001 99 Positional data Lies 999 999 The dimension can be N10 G91 X10 Z AC 20 X specified for the end or center incremental dimension ore S T X Y Z C A Absolute coordinate point of a certain axis Z absolute dimension irrespective of G91 Programming and Operating Manual Milling 64 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 N Value assignments 1 200 integer ACC ax s
214. l is activated it remains stored as an active tool even beyond the end of the program and after turning off turning on the control system If you change a tool manually input the change in the control system so that the control system knows the correct tool For example you can start a block with the new T word in MDA mode Programming Wess Tool number 1 32 000 TO no tool The control system can store a maximum of 64 tools Programming example Tool change without M6 N10 T1 Tool 1 N70 T588 Tool 588 Tool change with M6 N10 T14 Preselect tool 14 N15 M6 Perform tool change thereafter T14 is active 8 10 3 Tool compensation number D Functionality It is possible to assign 1 to 9 data fields with different tool offset blocks for multiple cutting edges to a specific tool If a special cutting tool is required it can be programmed with D and the corresponding number If no D word is written D1 takes effect automatically When DO is programmed offsets for the tool have no effect Programming D Tool offset number 1 9 DO No compensations active A maximum of 64 data fields D numbers for tool offset blocks can be stored in the control system simultaneously See the following illustration for examples for assigning tool compensation numbers too Each tool has separate compensation blocks max 9 Programming and Operating Manual Milling 94 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 Informa
215. l it is approximately over the center of the measuring surface of the tool probe You can use the following vertical softkey to choose whether to calibrate the tool length and diameter or to calibrate the tool length only Length diameter The calibrating tool traverses automatically at the measurement feedrate to the probe and gets a e Press this key to start the calibration process back again The position of the tool probe is determined and saved in an internal data area During the automatic measurement a dial gauge symbol displays which indicated that the measuring process is active A 3 Measuring the tool with a probe auto Overview Automatic tool measuring is used in the standard cycles about the machine data settings During the automatic measuring you can determine the tool dimensions in the directions X Y and Z with a probe The preconditions below should be met e The machine manufacturer must parameterize special measuring functions for tool probe measuring e You must enter the cutting edge position and the radius or diameter of the tool before the actual measurement e You must calibrate the probe first see Section Calibrating the tool probe Page 219 for more information Programming and Operating Manual Milling 220 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 Procedure Pl 1 M SS MACHINE WW 2 Wo JOG 7 Heas 3 tool Heasure 4 auto 5 6 A 8 Diameter 9 10 l k Select the d
216. lection The symbol 1 that appears in the window indicates a handwheel has been assigned to the specific axis Handwheel Ty vA Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 21 12 Select the required override increment The selected axis can now be moved with the handwheel The override increment is 0 001 mm The override increment is 0 010 mm The override increment is 0 100 mm 3 af p 3 2 4 Activating the spindle Operating sequence _ Select the desired operating area z z A 2 Switch to JOG mode 3 Open the T S M window T T S M 4 Enter the desired value for the spindle speed in the T S M window 5 Press this key to select the spindle direction T 5 H Tool change Di Spindle speed GAA r r Spindle direction W3 O Activate WO oO Other H function Press CYCLE START to activate above functions 267 Set Heas ie REL Sot T 5 H 6 Use this key or move the cursor to confirm your entries T Press this key on the MCP to activate the spindle Programming and Operating Manual Milling 22 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 3 2 5 Measuring the tool manually Overview Note For milling tools both length and the radius must be determined for drilling tools see the following figure only length must be determined You can determine the tool length and
217. levels control different access rights The control system delivered by SIEMENS is set by default to the lowest protection level 7 without password If the password is no longer known the control system must be reinitialized with the default machine drive data All passwords are then reset to default passwords for this software release Note Before you boot the control system with default machine drive data make sure that you have backed up your machine drive data otherwise all data are lost after rebooting with default machine drive data Protection level Locked by fo Siemenspassword Siemens reserved A Manufacturer password Machine manufacturers 2 Reseved o d O 3 6 End user password End users Default password CUSTOMER Protection level 1 Protection level 1 requires a manufacturer password With this password entry you can perform the following operations e Entering or changing part of the machine data and drive data e Conducting NC and drive commissioning Protection level 3 6 Protection level 3 6 requires an end user password With this password entry you can perform the following operations e Entering or changing part of the machine data and drive data e Editing programs e Setting offset values e Measuring tools Protection level 7 Protection level 7 is set automatically if no password is set and no protection level interface signal is set The protection level 7 can be set from the PLC user program by
218. lling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 151 Function The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed and feedrate to the entered final drilling depth When the final drilling depth is reached the programmed dwell time is active Sequence Position reached prior to cycle start The drilling position is the position in the two axes of the selected plane The cycle creates the following sequence of motions e Approach of the reference plane brought forward by the safety clearance by using GO e Traversing to final drilling depth with G1 and the feedrate programmed prior to the cycle call e Dwell time to final drilling depth e Retraction up to the reference plane brought forward by the safety clearance using G1 and the same feedrate value e Retraction to the retraction plane with GO Explanation of the parameters For the parameters RTP RFP SDIS DP DPR refer to Section Drilling centering CYCLE81 Page 126 o gt GO gt G1 B gt G4 RTP RFEP SDIS RFP gt lt ania DP RFP DPR e i NW Wd DTB dwell time The dwell time to the final drilling depth chip breakage is programmed under DTB in seconds Programming and Operating Manual Milling 152 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 Programming example Fifth drilling At X80 Y90 in the XY plane the drilling cycle CYCLE89 is called with a safety clearance of 5 mm and specification of the final drilling depth as an absolute value The drilling axis is the
219. lling depth for drill stroke calculations based on a degression factor If the calculated drilling stroke becomes shorter than the minimum drilling depth the remaining depth is machined in strokes equaling the length of the minimum drilling depth VRT variable retraction value for chip breakage with VARI 0 You can program the retraction path for chip breaking Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 133 DTD dwell time at final drilling depth The dwell time at final drilling depth can be entered in seconds or revolutions DIS1 programmable limit distance for VARI 1 The limit distance after re insertion in the hole can be programmed The limit distance is calculated within the cycle as follows e Up to a drilling depth of 30 mm the value is set to 0 6 mm e For larger drilling depths the limit distance is the result of RFP SDIS current depth 50 If this calculated value gt 7 a limit of 7 mm maximum is applied Programming example1 Deep hole drilling This program executes the cycle CYCLE83 at the positions X80 Y120 and X80 Y60 in the XY plane The first drill hole is drilled with a dwell time zero and machining type chip breaking The final drilling depth and the first drilling depth are entered as absolute values In the second cycle call a dwell time of 1 s is programmed Machining type chip removal is selected the final drilling depth is relative to the reference plane The drilling
220. llision can be avoided when the probe is traversing i Diameter 6 6686 mm Press this key on the MCP The tool traverses at the measurement feedrate to the probe and get back The tool diameter is calculated and entered in the tool list Note that if several axes move simultaneously no offset data can be calculated Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 221 A 4 Entering modifying work offsets Operating sequence In case of any problems found when testing the tool offset result you can proceed through the following steps to make tiny adjustment of values to 1 Select the desired operating area 2 Open the list of work offsets The list contains the values of the basic offset of the programmed work offset and the active scaling factors the mirror status display and the total of all active work offsets 3 Use the cursor keys to position the cursor bar in the input fields to be modified and enter the values x mn Y mm Z ma ox T sg J Z Fi GSaa 6 688 6 668 6 668 6 668 6 688 6 668 G54 6 688 4 488 4 688 4 688 6 668 6 668 GSS 4 668 4 668 6 668 6 668 6 688 6 688 GSG 4 668 4 668 6 668 6 668 6 688 6 668 GS 4 868 4 668 6 688 6 668 6 688 6 668 G58 4 668 4 668 6 688 6 688 6 688 6 668 GS 4 668 4 668 6 668 6 668 6 688 6 668 Program 6 668 6 668 6 668 6 668 6 668 6 668 Scale 1 686 1 666 1 666 Hirror A A H Total 6 668 6 668 6 668 6 688 6 668 6 668 pa 4 Confirm your entries The changes to the wor
221. lso to be understood as geometrical values this also applies to the feedrate F in mm min or inch min The default setting can be set via machine data All examples listed in this manual are based on a metric default setting G70 or G71 evaluates all geometric parameters that directly refer to the workpiece either as inches or metric units for example e Positional data X Y Z for GO G1 G2 G3 G33 CIP CT e Interpolation parameters J K also thread pitch e Circle radius CR e Programmable work offset TRANS ATRANS e Polar radius RP All remaining geometric parameters that are not direct workpiece parameters such as feedrates tool offsets and settable work offsets are not affected by G70 G71 G700 G710 however also affects the feedrate F inch min inch rev or mm min mm rev 8 2 5 Polar coordinates pole definition G110 G111 G112 Functionality In addition to the common specification in Cartesian coordinates X Y Z the points of a workpiece can be specified using the polar coordinates Polar coordinates are also helpful if a workpiece or a part of it is dimensioned from a central point pole with specification of the radius and the angle Plane The polar coordinates refer to the plane activated with G17 to G19 In addition the third axis standing vertically on this plane can be specified When doing so spatial specifications can be programmed as cylinder coordinates Polar radius RP The polar
222. m bottom to top In this case the retraction plane RTP will be behind the thread depth DP This machining is possible but the depth specifications must be programmed as absolute values and the retraction plane must be approached before calling the cycle or a position after the retraction plane must be approached Programming example thread from bottom to top A thread with a pitch of 3 mm is to start from 20 and to be milled to 0 The retraction plane is at 8 N10 G17 X100 Y100 S300 M3 T1 D1 F1000 N20 28 N30 CYCLE90 8 20 0 60 O 46 40 3 800 3 0 30 50 N40 M2 The hole must have a depth of at least 21 5 half pitch in excess Overshooting in the direction of the thread length For thread milling the travel in and travel out movements occur along all three axes concerned This means that the travel out movement includes a further step in the vertical axis beyond the programmed thread depth The overshoot is calculated as follows 2 WR RDIFF Az 5 4 DIATH Az Overshoot internal p Pitch WR Tool radius DIATH External diameter of the thread RDIFF Radius difference for travel out circle For internal threads RDIFF DIATH 2 WR for external threads RDIFF DIATH 2 WR Programming and Operating Manual Milling 208 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 Explanation of the parameters For an explanation of the parameters RTP RFP SDIS DP and DPR refer to Section Drilling centering CYCLE8
223. maining M functions are output to the PLC with the traversing movements If you would like to program an M function directly before or after an axis movement insert a separate block with this M function Note The M function interrupts the G64 continuous path mode and generates exact stop Programming example N10 51000 N20 X10 M3 Gl F100 M function in the block with axis movement spindle accelerates before the X axis movement N30 M78 M67 M10 M12 M37 Max 5 M functions in the block M30 Note In addition to the M and H functions T D and S functions can also be transferred to PLC Programmable Logic Controller In all a maximum of 10 such function outputs are possible in a block 8 12 H function Functionality With H functions floating point data REAL data type as with arithmetic parameters see Section Arithmetic parameter R Page 104 can be transferred from the program to the PLC The meaning of the values for a given H function is defined by the machine manufacturer Programming HO to H9O999 Max 3 H functions per block Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 103 Programming example N10 H1 1 987 H2 978 123 H3 4 23 H functions in block N20 GO X71 3 H99 8978 234 With axis movements in block N30 H5 Corresponds to H0 5 0 Note In addition to the M and H functions T D and S functions can also be transferred to the PLC Programmable Logic Controller In all
224. mer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described Since variance cannot be precluded entirely we cannot guarantee full consistency However the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions Siemens AG Industry Sector Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014
225. milling of a pocket These cycles are adapted to individual tasks by parameter assignment Drilling cycle drilling pattern cycles and milling cycles The following standard cycles can be carried out using the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED control system e Drilling cycles CYCLE81 Drilling centering CYCLE82 Drilling counterboring CYCLE83 Deep hole drilling CYCLE84 Rigid tapping CYCLE840 Tapping with compensating chuck CYCLE85 Reaming 1 CYCLE86 Boring CYCLE87 Drilling with stop 1 CYCLE88 Drilling with stop 2 CYCLE89 Reaming 2 Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 121 e Drilling pattern cycles HOLES1 Row of holes HOLES2 Circle of holes CYCLE802 Arbitrary positions e Milling cycles CYCLE71 Face milling CYCLE72 Contour milling CYCLE76 Milling the rectangular spigot CYCLE 77 Circular spigot milling LONGHOLE Elongated hole SLOT1 Groove milling pattern on a circle SLOT2 Circumferential groove milling pattern POCKET3 Rectangular pocket milling with any milling tool POCKET4 Circular pocket milling with any milling tool CYCLE90 Thread milling CYCLE832 High speed settings 9 2 Programming cycles Call and return conditions The G functions effective prior to the cycle call and the programmable offsets remain active beyond the cycle The machining level G17 G18 G19 must be defined before calling the cycle A cycle operates in the current plane with e First axis of the plane
226. ming example NTO ITF SAC TOTAL PARTS R15 GOTOF SIST Count reached GO X20 Y20 N80 SIST GO X30 Y30 N90 MSG Workpiece setpoint reached N100 MO Display The content of the active system variables is visible on the window opened through the following key operations t o Hett Time peed SD data counter Programming and Operating Manual Milling 116 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 Window display Times Counter Q Parts in total 8 Q Parts required a 3 Part count A 4 Run tine GHHAH HAM HAS Cycle time OHHAH HAM OAs 6 Cutting time OHHAH HOM OAs Setup tine 9019 ZZM Power on time GHHAH 48M AC_TOTAL_PARTS AC_CYCLE_TIME AC_REQUIRED_PARTS AC_CUTTING_TIME AC_ACTUAL_PARTS D AN_SETUP_TIME AC_SPECIAL_PARTS is not available for display AC_OPERATING_TIME AN_POWERON_TIME You can also select whether to activate the workpiece counter function through the following operating area gt gt M gt Time l i counter MACHINE AUTO 8 17 Smooth approach and retraction Functionality The function Smooth approach and retraction SPR is intended to approach the beginning of a contour tangentially smooth to a large degree independently of the position of the starting point The control system will calculate the intermediate points and generate the required traversing blocks This function is used preferably in conjunction with the too
227. mited degree The drill is retracted using G63 too but with the spindle rotating in the opposite direction M3 lt gt M4 G63 is non modal In the block after G63 the previous G command of the Interpolation type group GO G1 G2 is active again Right hand or left hand thread Right hand or left hand thread is set with the rotation direction of the spindle M3 right CW M4 left CCW see Section Spindle movements Page 87 Note The standard cycle CYCLE840 provides a complete tapping cycle with compensating chuck but with G33 and the relevant prerequisites See the following illustration for tapping using G63 Programming example metric thread 5 lead as per table 0 8 mm rev hole already premachined N10 G54 GO G90 X10 Y10 Z5 S600 M3 Approach starting point clockwise spindle rotation N20 G63 42 25 F480 Tapping end point 25 mm N40 G63 Z5 M4 Retraction counter clockwise spindle rotation N50 X30 Y30 220 M30 8 5 3 Thread interpolation G331 G332 Functionality This requires a position controlled spindle with a position measuring system By using G331 G332 the threads can be tapped without compensating chuck if the dynamic properties of the spindle and axis allow it If however a compensating chuck is used the path differences to be compensated by the compensating chuck are reduced This allows tapping at higher spindle speeds Drilling is done using G331 retraction is done
228. mode HO H9999 e g H7 23 456 See G2 G3 G33 G331 and G332 See G2 G3 G33 G331 and G332 See G2 G3 G33 G331 and G332 See CIP See CIP See CIP Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 Value assignments Subroutine name 7 decimals Instead of a free name it is L781 separate block and call integer only no sign also possible to select L1 L9999999 this also calls the subroutine UP in a separate block Please note L0001 is not always equal to L1 The name LL6 is reserved for the tool change subroutine Additional function e For example for initiating only integer no sign switching actions such as coolant ON maximum five M functions per block Programmed stop Optional stop End of main program with return to Can be found in the last block beginning of program of the processing sequence End of program as M2 Can be found in the last block of the processing sequence End of subroutine Can be found in the last block of the processing sequence CW rotation of spindle COW rotation of spindle es Spindle stop ee pe O re o Tool change Only if activated with M6 via the machine control panel otherwise change directly using the T command a SS The machining is stopped at the end of a block containing MO to continue press the following key As with MO but the stop is only performed if a sp
229. n displ Serv A Dp planr For more information about the softkey functions in this operating area refer to SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Diagnostics Manual Defines the maintenance planner Programming and Operating Manual Milling 48 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 T Data backup Backing up files by copying and pasting In the program management operating area program files or directories can be copied into another directory or onto a different drive by means of copying and pasting operations Operating sequence E 1 Select the desired operating area MANAGER 2 Enter the program directory z 3 Select the program file or directory to be backed up You can alternatively use the following softkey to search for the desired file or directory Search 4 Press this softkey to copy the data to the clipboard Copy 5 Select a desired directory or drive as the data target To back up the files onto an USB stick USB MEE To back up the files onto an external PC PG This requires a connected network R drive on the control system OEH To back up the files in the folder for storing the manufacturer files on the control F fijes system This folder is visible with the manufacturer password jse To back up the files in the folder for storing end user files on the control system files 6 Press this softkey to paste the copied data into the current directory Paste Backing up files via RS232 interface The program f
230. n depending on the tool radius unnecessary idle motions could result for the tool In this case the control system switches to transition circle for this block automatically if a certain set angle value 100 is reached Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 99 See the following illustration for acute contour angle and switching to transition circle Transition circle R tool radius 8 10 6 Tool radius compensation OFF G40 Functionality The compensation mode G41 G42 is deselected with G40 G40 is also the activation position at the beginning of the program The tool ends the block in front of G40 in the normal position compensation vector vertically to the tangent at the end point If G40 is active the reference point is the tool center point Subsequently when deselected the tool tip approaches the programmed point Always select the end point of the G40 block such that collision free traversing is guaranteed Programming G40 X Y Tool radius compensation OFF Note The compensation mode can only be deselected with linear interpolation GO G1 Program both axes of the plane e g with G17 X Y If you only specify one axis the second axis is automatically completed with the last programmed value See the following illustration for quitting the tool radius compensation Contour Straight line Contour Circle Tangent R tool radius P1 end point last blo
231. n addition four directions can be selected in a single selection field You select the direction of the transition element for the contour end in the end screen This selection is always proposed even if preceding elements were assigned no transition Contour chain Once you complete or cancel the programming of a contour element you can navigate around the contour chain left on the main screen using the cursor keys The current position in the chain is color highlighted The elements of the contour and pole if applicable are displayed in the sequence in which they were programmed You can select an existing contour element with the following key and reassign its parameters A new contour element is inserted after the cursor when you select one of the contour elements on the vertical softkey bar the input focus is then switched to the parameter input on the right of the graphic display Programming always continues after the element selected in the contour chain You can delete the selected element from the chain by selecting the following softkey Delete element Graphics window The graphics window displays the progress of the contour chain as you configure the parameters for the contour elements The element you have selected is displayed in black in the graphics window The contour is displayed to the extent it can be interpreted by the control on the basis of parameter inputs If the contour is still not displayed in the programmi
232. n personnel commissioning engineers and service and maintenance personnel Function Manual Mechanical and electrical designers technical professionals Parameter Manual Mechanical and electrical designers technical professionals PLC Subroutines Manual Mechanical and electrical designers technical professionals and commissioning engineers My Documentation Manager MDM Under the following link you will find information to individually compile your documentation based on the Siemens content ww siemens com mdm Standard scope This manual only describes the functionality of the standard version Extensions or changes made by the machine tool manufacturer are documented by the machine tool manufacturer Technical support Hotline Service and Support Global support hotline e Chinese Web site 49 0 911 895 7222 ttp www siemens com cn 808D e Support hotline in China e Global Web site 86 4008104288 china ttp support automation siemens com EC Declaration of Conformity Ne Declaration of Conformitv for the EMC Directive can be found on the Internet at http support automation siemens com Here enter the number 15257461 as the search term or contact your local Siemens office Programming and Operating Manual Milling 2 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 Table of contents FA Saas aoe ee a E ote A A OE E vcr nnn ovens eaters advan deen ee ered e eet 1 INU OCC OM otoconia tices ccna ceases cam ean ates cies
233. names of the selected basic plane Example The following drawing must be supplemented by the value of the center circle point in order to be able to calculate the point of intersection between the circle sector of the straight lines oa The missing center point coordinate is calculated using the calculator function as the radius at the v tangential transition is perpendicular to the straight line The radius is located at an angle of 90 clockwise to the straight line defined by the angle Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 237 Use this softkey to select the appropriate direction of rotation Eas Use this softkey to define the given end point Enter the coordinates of the pole the slope angle of the straight line the ordinate of the end point and the circle radius as the length Result X 19 499 Y 30 A 14 Free contour programming Functionality Free contour programming enables you to create simple and complex contours A contour editor FKE calculates any missing parameters for you as soon as they can be obtained from other parameters You can link together contour elements and transfer to the edited part program Contour editor FKE Proceed through the following steps to open the contour editor window EN 1 Select the desired operating area MANAGER 2 Enter the desired program folder A 3 Select a program file and press this key to open it in the program edi
234. ncurrently spindle speed 500 rpm clockwise N10 Gl Z 12 F100 Infeed on Z 12 feed 100 mm min N15 X20 Y18 Z 10 Tool travels on a straight line in space on P2 N20 GO 2100 Retraction in rapid traverse N25 220 Y80 N30 M2 End of program To machine a workpiece spindle speed S and direction M3 M4 are required see Section Spindle movements Page 87 Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 T1 8 4 Circular interpolation 8 4 1 Circular interpolation G2 G3 Functionality The tool moves from the starting point to the end point along a circular path The direction is determined by the G function G2 clockwise G3 counter clockwise The description of the desired circle can be given in various ways See the following illustration for possibilities of circle programming with G2 G3 using the example of the axes X Y and G2 G2 G3 and center point parameter end point G2 G3 and radius parameter end point End point X Y End point X Y i e g G2 X Y CR e g G2X Yueh Je I Circle radius CR Center point I J Starting point X Y Starting point X Y End point X Y e g G2 AR Angle AR Angle AR Starting point X Y Center point I J Starting point X Y G2 G3 remains active until canceled by another instruction from this G group GO G1 The path velocity is determined by the programmed F word Programming G2 G3 X Y 1 J
235. nd Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 89 See the following illustration for multiple block contours using the example of the G17 plane End point in N20 unknown N10 G1 X1 Y1 N20 ANG 30 N30 X3 Y3 ANG 60 N40 M30 X1 Y1 End point in N20 unknown insert rounding N10 G1 X1 Y1 N20 ANG 30 RND 0 1 N30 X3 Y3 ANG 60 analog Inserting a chamfer N10 G1 X1 Y1 N20 ANG 30 CHR 0 1 N30 X3 Y3 ANG 60 End point in N20 known Inserting a rounding N10 G1 X1 Y1 N20 X2 Y2 RND 0 5 N30 X3 Y3 analog Inserting a chamfer N10 G1 X1 Y1 N20 X2 Y2 CHR 0 2 N30 X3 Y3 End point in N20 unknown Inserting a rounding N10 G1 X1 Y1 N20 ANG 30 RND 0 3 N30 X3 Y3 ANG 60 RND 0 3 N40 X4 Y4 analog Inserting a chamfer N10 G1 X1 Y1 N20 X1 Y1 N20 ANG 30 CHR 0 3 N30 X3 Y3 ANG 60 CHR 0 3 N40 X2 Y4 N50 M30 8 9 2 Rounding chamfer Functionality You can insert the chamfer CHF or CHR or rounding RND elements into a contour corner If you wish to round several contour corners sequentially by the same method use Modal rounding RNDM You can program the feedrate for the chamfer rounding with FRC non modal or FRCM modal If FRC FRCM is not programmed the normal feedrate F is applied Programming CHF Insert chamfer value Length of chamfer CHRe Insert chamfer value Side length of the chamfer RND Insert rounding value Radius of chamfer Programming and Operating Manual Milling 90 6FC5398 4DP 1
236. nd continue to be displayed until the next message is displayed or the cycle is completed 9 6 2 Face milling CYCLE71 Programming CYCLE71 _RTP _RFP _SDIS DP PA PO LENG WID STA MID _MIDA _FDP _FALD FFP1 VARI _FDP1 Parameters Data type REAL Retraction plane absolute REAL Reference plane absolute SDIS REAL Safety clearance to be added to the reference plane enter without sign DP REAL Depth absolute REAL Starting point absolute first axis of the plane PO REAL Starting point absolute second axis of the plane The corner from which the dimension starts results from the sign The corner from which the dimension starts results from the sign Programming and Operating Manual Milling 162 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 Data type _STA REAL Angle between the longitudinal axis of the rectangle and the first axis of the plane abscissa enter without sign Range of values 0 lt STA lt 180 MD O REAL Maximum infeed depth enter without sign _MIDA REAL Maximum infeed width during solid machining in the plane as a value enter without a FDP REL O Retraction travel in the Retraction travel in the finishing direction incremental enter without sign direction incremental enter without sign _FALD REAL Finishing dimension in the depth incremental enter without sign _FFP1 REAL Feedrate for surface machining _VARI INT Machining type enter without sign UNITS DIGIT Values 1 ro
237. nd the circle radius in the following window CC abscissa SSS G2 A CC ordinate a nate A ae Radius R Dianeter progrannming 9 Press this softkey to calculate the abscissa and ordinate values of the point Accept The abscissa is the first axis and the ordinate is the second axis of the plane The abscissa value is displayed in the input field from which the calculator function has been called and the value of the ordinate is displayed in the next input field If the function is called from the part program editor the coordinates are saved with the axis names of the selected basic plane Example Example Calculating the point of intersection between the circle sector and the straight line in plane G17 Given Radius 10 Circle center point CC Y 20 X 20 Connection angle for straight lines 45 Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 235 CC abscissa G2 A CC ordinate a nate A ee Radius R Radius programming Result Y 27 071 X 12 928 The result appears on the input screen Calculating a point in a plane 1 Activate the calculator when you are in any input screen Hore 2 Open the lower level menu for contour elements selection 3 Select the desired calculation function 4 Enter the following coordinates or angles in the respective input fields e Coordinates of the given point PP e Slope angle of the straight line A1
238. ng Manual Milling Part 2 A 14 7 Programming example for milling Example 1 The following diagram shows a programming example for the Free contour programming function Starting point X 5 67 abs Y 0 abs machining plane G17 The contour is programmed in a counter clockwise direction X 137 257 abs Starting point X 5 67 Y 0 Operating sequence 1 Select the desired operating area PROGRAM MANAGER 2 Enter the desired program folder 3 Select a program with the cursor keys and press the following key to open the program in the program editor Programming and Operating Manual Milling 248 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 GS Cont Accept element Accept element Accept element Accept element Accept element aD Dialog select Accept element 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Press this softkey to open the contour editor Define a start point with the following parameters and press this softkey to confirm e Programming plane G17 e X 5 67 abs e Y 0 Press this softkey to select a contour element of straight horizontal line Enter the parameters for this element and press this softkey to confirm e X 93 285 abs Press this softkey to select a contour element of straight line in any direction Enter the parameters for this element and press this softkey to confirm e X 43 972 inc e q1 125 Press this softkey to sel
239. ng axis is the Z axis The final drilling depth is programmed as an absolute value no safety clearance is specified The dwell time at the final drilling depth is 2 sec The top edge of the workpiece is positioned at Z110 In the cycle the spindle is to rotate with M3 and to stop at 45 degrees N10 GO G17 G90 F200 S300 M3 Specification of technology values N20 T11 D1 2112 Approach retraction plane N30 X70 Y50 Approach drilling position N40 CYCLE86 112 110 77 0O 2 3 1 1 1 45 Cycle call with absolute drilling depth N50 M02 End of program Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 147 9 4 10 Boring with stop 1 CYCLE87 Programming CYCLE87 RTP RFP SDIS DP DPR SDIR Parameters r REAL Final drilling depth absolute DPR REAL Final drilling depth relative to the reference plane enter without sign SDIR Direction of rotation Values 3 for M3 4 for M4 Function The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed and feedrate to the entered final drilling depth During drilling 3 a spindle stop without orientation M5 is generated after reaching the final drilling depth followed by a programmed stop MO Pressing the following key continues the retraction movement at rapid traverse until the retraction plane is reached Sequence Position reached prior to cycle start The drilling position is the position in the two axes of the selected plane The cycle creates
240. ng graphic further values must be entered Check the contour elements you have already programmed if required You may have forgotten to enter all of the known data The coordinate system scaling is automatically adapted to changes in the complete contour Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 245 The position of the coordinate system is displayed in the graphics window An element was selected using the cursor keys Pressing the following softkey allows you to enlarge the image section of the selected element Follower elenent A 14 5 Specifying contour elements in polar coordinates Functionality The description about defining the coordinates of contour elements applies to the specification of positional data in the Cartesian coordinate system Alternatively you have the option to define positions using polar coordinates When programming contours you can define a pole at any time prior to using polar coordinates for the first time Programmed polar coordinates subsequently refer to this pole The pole is modal and can be re defined at any time It is always entered in absolute Cartesian coordinates The contour calculator converts values entered as polar coordinates into Cartesian coordinates Positions can be programmed in polar coordinates only after a pole has been specified The pole input does not generate a code for the NC program Pole The polar coordinates are valid in the level selected wit
241. ning label PIECE245 to the block containing label PIECE245E _LP1 LP2 length radius Use the parameter _LP1 to program the approach travel or approach radius distance from the tool external edge to the contour starting point and the parameter _LP2 to program the retraction travel or retraction radius distance from the tool external edge to the contour end point Parameters _LP1 and _LP2 must be set to gt 0 In the case of zero error 61116 Approach or retraction path 0 is output Note When using G40 the approach or retraction travel is the distance from the tool center point to the start or end point of the contour _VARI machining type Use the parameter _VARI to define the machining type If a different value is programmed for the parameter _VARI the cycle is aborted after output of alarm 61002 Machining type defined incorrectly RL bypassing the contour With the parameter _RL you program the traveling around the contour centrally to the right or to the left with G40 G41 or G42 _AS1 _AS2 approach direction path retraction direction path Use the parameter _AS1 to program the specification of the approach path and _AS2 to program that of the retraction path If AS2 is not programmed then the behavior of the retraction path is analogous to that of the approach path Smooth approach of the contour along a spatial path helix or straight line should only be programmed if the tool is not yet being used or i
242. nique 8 15 1 General information Application Basically there is no difference between a main program and a subroutine Frequently recurring machining sequences are stored in subroutines e g certain contour shapes These subroutines are called at the appropriate locations in the main program and then executed One form of a subroutine is the machining cycle The machining cycles contain generally valid machining cases e g drilling tapping groove cutting etc By assigning values via included transfer parameters you can adapt the subroutine to your specific application See the following illustration for example for using a subroutine for a workpiece four times Subroutine Programming and Operating Manual Milling 110 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 Set up The structure of a subroutine is identical to that of a main program see Section Program structure Page 50 Like main programs subroutines contain M2 end of program in the last block of the program sequence This means a return to the program level where the subroutine was called from End of program The end instruction RET can also be used instead of the M2 program end in the subroutine RET must be programmed in a separate block The RET instruction is used when G64 continuous path mode is not to be interrupted by a return With M2 G64 is interrupted and exact stop is initiated See the following illustration for example of sequence when calling a subroutine
243. not programmed the feedrate FFP1 or the speed programmed before the cycle call is active Depth infeed is defined with MIDF If a different value is programmed for the parameter VARI the cycle is aborted after output of alarm 61102 Machining type defined incorrectly FALD finishing allowance at slot edge When roughing a separate finishing allowance is taken into account at the base DP1 Use the parameter DP1 to define the infeed depth when inserting to the helical path STA2 insertion angle Use the STA2 parameter to define the radius of the helical path relative to the tool center point path or the maximum insertion angle for the reciprocating motion e Vertical insertion The vertical depth infeed always takes place at the same position in the machining plane as long as the slot is reached by the end depth e Insertion oscillation on center axis of slot It means that the milling center point on a straight line oscillating back and forth is inserted at an angle until it has reached the nearest current depth The maximum insertion angle is programmed under STA2 and the length of the oscillation path is calculated from LENG WID The oscillating depth infeed ends at the same point as with vertical depth infeed motions the starting point in the plane is calculated accordingly The roughing operation begins in the plane once the current depth is reached The feedrate is programmed under FFD Note A tool compensation must be prog
244. nues search for the next term that matches the search criteria search Exits the help system Softkeys in Window Et Zooms in the current view Zooms out the current view 4o00n enn Zooms the current view to page width width Jumps to the desired page e Searches for a term in the current topic Tan E aE Continues search for the next term that matches the search criteria search Exits the help system Keys for handling Window Expands hierarchical topics Collapses hierarchical topics Navigates upwards through the hierarchical topics a Navigates downwards through the hierarchical topics Opens the selected topic in the current topic relevant window Functions the same as pressing the following key Searches for a term in the current topic Continue Continues search for the next term that matches the search criteria search Exits the help system Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 231 A 10 Operation wizard The operation wizard provides step by step guides on basic commissioning and operation procedures Operating sequence Z 1 Press this key on the PPU to call the operation wizard FUNCTION U Jog Operation assistant Guide the user through the first steps of the machine operation Assistant Create a new tool and measure the tool Measure the workpiece Create a part progran Sinulate the progran
245. of values for EX 300 to 300 Example RO 0 1EX 5 Meaning RO 0 000 001 R1 1 874EX8 Meaning R1 187 400 000 Note There can be several assignments in one block incl assignments of arithmetic expressions Assignments to other addresses The flexibility of an NC program lies in assigning these arithmetic parameters or expressions with arithmetic parameters to other NC addresses Values arithmetic expressions and arithmetic parameters can be assigned to all addresses Exception addresses N G and L Programming and Operating Manual Milling 104 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 When assigning write the sign after the address character It is also possible to have an assignment with a minus sign A separate block is required for assignments to axis addresses traversing instructions Example N10 GO X R2 Assignment to X axis Arithmetic operations arithmetic functions When operators arithmetic functions are used it is imperative to use the conventional mathematical notation Machining priorities are set using the round brackets Otherwise multiplication and division take precedence over addition and subtraction Degrees are used for the trigonometric functions Permitted arithmetic functions see Section List of instructions Page 258 Programming example Calculating with R parameters N10 R1 R1 1 The new R1 is calculated from the old R1 plus 1 N20 R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R9 R10 R11 R12 N30 R13 SIN 25 3
246. ogram A 18 List of instructions The functions marked with an asterisk are active at the start of the program in the CNC milling variant unless otherwise they are programmed or the machine manufacturer has preserved the default settings for the milling technology Value assignments Tool offset number 0 9 only integer Contains compensation data no sign for a particular tool T DO gt compensation values 0 max 9 D numbers for one tool F Feedrate 0 001 99 999 999 Path velocity of a tool workpiece unit mm min or mm revolution depending on G94 or G95 Programming and Operating Manual Milling 258 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 Value assignments Ss Dwell time in block 0 001 99 999 999 Dwell time in seconds G4 F separate block with G4 G function Only integer The G functions are divided preparatory specified values into G groups Only one G or a EE name e g function function from one group can CIP be written in one block A G function can either be modal until canceled by another function from the same group or non modal only effective for the block it is written in Linear interpolation at rapid traverse rate 1 Motion commands type of GO X Y Z Cartesian in interpolation modally polar coordinates effective G0 AP RP or with additional axis GO AP RP Z e g with G17 axis Z Linear interpolation at feedrate G1 X Y Z Fo
247. ogram and you desire to create a subprogram e Enter the file extension MPF if the current default program type is SPF subprogram and you desire to create a main program e Do not enter the file extension if you desire to take the current default program type e Avoid using special characters for program names Example WORKPIECE527 8 1 2 Program structure Structure and content The NC program consists of a sequence of blocks see the table below Each block represents a machining step Instructions are written in the blocks in the form of words The last block in the execution sequence contains a special word for the end of the program for example M2 The following table shows you an example of the NC program structure Block Word Word Word f iComment S Block n10 feo x20 First block Block N20 G2 fz 7 Second block Block fnso got Block N40 fe o e ee o O Block nso m2 End of program Programming and Operating Manual Milling 50 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 8 2 Positional data 8 2 1 Programming dimensions In this section you will find descriptions of the commands with which you can directly program dimensions taken from a drawing This has the advantage that no extensive calculations have to be made for NC programming Note The commands described in this section stand in most cases at the start of a NC program The way in which these functions are combined is not intended to be a pa
248. ograms subroutines etc Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 105 Programming data types DEF BOOL varname Boolean type values TRUE 1 FALSE 0 DEF CHAR varname2 Char type 1 ASCII code character a b Numerical code value 0 255 DEF INT varname3 Integer type integer values 32 bit value range 2 147 483 648 through 2 147 483 647 decimal DEF REAL varname4 Real type natural number like arithmetic parameter R Value range 0 000 0001 9999 9999 8 decimal places arithmetic sign and decimal point or Exponential notation 10 to power of 300 10 to power of 300 DEF STRING string length varname41 STRING type string length Maximum number of characters Each data type requires its own program line However several variables of the same type can be defined in one line Example DEF INT PVAR1 PVAR2 PVAR3 12 PVAR4 4 type INT variables Example for STRING type with assignment DEF STRING 12 PVAR Hello Define variable PVAR with a maximum of 12 characters and assign string Hello Fields In addition to the individual variables one or two dimensional fields of variables of these data types can also be defined DEF INT PVAR5 n One dimensional field type INT n integer DEF INT PVAR6 n m Two dimensional field type INT n m integer Example DEF INT PVAR7 3 Field with 3 elements of the type INT Within t
249. oints are reached this is provided by a G group GO G1 G2 and G3 For more information refer to Sections Linear interpolation Page 69 and Circular interpolation Page 72 Programming G90 Absolute dimension data G91 Incremental dimension data X AC Absolute dimensioning for a certain axis here X axis non modal X IC Incremental dimensioning for a certain axis here X axis non modal Programming and Operating Manual Milling 52 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 See the following illustration for different dimensioning types in the drawing Absolute dimensions Incremental dimension Absolute dimensioning G90 With absolute dimensioning the dimensioning data refers to the zero of the coordinate system currently active workpiece or current workpiece coordinate system or machine coordinate system This is dependent on which offsets are currently active programmable settable or no offsets Upon program start G90 is active for all axes and remains active until it is deselected in a subsequent block by G91 incremental dimensioning data modally active Incremental dimensioning G91 With incremental dimensioning the numerical value of the path information corresponds to the axis path to be traversed The leading sign indicates the traversing direction G91 applies to all axes and can be deselected in a subsequent block via G90 absolute dimensioning Specification with AC IC Af
250. ole screen Sh Selects whether to show the blocks Ow blocks or not Zooms out the whole screen Returns to the program editor window 5 2 Program control Operating sequence 1 Select the desired operating area M MACHINE 2 Switch to AUTO mode gt witch to mode AUTO pas 3 Press this softkey to open the lower level menu for program control NC cont 4 Press the corresponding vertical softkey to activate or deactivate the desired program control option see table below for detailed softkey functions The softkeys selected are highlighted in blue Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 39 Softkey functions Disables the output of setpoints to axes and spindles The setpoint display simulates the traverse fil movements It functions the same as pressing the following key PROGRAM TEST After activating this option the icon PRT appears immediately in the program status bar and this softkey is highlighted in blue For more information of the program test refer to Section Program test Dr All traversing motions are performed with the feedrate setpoint specified via the Dry run feed setting Y rUn feedrate data Instead of the programmed motion commands the dry run feed rate is effective After activating this option the icon DRY appears immediately in the program status bar and this softkey is highlighted in blue pam Stops processing of the program a
251. on G41 G42 Programming OFFNe distance in mm Note Set OFFN 0 once the groove has been completed OFFN is also used outside of TRACYL for offset programming in combination with G41 G42 Programming and Operating Manual Milling 64 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 Example Tool definition The following example is suitable for testing the parameterization of the TRACYL cylinder transformation Program code Comment Tool parameters Meaning Number DP oC DELL LH 220 Tool type Milling tool Plc DP2 l1 1 0 Cutting edge position Only for turning tools Program code Comment Geometry Length compensation el DPS ll 16 Length offset vector Calculation acc to type and plane STO DP4 1 1 59 STO DPS 1 L T Program code Comment Geometry Radius PTO DPS 17I 56 Tool radius PTO DP7 1 1 0 Slot width b for slotting saw rounding radius for milling tools oTC DPS 1 11 0 Projection k For slotting saw only PC DPO 1 1 0 TC DPLO L 1LJ 0 STC DPI11L 1 1 0 Angle for taper milling tools Program code Comment Wear Length and radius compensation STC DP12 1 1 0 Remaining parameters to STC DP24 0 Tool base dimension adapter Example Making a hook shaped groove Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 65 Activate cylinder surface transformation Required tool T1 milling tool radius 3 mm edge position 8 Program code Comment N10 T1 D1 G5
252. ord is determined by G functions e G94 F as the feedrate in mm min e G95 Feedrate F in mm spindle revolutions only meaningful when the spindle is running Note This unit of measure applies to metric dimensions According to Section Metric and inch dimensioning settings with inch dimensioning are also possible Programming example N10 G94 F310 Feedrate in mm min N110 S200 M3 Spindle rotation N120 G95 F15 5 Feedrate in mm revolution Note Write a new F word if you change G94 G95 8 3 3 Linear interpolation with feedrate G1 Functionality The tool moves from the starting point to the end point along a straight path The path velocity is determined by the programmed F word All axes can be traversed simultaneously G1 remains active until canceled by another instruction from this G group G0 G2 G3 Programming and Operating Manual Milling 70 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 Programming G1 X Y Z F Cartesian coordinates G1 AP RP F gt Polar coordinates G1 AP RP Z F cylindrical coordinates 3dimensional Note Another option for linear programming is available with the angle specification ANG See Section Contour definition programming Page 88 See the illustration for linear interpolation in three axes using the example of a slot Programming example NO5 GO G90 X40 Y48 Z2 S500 M3 The tool traverses in rapid traverse on P1 three axes co
253. ot necessarily be machined completely The message Caution final machining allowance 2 tool diameter appears the cycle however is continued _FALD finishing allowance at the base When roughing a separate finishing allowance is taken into account at the base _FFD and _FFP1 feedrate for depth and surface The feedrate _FFD is effective when inserting into the material The feedrate _FFP1 is active for all movements in the plane traversed at feedrate when machining _CDIR milling direction Use this parameter to specify the machining direction for the pocket Using the parameter _CDIR the milling direction can be programmed directly with 2 for G2 and 3 for G3 or alternatively with synchronous milling or conventional milling Synchronized operation or reverse rotation are determined internally in the cycle via the direction of rotation of the spindle activated prior to calling the cycle Down cut milling Up cut milling M3 gt G3 M3 gt G2 M4 gt G2 M4 gt G3 _VARI machining type Use the parameter VARI to define the machining type Possible values are Units digit e 1 roughing e 2 finishing Tens digit infeed e O0 vertically to pocket center with GO e 1 vertically to pocket center with G1 e 2 along a helical path e 3 oscillating to pocket length axis If a different value is programmed for the parameter _VARI the cycle is aborted after output of alarm 61002 Machining type defined incorrectl
254. ovements the M commands become active before the axis movements Default setting The axis movements only start once the spindle has accelerated to speed M3 M4 M5 is also issued before the axis movement However there is no waiting for spindle standstill The axis movements begin before spindle standstill The spindle is stopped at program end or with RESET At program start spindle speed zero S0 is in effect Note Other settings can be configured via machine data Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 87 Programming example N10 Gl X70 220 F300 S270 M3 Before the axis traversing X Z the spindle accelerates to 270 rpm clockwise N80 S450 Speed change N170 GO 2180 M5 Z movement spindle comes to a stop 8 8 3 Spindle positioning SPOS Functionality Requirement The spindle must be technically designed for position control With the function SPOS you can position the spindle in a specific angular position The spindle is held in the position through position control The speed of the positioning procedure is defined in machine data With SPOS value from the M3 M4 movement the respective direction of rotation is maintained until the end of the positioning When positioning from standstill the position is approached via the shortest path The direction results from the respective start and end position Exception First movement of the spindle i e if the measuring system is not
255. peat the above operations for other tools and make sure you measure all the tools before machining which also eases the tool changing process 3 2 6 Setting up the workpiece Overview You have selected the relevant offset panel for example G54 and the axis you want to determine for the offset Figure 3 2 Determining the work offset milling Before measuring you can start the spindle by following the steps in Section Activating the spindle Page 22 Operating sequences Workpiece edge measurement M 1 Select the desired operating area I MACHINE 2 Switch to JOG mode WW UL JOG OF Heas 3 Open the lower level menu for workpiece measurement work 0 4 Press this vertical softkey to open the window for measurement at the workpiece edge 5 Press the X softkey to measure in the X direction Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 25 6 Traverse the tool which has been measured previously to approach the workpiece in the X lt gq direction X E T Switch to handwheel control mode HAND WHEEL 8 Select a suitable override feedrate and then use the handwheel to move the tool to scratch 1 l the required workpiece edge 10 a 9 Select the offset plane to save in and the measuring direction for example G54 and 10 Enter the distance for example 0 Press this key or move the cursor to confirm your input Workpiece measurement edge
256. possible depth infeed Sequence of motions when finishing VARI 2 Depending on the set parameters FAL and FALD finishing is either carried out at the surface contour or at the base or both together The approach strategy corresponds to the motions in the plane as with roughing Explanation of the parameters For an explanation of the parameters RTP RFP SDIS DP and DPR refer to Section Drilling centering CYCLE81 Page 126 For an explanation of the parameters MID FAL FALD FFP1 and FFD refer to Section Milling a rectangular pocket POCKET3 Page 197 LENG WID and CRAD spigot length spigot width and corner radius Use the parameters LENG WID and CRAD to define the form of a slot in the plane The spigot is always dimensioned from the center The length LENG always refers to the abscissa with a plane angle of 0 degrees Spigot dimensioned from center point Y PA PO reference point Use the parameters PA and PO to define the reference point of the spigot along the abscissa and the ordinate This is the spigot center point STA angle STA specifies the angle between the first axis of the plane abscissa and the longitudinal axis of the spigot CDIR milling direction Use this parameter to specify the machining direction for the spigot Using the CDIR parameter the milling direction can be programmed directly with 2 for G2 and 3 for G3 or alternatively with synchronous milling or conventional
257. pped interrupted in the last machining operation you can press the following softkey to load the interruption point as required Interr point 5 Press one of the following softkeys to set the condition for the block search After the block search the program will continue from the line before the interruption point The same calculations of the basic conditions for example tool and cutting edge numbers M functions feedrate and spindle speed are carried out as during normal program operation but the axes do not move To contour To After the block search the program will continue from the line with the end point interruption point The same calculations of the basic conditions are carried out Oe as during normal program operation but the axes do not move Block search without calculation of the basic conditions Without calculat 6 Make sure the feedrate override is 0 Check that correct tool is in spindle before continuing 7 Press this key on the MCP and then an alarm 010208 appears for your confirmation whether to continue M fing Ke channel 1 continue program with NC start 13 47 Auto N MPF 1 MPF SIEMENS amp Stop function 8 Press this key again to execute the program 9 Turn the feedrate override switch on the MCP slowly to the desired value Programming and Operating Manual Milling 46 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 6 Saving system data Saving data This function saves the NC
258. proach point P4 programmed N40 Gl X40 Continue in the contour N50 Y12 N60 G41 G1 X15 Y15 N70 X4 Y4 P4 contour end point N80 G40 G248 DISR 20 F700 X8 Y8 Retraction point PO programmed N90 M30 See the following illustration for approaching along a semi circle using the example of G42 or retraction using G41 and completion with G40 R tool radius Contour Approach G247 IE PO starting point J wae gp P3 intermediate point P4 WAB end point tangential entry in the contour l Q l Retraction using G248 P3 Retract P4 Contour end point tangential exit from the contour P3 intermediate point PO end point SAR Q P3 P4 equidistant points on the center point path C a Approach Note Make sure that a positive radius is entered for the tool radius Otherwise the directions for G41 G42 will be changed Controlling the infeed motion using DISCL and G340 G341 DISCL specifies the distance of point P2 from the machining plane see following figure In the case DISCL 0 the following will apply e With G340 The whole approach motion consists only of two blocks P1 P2 and P3 are identical The approach contour is generated from P3 to P4 e With G341 The whole approach motion consists only of three blocks P2 and P3 are identical If PO and P4 are located in the same plane only two blocks will result there will be no infeed motion from P1 to P3 It is monitored
259. pth Subroutines can also be called from a subroutine not only from a main program In total up to 8 program levels are available for this type of nested call including the main program level See the following illustration for execution with 8 program levels 1st level 2nd level 3rd level _ 8th level Main program Subroutine Subroutine Subroutine Information Modal G functions can be changed in the subroutine e g G90 gt G91 When returning to the calling program ensure that all modal functions are set the way you need them to be Please make sure that the values of your arithmetic parameters used in upper program levels are not inadvertently changed in lower program levels When working with SIEMENS cycles up to 4 program levels are needed 8 15 2 Calling machining cycles Functionality Cycles are technology subroutines realizing a certain machining process generally for example drilling or milling Adaptation to the particular problem is performed directly via supply parameters values when calling the respective cycle Programming example N10 DEF REAL RTP RFP SDIS DP DTB N20 G18 X100 Z100 GO N30 M3 S100 F100 N40 G17 X0 N50 CYCLE83 110 90 0 80 0 10 0 0 0 O 1 O Call of cycle 83 transfer values directly separate block N60 GO X100 z100 N70 RTP 100 RFP 95 5 SDIS 1 DP 5 DTB 3 Set transfer parameters for cycle 82 N80 CYCLE82 RTP RFP SDIS DP DTB Call of cycle 82 separat
260. r Pressing the softkey again exits the help mode A 14 1 Programming a contour Operating sequence 1 Select the desired operating area PROGRAM MANAGER 2 Select this softkey z5 5 z 3 Select a program with the cursor keys 4 Press this key to open the program 5 Press this softkey to open the contour editor 16 06 22 ila 2012 12 17 be L Cont Start point Alter Selected plane era Start point Xx 6 606 abs Y 0 000 abs Pole Approach start pt GO O Free text input Cancel XV G17 ZX G18 YZ G19 sion ESS ES Esa a CS You will find a guide to defining the start point in Section Defining a start point Page 240 Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 239 Recompile pez When the program edited in the contour editor is opened in the program editor if you position the Ed comp editor cursor in a command line of the contour program and then press this softkey the main screen of the contour editor opens and you can recompile the existing contour Note When recompiling only the contour elements that were generated in the contour editor are created again Any changes you made directly in the program text are lost however you can subsequently insert and edit user deinfed texts which will not be lost A 14 2 Defining a start point When entering a contour begin at a position which you already know and enter it as the starting point
261. r each surface milling pass in the plane the tool will retract The retraction travel is programmed under the parameter _FDP Machining in one direction stops at the final machining allowance safety distance and the next starting point is approached in rapid traverse When roughing in one direction the tool will retract by the calculated infeed depth safety clearance The depth infeed is performed at the same point as in roughing After finishing has been completed the tool retracts from the last position reached to the retraction plane _RTP See the following illustration for milling movement Milling movement when finishing in alternate direction machining type 42 Programming and Operating Manual Milling 164 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 Explanation of the parameters For an explanation of the parameters _RTP RFP and _SDIS refer to Section Drilling centering CYCLE8 Milling a rectangular pocket POCKET3 For an explanation of the parameters _STA MID and _FFP1 refer to Section Page 197 Roughing with MIDA larger than milling radius machining type 41 _DP depth The depth can be specified as an absolute value _DP to the reference plane _PA _PO starting point Use the parameters _PA and _PO to define the starting point of the area in the axes of the plane _LENG _WID length Use the parameters _LENG and _WID to define the length and width of a rectangle in the plane The pos
262. rOGraMMiINg cccssccccceeecccseececceuecccseusecceueceecaueeecseueeecsaeessaueeesseueeessecessagesesseneeessags FUMING GVM Ss ager ae Seeacact EE E O EE R ES R SE ERSS TOOLI OOO i gt eee N General Information annannannannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnrnnrnn rnn rnn rannan ranra nran EARP A REAREA REER EAR EARDER PAREA nran nennen ann Tool compensation number D cece cece eeccececeeceeececeeeeceuecaecsneceeeceeeeuecsuaceeeeneceeeteeseetseeteeegecseeseeeneeeeesaes Selecting the tool radius compensation G41 G42 cccccceececeeeeeeeeeeeececeecesseeeeseeeeseeeeseeeesseeesseeees Comer bDenavior 400 G4 I tate tects ace teases EA eE EAE S EER 99 Tool radius compensation OFF G40 cc eccccccccceecccceececeeeeeeeceeaeececeeeeseueeeseeeeseeeeseeeessusesseeeeseeesaeeessnees Special cases of the tool radius COMPENSATION ccccceecccseececeececeeeecaeeeeseeceeuceseeesaueetsueeeseeeesseeessnees Example of tool radius compensation ccceccceecccceececeeceeaeeeeaeececeeceeseeeeseeeeseeeesseeesseeeeseeeeseeeesseeetsneeees Miscellaneous FUNCTION MM cccccececccccccccccccccceceneneneneneneaeneaenenenenenenenenenenenenenenenenenenenenenenenenenenenenenenenenes H FUNCTION cccccccccccccccccccccucceceneueceneaeneneneneneneneneaeneneneneneneneneneneneneneneneueneneneneneneneneneneneneneneneneneneneneneneneaes Arithmetic parameters LUD and PLC variables cccccccceccceeeee
263. radius RP 0 00001 Specified in degrees one 359 99999 when using G2 G3 Special form of the cycle call no parameter transfer the name of the cycle is stored in a variable only intended for cycle internal USE 0 001 99 999 999 Inserts a chamfer of the specified chamfer length between two contour blocks Inserts a chamfer of the specified side length between two contour blocks One possibility of defining a circle when using G2 G3 0 001 99 999 999 0 010 99 999 999 Negative sign for selecting the circle greater than semicircle Effective Modal possibility of defining the circle N10 ACC X 80 for the X axis 80 N20 ACC S 50 for the spindle 50 N10 A ACP 45 3 approach absolute position of the A axis in the positive direction N20 SPOS ACP 33 1 position spindle N10 A ACN 45 3 approach absolute position of the A axis in the negative direction N20 SPOS ACN 33 1 position spindle N10 G1 G17 X Y N11 X ANG or contour over several blocks N10 G1 G17 X Y N11 ANG N12 X Y ANG See GO G1 G2 G3 G110 G111 G112 See G2 G3 N10 CALL VARNAME variable name See G2 G3 COMPCAD separate block COMPCURYV separate block Effective Modal COMPOPF separate block Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 265 Value assignments COMPON Compressor ON LF Effective Modal COMPON sepa
264. radius specifies the distance of the point to the pole It is stored and must only be written in blocks in which it changes after changing the pole or when switching the plane Polar angle AP The angle is always referred to the horizontal axis abscissa of the plane for example with G17 X axis Positive or negative angle specifications are possible The polar angle remains stored and must only be written in blocks in which it changes after changing the pole or when switching the plane Programming and Operating Manual Milling 54 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 See the following illustration for polar radius and polar angle with definition of the positive direction in different planes Point defined by RP AP Point defined by RP AP Example G17 X Y plane Example G18 Z X plane Pole definition programming G110 Pole specification relative to the setpoint position last programmed in the plane e g with G17 X Y G111 Pole specification relative to the origin of the current workpiece coordinate system in the plane e g with G17 X Y G112 Pole specification relative to the last valid pole preserve plane Note Pole specifications e Pole definitions can also be performed using polar coordinates This makes sense if a pole already exists e lf no pole is defined the origin of the current workpiece coordinate system will act as the pole Programming example N10 G17 X Y plane N20 GO X0 YO N30 G111 X20 Y10
265. rammed before the cycle is called Otherwise the cycle is aborted and alarm 61000 No tool compensation active is output If incorrect values are assigned to the parameters that determine the arrangement and size of the slots and thus cause mutual contour violation of the slots the cycle is not started The cycle is aborted and the error message 61104 Contour violation of slots elongated holes is output During the cycle the workpiece coordinate system is offset and rotated The values in the workpiece coordinate system displayed on the actual value display are such that the longitudinal axis of the slot that has just been machined corresponds to the first axis of the current machining plane After the cycle has been completed the workpiece coordinate system is in the same position again as it was before the cycle was called Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 191 Contour violation Programming example Grooves Four slots are milled The slots have the following dimensions Length 30 mm width 15 mm and depth 23 mm The safety clearance is 1 mm the final machining allowance is 0 5 mm the milling direction is G2 the maximum infeed in the depth is 6 mm The slot is to be machined completely Infeed during finishing is to be performed directly to the pocket depth and the same feedrate and speed are to be used See the following programming example for grooves N10 G17 G90 T1 D1 S600 M3
266. rate block Machining cycle Only specified Call of machining cycles values requires a separate block the provided transfer parameters must be assigned values special cycle calls are possible with additional MCALL or CALL CYCLE81 Drilling centering N5 RTP 110 RFP 100 Assign with values N10 CYCLE81 RTP RFP separate block N5 RTP 110 RFP 100 Assign with values N10 CYCLE82 RTP RFP separate block N10 CYCLE83 110 100 or transfer values directly separate block N10 CYCLE84 separate block N10 CYCLE840 separate block N10 CYCLE85 separate block N10 CYCLE86 separate block N10 CYCLE8 7 separate block N10 CYCLE88 separate block N10 CYCLE89Q separate block N10 CYCLE802 separate block N10 HOLES1 separate block N10 HOLES2 separate block N10 SLOT1 separate block N10 SLOT2 separate block N10 POCKET3 separate block N10 POCKETA separate block N10 CYCLE71 separate block N10 CYCLE72 separate block N10 CYCLE 76 separate block N10 CYCLE 77 separate block CYCLE82 Drilling counterboring CYCLE83 Deep hole drilling Programming and Operating Manual Milling 66 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 NO Absolute coordinate approach position directly for rotary axis spindle Definition instruction Approach retraction distance of infeed motion
267. rate override switch under the GOO function 6 Press this key on the MCP PA Increase the feedrate override gradually to avoid accidents caused by an axis moving too fast and observe whether the axis moves to the set position Further softkey functions in MDA mode G This window displays important G functions whereby each G function is assigned to a group and has a Function fixed position in the window To close the window press this softkey once again To display additional G functions use the following keys 7 PAGE PAGE UP DOWN Auxili This window displays the auxiliary and M functions currently active To close the window press this uxiliary function softkey once again Save This softkey opens the file saving window where you can specify a name and a storage medium for the Pile program displayed in the MDA window To save your program either enter a new program name in the input field or select an existing program for overwriting Note If you do not save with this softkey the program edited in MDA mode is actually a temporary file Delete Pressing this softkey deletes all the blocks displayed in the MDA window file E This softkey opens a window where you can select an existing program file from a system directory to oad El file load into the MDA buffer For the explanation of other softkeys in this mode refer to Section Other settings in JOG mode Page 226 Programming and Operating Manual
268. rcles with radius specification Circle larger than semi circle MP1 center point of circle 1 MP2 center point of circle 2 End point ircle smaller than or equal to semi circle Starting point Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 73 Programming example Definition of center point and end point End point N5 G90 X30 Y40 Starting point circle for N10 N10 G2 X50 Y40 I10 J 7 End point and center point Note Center point values refer to the circle starting point Programming example End point and radius specification Starting point End point N5 G90 X30 Y40 Starting point circle for N10 N10 G2 X50 Y40 CR 12 207 End point and radius Note With a negative leading sign for the value with CR a circular segment larger than a semi circle is selected Programming and Operating Manual Milling 14 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 Programming example Definition of end point and aperture angle Starting point End point N5 G90 X30 Y40 Starting point circle for N10 N10 G2 X50 Y40 AR 105 End point and aperture angle Programming example Definition of center point and aperture angle End point Center ppint N5 G90 X30 x40 Starting point circle for N10 N10 G2 I10 J 7 AR 105 Center point and aperture angle Note Center point values refer to the circle starting point Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 19
269. rd control ON modally effective EXTCALL Execute external subprogram G340 Approach and retraction in space SAR 44 Path segmentation with G341 Approach and retraction in the plane SAR SAR modally effective G290 SIEMENS mode G291 External mode modally effective Interpolation parameters Interpolation parameters Interpolation parameters Intermediate point for circular interpolation Intermediate point for circular interpolation Intermediate point for circular interpolation 262 0 0000001 9999 9999 8 decimal places or with specification of an exponent 10 909 10 300 0 001 99 999 999 Thread 0 001 2000 000 0 001 99 999 999 Thread 0 001 2000 000 0 001 99 999 999 Thread 0 001 2000 000 0 001 99 999 999 Value transfer to the PLC meaning defined by the machine manufacturer Belongs to the X axis meaning dependent on G2 G3 gt circle center or G33 G331 G332 gt thread pitch Belongs to the Y axis otherwise as with Belongs to the Z axis otherwise as with Belongs to the X axis specification for circular interpolation with CIP Belongs to the Y axis specification for circular interpolation with CIP Belongs to the Z axis specification for circular interpolation with CIP 0 001 99 999 999 47 External NC languages Reload program from HMI in Execution from external source
270. reates the following sequence of motions e G0 is used to approach the position specified in the diagram below at cycle start e The steps when machining a circumferential slot are the same as when machining an elongated hole e After a circumferential slot is machined completely the tool is retracted to the retraction plane and the next slot is machined with GO e After the last slot has been machined the tool is moved with GO to the end position in the machining plane which is specified in the diagram below and the cycle is ended Explanation of the parameters For an explanation of the parameters RTP RFP and SDIS refer to Section Drilling centering CYCLE81 Page 126 For an explanation of the parameters DP DPR FFD FFP1 MID CDIR FAL VARI MIDF FFP2 and SSF refer to Section Slots on a circle SLOT Page 187 CPA Vg NUM number Use the parameter NUM to specify the number of slots Programming and Operating Manual Milling 194 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 AFSL and WID angle and circumferential slot width Use the parameters AFSL and WID to define the form of a slot in the plane The cycle checks whether the slot width is violated with the active tool Otherwise alarm 61105 Cutter radius too large will be activated and the cycle aborted CPA CPO and RAD center point and radius You define the position of the circle in the machining plane by the center point CPA CPO and the radiu
271. rection of rotation counter clockwise e R 3 2 e 11 5 abs e J Qabs Press this softkey to confirm Press this softkey to select a contour element of circular arc Enter the parameters for this element and press this softkey to select the desired contour characteristics e Direction of rotation clockwise e R 2 e J 4 65 abs Press this softkey to confirm Press this softkey to select a contour element of straight line in any direction Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 Tangent trans Accept element s Dialog select Accept element E Accept element to Accept element 21 22 23 24 29 26 27 28 29 Enter the parameters for this element and press this softkey to select the desired contour characteristics e ai 158 e Y 14 8 abs e a2 0 Press this softkey to confirm Press this softkey to select a contour element of straight horizontal line Enter the parameters for this element and press this softkey to select the desired contour characteristics e L 5 Press this softkey to confirm Press this softkey to select a contour element of straight vertical line Enter the parameters for this element and press this softkey to confirm e Y 5 7 abs Press this softkey to select a contour element of straight horizontal line Enter the parameters for this element and press this softkey to confirm
272. rei E nia a eA aE e A EE i 5 PUMAU A MN eee EEEE EEEL E E TETE EEE T AEE EAA 5 1 Performing the simulation cece cecceeccc cence cece neces eee ence ee ee eden eee AAG EEE EAA EEE AAG S ee eda eeesa Odette aa eeesaaaeeesaaeeesaeeeeeas 5 2 OOM UM COMMU ON saci E ca sdtactous nica tesa cant ue bes aloes alten sonuesian e adiade E saudicda ne uavensastes 5 3 PrO T US S e E E E E E hk yetautuel Pekadrs esndasired 5 4 Starting and stopping interrupting a part program sennsenneennnennenrnenrnenrnrrrnnrrnnrrnrrinnrrnnrrnnrrnnrrnnrrnnren 5 5 Executing transferring a part program through the RS232 interface 5 5 1 Configuring RS232 COMMUNICATION cccceccceeeeeecaeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeesaeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeseaeeeeseeeeesaeeeeesaeeeeeseeeeesaeees 5 5 2 Executing from external through RS232 interface cc cccecsecceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeesaeeeeeseeeeesseeeeesaeeeeesaeeeesaees 593 Transferring from external through RS232 interface ccccccceecceeseeeeceeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeseeeeesseeeeesseeeeseeeeeeas 5 6 Machining at a specific POINK eee cccccceececeececeeeeeaeeeeceeeeseeeeeseeeeseeceseeeeseeeesseeeeseeceseeesseesseeeeseeeeseeeetanees DAVIN SVSIQIN Cele AA T A EE E A A E A A AE LAR ACID MAN E E E E EA E E A EE E E E A E E R FOG IE ari DONCIDISS sirsa a N 8 1 Fundamentals of programming ccccsescccceececceescecceusceccesececsuueeecaueeecsegecessaueeessueeessegeeessaueeesseesessagseesas 8 1 1 PrO ENA S E
273. ress this key on the MCP to activate the tool O 3 2 3 Assigning the handwheel Method 1 Assigning through the MCP 1 Select the desired operating area M MACHINE A 2 Press this key on the MCP to control the axis movement with external handwheels HAND WHEEL 3 Press the desired axis traversing key with the handwheel icon The handwheel is assigned X S lt 9 gt P N Programming and Operating Manual Milling O 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 N Method 2 Assigning through the PPU A DA 1 Select the desired operating area SHIFT ALARM H 2 Open the machine data window ach data 3 Press this softkey to open the basic machine data list 4 Use the cursor keys or the following softkey to search for the general machine data 14512 USER_DATA_HEX 16 Search 5 Select Bit7 by using the following key and cursor keys Press the following softkey to confirm your input wf OK 6 Press this vertical softkey to activate the value change Note that the control system restarts to Activate accept the new value S T After the control system has booted select the desired operating area M MACHINE Press this key on the MOP HAND WHEEL z 9 Press this vertical softkey to open the handwheel assignment window Handwhee l 10 Select the desired handwheel number with the cursor left right key 11 Press the relevant axis softkey for handwheel assignment or dese
274. ress this key to stop the execution of a part program The program currently running is aborted On the next program start the machining starts from the beginning RESET Press this key to interrupt the execution of a part program The axes stop running while the spindle a continues running On the next program start the machining is resumed from the interruption point 5 5 Executing transferring a part program through the RS232 interface 5 5 1 Configuring RS232 communication Communication tool SinuComPCIN To enable the RS232 communication between a SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED and a PC PG you must have the RS232 communication tool SinuComPCIN installed on your PC PG This tool is available in the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Toolbox RS232 communication settings Proceed as follows to configure the communication settings for the RS232 interface 1 Connect the control system with the PC PG using an RS232 cable 2 Select the desired operating area on the PPU PROGRAM MANAGER 3 Press this softkey to go to the RS232 directory RS232 4 Press this softkey to open the window for RS232 communication settings Settings O 5 Use this key to set the values in the following window as required ee Communications settings Device Baud rate Stop bits Parity Data bits End of transmis Confirn overurite Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 43 6 Press this softkey to
275. rog 5 If desired you can use this softkey to specify how you want the program to be executed for more Le eri information of the program control refer to Section Program control Page 39 6 Press this key to execute the program The program is reloaded continuously PA Either at the end of the program or after pressing the following key the program is automatically removed from the control system Programming and Operating Manual Milling 44 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 Note When using the external execution via RS232 the RS232 interface must not be active for another application This means for example the RS232 interface must not be active through the following operation SYSTEM STEP 7 AARM gt PLC gt connect 5 5 3 Transferring from external through RS232 interface Prerequisites e The tool SinuComPCIN has been installed on your PC PG e The RS232 communication has been successfully established between the control system and the PC PG Note The program files can be transferred only to the system drive N MPF or N CMA therefore before transfer make sure the drive identifier contained in the first line in the program file is N and the target directory in the second line is N_MPF or N_CMA If not you must change manually for example E Test mpf Notepad ile Edi aeai wiew Help aer GI0GS4600 XO 2100 N2 GO145 No 4 9193 N4 X 05 Z 9194 N5 X 0625 Z0 WA W0
276. rogramming can be used in blocks with GO or G1 linear contours Theoretically any number of straight line blocks can be connected and a rounding or a chamfer can be inserted between them Every straight line must be clearly identified by point values and or angle values Programming and Operating Manual Milling 88 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 Programming ANG Angle specification for defining a straight line RND Insert rounding value Radius of chamfer CHRe Insert chamfer value Side length of the chamfer Information The blueprint programming function is executed in the current plane G17 to G19 It is not possible to change the plane during blueprint programming If radius and chamfer are programmed in one block only the radius is inserted regardless of the programming sequence Angle ANG If only one end point coordinate of the plane is known for a straight line or for contours across multiple blocks the cumulative end point an angle parameter can be used for uniquely defining the straight line path The angle is always referred to the abscissa of the current plane G17 to G19 e g for G17 on the X axis Positive angles are aligned counter clockwise See the following specification of an angle for determination of a straight line using the example of the G17 plane End point in N20 not always known N10 G1 X1 Y1 N20 X2 ANG or N10 G1 X1 Y1 N20 Y2 ANG The values are only examples Programming a
277. roove It is basically not possible to create the same groove side geometry with a smaller cylindrical tool as it is with a larger one TRACYL minimizes the error To avoid problems of accuracy the tool radius should only be slightly smaller than half the groove width Note OFFN and TRC With TRAFO_TYPE_n 512 the value is effective under OFFN as an allowance for TRC With TRAFO_TYPE_n 513 half the groove width is programmed in OFFN The contour is retracted with OFFN TRC 8 3 Linear interpolation 8 3 1 Linear interpolation with rapid traverse GO Functionality The rapid traverse movement GO is used for rapid positioning of the tool but not for direct workpiece machining All the axes can be traversed simultaneously on a straight path For each axis the maximum speed rapid traverse is defined in machine data If only one axis traverses it uses its rapid traverse If two or three axes are traversed simultaneously the path velocity e g the resulting velocity at the tool tip must be selected such that the maximum possible path velocity with consideration of all axes involved results A programmed feedrate F word has no meaning for GO GO remains active until canceled by another instruction from this G group G1 G2 G3 Programming GO X Y Z Cartesian coordinates GO AP RP Polar coordinates GO AP RP Z Cylindrical coordinates 3dimensional Note Another option for linear programmin
278. rough the following steps 1 Select the desired operating area PROGRAM JE ATN 2 Open the vertical softkey bar for available milling cycles Slots 3 Press this softkey from the vertical softkey bar Circunf 4 Press this softkey to open the window for SLOT2 Parameterize the cycle as desired slots m actin S N MHPF 51 MPF Retract plane absolute 6 66008 SDIS 2 60008 DP 5 88888 DPR 2 80000 NUM 3 AFSL 36 66088 WID 6 60008 CPA 38 8888A CPO 70 00008 RAD 26 88888 STA1 165 88888 INDA 90 8888 FFD 308 8988A FFP1 308 80908A MID 3 88888 CDIR 3 o Cancel 6 20008 Programming and Operating Manual Milling 196 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 wf 5 Confirm your settings with this softkey The cycle is then automatically transferred to the OK program editor 9 6 9 Milling a rectangular pocket POCKET3 Programming POCKET3 _RTP _RFP _SDIS DP LENG WID CRAD PA PO STA MID FAL FALD FFP1 FFD _CDIR _VARI _MIDA AP1 AP2 AD RAD1 DP1 Parameters SDIS DP REAL Pocket depth absolute o Pocket length for dimensioning from the corner with sign PO REAL Reference point for the pocket absolute second axis of the plane _STA Angle between the pocket longitudinal axis and the first axis of the plane enter without sign Range of values 0 lt STA lt 180 _MID REAL Maximum infeed depth enter without sign REAL Finishing allowance a
279. rting position for the cycle is approached In both axes of the current plane the next end point of the first slot to be machined is approached at the height of the retraction plane in this applicate and then the applicate is lowered to the reference plane brought forward by the safety clearance e Each long hole is milled in a reciprocating motion The machining in the plane is performed using G1 and the feedrate programmed under FFP 1 The infeed to the next machining depth calculated using G1 internally in the cycle and using feedrate is performed at each reversal point until the final depth is reached e Retraction to the retraction plane using GO and approach to the next long hole on the shortest path e After the last long hole has been machined the tool is moved with GO to the position in the machining plane which was reached last and which is specified in the diagram below and the cycle is ended Explanation of the parameters For an explanation of the parameters RTP RFP and SDIS refer to Section Drilling centering CYCLE81 Page 126 DP and DPR long hole depth The depth of the long hole can be specified either absolute DP or relative DPR to the reference plane With relative specification the cycle calculates the resulting depth automatically using the positions of reference and retraction planes Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 185 NUM number Use the parameter N
280. s gt 0 if traction value 0 retraction value 1mm set DTD REAL Dwell time at final drilling depth Values gt 0 in seconds a lt 0 in revolutions 0 value same as DTB REAL Programmable limit distance for reinsertion in the drill hole for chip removal VARI 1 Values gt 0 programmable value applies 0 automatic calculation The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed and feedrate to the entered final drilling depth Function Deep hole drilling is performed with a depth infeed of a maximum definable depth executed several times increasing gradually until the final drilling depth is reached The drill can either be retracted to the reference plane safety clearance after every infeed depth for swarf removal or retracted in each case by 1 mm for chip breaking Sequence Position reached prior to cycle start The drilling position is the position in the two axes of the selected plane The cycle creates the following sequence Deep hole drilling with chip removal VARI 1 e Approach of the reference plane brought forward by the safety clearance by using GO Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 131 e Traversing to the first drilling depth with G1 the feedrate for which is derived from the feedrate defined with the program call which is subject to parameter FRF feedrate factor Dwell time at final drilling depth parameter DTB Retraction to the reference plane brought forward by
281. s 9 6 5 Milling a circular Spigot CYCLE77 cccccccccecccssecceeeceeeeaneesececeeeeeneeaueeceeeeaneesaeeseeeeeneeaneeteeetaneeaneeseeeaaes 9 6 6 Long holes located on a circle LONGHOLE cccccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeesseeeeesaeeeesaeeeneas 9 6 7 SITS ON cree ONT caesar tiaras caceaceseeeneoaniacesteacinoace ER 9 6 8 Circummeremiial SIOU SOU 2 srine nce deetocctenti caumbant s i eaaa 9 6 9 Milling a rectangular pocket POCKETS c cccccccssececceeeeecceseeeceeececssaseeeseeeessaueesseaseessegeeessesessanseeess 9 6 10 Milling a circular pocket POCKET4 cccceeccccceeeeeeeeeeeeee sense ee eeeeseeeeesaeeeeeseeeeessaeeeesaaeeesseeeeesaaeeeesaeeeeeas 9 6 11 Thread milmg C YCLEJO iemermmene nner mceenewemea et terme ren peti E eee er ee ere nee re 9 6 12 High speed settings CYCLE832 ccceccccssecccceeececeeececneeeeeceeeeeseeeeeeseueeeeseeeeessaeeeeseeeesseeseessaeeersanseesas 9 7 Error messages and error MANCIING kccscsusdvaoatendersavendaalbntiont ca bansndvacallandcitavsndwalbrduudtetaceudwabeSaudrsivavendvcbeduubtataceuts 9 7 1 eneral Tma NO IN cates gecics acetate re taeda ye tints eee dan neues aare dead ne aides eos sand naaen cane dando a ais 9 7 2 Enor nanding in the CY ClE Ss scncsasnicatocadeccqssnanmedunaaadcnstaanwehwnadsacnsseaanahuaamdemanantieaiuxadicsussraamehanauadsysinabentanadacaned 9 7 3 Overview Of cycle alarms ccccceceecee ce eeeee ce eeee teen cec
282. s RAD Only positive values are permitted for the radius FFCP Use the parameter FFCP to program a special feedrate for intermediate positioning on circular path STA1 and INDA starting and incremental angle The arrangement of the circumferential slots on the circle is defined by these parameters STA1 defines the angle between the positive direction of the first axis abscissa of the workpiece coordinate system active before the cycle was called and the first slot The INDA parameter contains the angle from one circumferential slot to the next If INDA 0 the incremental angle is calculated from the number of circumferential slots so that they are arranged equally around the circle Note A tool compensation must be programmed before the cycle is called Otherwise the cycle is aborted and alarm 61000 No tool compensation active is output If incorrect values are assigned to the parameters that determine the arrangement and size of the slots and thus cause mutual contour violation of the slots the cycle is not started The cycle is aborted and the error message 61104 Contour violation of slots elongated holes is output During the cycle the workpiece coordinate system is offset and rotated The actual value display in the workpiece coordinate system is always shown such that the circumferential slot currently being machined starts on the first axis of the current processing level and the zero point of the workpiece coordinate
283. s softkey and confirm the query Close the contour prse By pressing this softkey you can close the contour from the actual position with a straight line to contour the starting point Undo an input By selecting this softkey you can return to the main screen without transferring the last edited Cancel values to the system Contour symbol colors The meaning of the symbol colors in the contour chain on the left of the main screen is as follows Icon Significance Selected Symbol color black on a red background gt Element is defined geometrically Symbol color black on a light yellow background gt Element is not defined geometrically Not selected Symbol color black on a gray background gt Element is defined geometrically Symbol color white on a gray background gt Element is not defined geometrically A 14 4 Parameters for contour elements Parameters for programming straight lines WA 2 J E a Straight line vertical Alter native Trans to next element RND O 6 668 Free text input Contour allowance 6 606 Right O End point Y Bin ZOOM a Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 243 Absolute abs incremental inc end position in Xor Y You can specify a side based parallel contour direction allowance It is displayed as an allowance in the graphics window Transition element to the next contour is a chamfer The contour chain which displays the st
284. s from PO up to P2 are executed at this speed i e the motion parallel to the machining plane and the part of the infeed motion up to the safety clearance DISCL e Programmed feedrate F This feedrate is active from P3 or P2 if FAD is not programmed If no F word is programmed in the SAR block the velocity of the previous block will act e Programming using FAD Specify the feedrate for 6341 Infeed motion vertically to the machining plane from P2 to P3 G340 from point P2 or P3 to P4 If FAD is not programmed this part of the contour is traversed at the speed which is active modally from the preceding block in the event that no F command defining the speed is programmed in the SAR block Programming and Operating Manual Milling 120 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 e During retraction the roles of the modally effective feedrate from the previous block and the feedrate programmed in the SAR block are changed i e the actual retraction contour is traversed using the old feedrate and a new velocity programmed using the F word will apply correspondingly from P2 to PO Programming example Approach along a quadrant infeed using G341 and FAD N10 T1 D1 G17 G90 G94 Activate tool X Y plane N20 GO X0 YO Z30 Approach PO N30 G41 G341 G247 DISCL 5 DISR 13 FAD 500 X40 Y 10 Z 0 F800 N40 G1 X50 N50 G40 Gl X20 Y20 N60 M30 Explanation with regard to N30 By using GO from N20 the point P1 starting point of the quadrant correcte
285. s in a drilling pattern must be parameterized If the value of the quantity parameter is zero when the cycle is called or if this parameter is omitted from the parameter list alarm 61103 Number of holes is zero is issued and the cycle is aborted Checks in case of limited ranges of input values Generally there are no plausibility checks for defining parameters in the drilling pattern cycles 9 5 2 Row of holes HOLES Programming HOLES1 SPCA SPCO STA1 FDIS DBH NUM Parameters Data type SPCA REAL First axis of the plane abscissa of a reference point on the straight line ak eee SPCO REAL Second axis of the plane ordinate of this reference point absolute STA1 REAL Angle to the first axis of the plane abscissa Range of values 180 lt STA1S180 degrees FDIS REAL Distance from the first hole to the reference point enter without sign REAL Distance between the holes enter without sign Number of holes Function This cycle can be used to produce a row of holes i e a number of holes arranged along a straight line or a grid of holes The type of hole is determined by the drilling cycle that has already been called modally Sequence To avoid unnecessary travel the cycle calculates whether the row of holes is machined starting from the first hole or the last hole from the actual position of the plane axes and the geometry of the row of holes The drilling positions are then approached one after the other at
286. s key to open the program gt 4 Switch to AUTO mode AUTO 5 Press this softkey to open the program simulation window and the program control mode PRT is automatically activated If the control system is not in the correct operating mode a message will appear at the bottom of the screen as follows If this message appears repeat Step 4 Ly E th Please switch to operating mode Automatic Programming and Operating Manual Milling 38 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 Please note that the simulation function can be executed only when the control system is in the AUTO operating mode a 6 Press this key to start the standard simulation for the execution of the selected part program Softkey functions The following describes the functions of the softkeys on the simulation main screen _ gt 81 83 22 Auto 2012707704 N MPF ATEST MPF SI EM ENS Zoom H Reset ROY PRT ae Program simulation Delete window Cursor crs fine 900000 E Esie Shows the simulation track automatically Deletes the current simulation track Enters the lower level menu for block displaying Three Makes the cross hair move in large or small steps with displaying options are available the cursor All G17 All G18 All G19 Shows more options His almas BEES j Enables the material removal aterial hemoval simulation of a defined blank Zooms in the wh
287. s suitable for this type of approach Programming and Operating Manual Milling 172 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 See the following illustration for AS1 _AS2 Bypassing the contour on the right or left side Contour approached returned from along a straight line Contour approached returned from along a AS1 _AS2 quarter circle Contour approached 4 returned from along a wore semicircle a o Bypassing the contour centrally _AS1 _AS2 Ke Contour approached returned from along a straight line In the case of central G40 approach and retraction is only possible along a straight line _FF3 retraction feedrate Use the parameter _FF3 to define a retraction feedrate for intermediate positions in the plane in the open if the intermediate motions are to be carried out with feedrate G01 If no feedrate value is programmed the intermediate motions with G01 are carried out at surface feedrate Note A tool compensation must be programmed before the cycle is called Otherwise the cycle is aborted and alarm 61000 No tool compensation active is output Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 173 Programming example 1 Milling around a closed contour externally This program is used to mill the contour shown in the diagram below Contour starting point Programmed contour direction Final contour Final contour final machining allowance Parameters for the
288. save your settings If desired you can press the following softkey to reset the Save settings to defaults Default settings amp T Return to the RS232 main screen Back 8 Open the SinuComPCIN on your PC PG ocr 9 Press this button on the main screen and then select the desired baudrate from the list Note that this baudrate must be the same as that you have selected on the NC side 10 Save the settings with this button ave N 11 Return to the main screen of SinuComPCIN 4c 5 5 2 Executing from external through RS232 interface Prerequisites e The tool SinuComPCIN has been installed on your PC PG e The RS232 communication has been successfully established between the control system and the PC PG Proceed as follows to execute a part program from external through the RS232 interface E 1 Select the desired operating area on the PPU MANAGER 2 Press this softkey to go to the RS232 directory RS232 ous 3 Press this vertical softkey and the system automatically changes to AUTO mode in the machining a operating area 4 Press this button on the main screen of SinuComPCIN and select the desired program for oer Liziz execution for example Test mpf The program is transferred to the buffer memory on the control system and then displayed in the following window Block display Current program TEST HPF TiDi 1 HE 1 H3S266 1 Fieee T GeeGS4Ge6 XA 2168 f HZ G6iz5 f P
289. seeeececeeeeaneenneeeeeeeeneeaneeteeeeaneeaneeneeeaaes Anthmetic parameter R oshnce sc cce cha caeente atceecepeee cance E E EAE A EAER EA AE EAEAN AE AEEA AAAA AA RNAi iA Eoo iROCGIEDEIGE EO D E Reading and writing PLC Variables cccccccscccceseceeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeesseeeeeseeeeesseeeesaeeeeeseneeeeaeeeeesaeeees PrO aO eea E E EE EE E ane eeanees Unconditional program jUMpS tasrcviaiahd windcuceniendssveteinsdaiahdanualadiiniupiaied iueiabeniiadalcdivwetnsdnieas sini siinindsanbaselrdiauntand Conditional Program JUMPS casn aaa EE caste A Eai Programi example Tor JUMPS sssrinin EEEE AAAA EEN EEE EEA EEEE ENAA ERENER NEES Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 8 14 4 Jump destination for program JUMPS cccccecccceececeececseeeeceececeucecseeesseeeeseeeeseaeesseeeeseeeeseeeessnsessneessaeeess 8 15 Subroutine TECIMIQUC tedcccicesesctonetsncclzcedetieeens sdeccnen second e TEE NEE ERE Aree EEEa teen EREE SNEER 8 15 1 General inornmatlOM sesei Ei E E a EEEE E hE Eeer eE EIERE 8 15 2 Calling machining GY ClO S Gcm e are Ee ae 8 15 3 Modals bproutne call ins aE nR nE EER E cast ausankedasecnsdisaaaraabesmsendteasannabenuas 8 15 4 Execute external subroutine EXTCALL cccecccccseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeesaeeeeeseeeeesaeeeeeseeeeeeas 8 16 Timers and workpiece counters cccceccceecceecceececeeeceueceucecaeecuecsueesaeesuecsueesueessuessueeseessue
290. setting the bits in the user interface In the menus listed below the input and modification of data depends on the set protection level e Tool offsets e Work offsets e Setting data e RS232 settings e Program creation program correction The number of machine data and drive data which can be read or modified depends on the protection level You can set the protection level for these function areas with the display machine data USER_CLASS Setting password You can set the desired password through the following operating area SYSTEM Set AN gt password SHIFT ALARM m Programming and Operating Manual Milling 14 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 1 5 Setting user interface language Operating sequence SYSTEM 1 0 A SHIFT ALARM 2 Change language OK 2 Turning Note A i Select the desired operating area Press this softkey to open the user interface language selection window Use the cursor keys to select the desired language Selection of user interface language Simpl Chinese Hir fa eee Portuguese Portugu s Russian Pucckmn Press this softkey to confirm your selection Note The HMI Human Machine Interface is automatically restarted when a new language is selected on reference point approach When turning on off the CNC and the machine also observe the machine tool manufacturer s documentation since turning on and reference point approach are machine dependent f
291. sion free travel is ensured Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 97 See the following illustration for start of the tool radius compensation with G42 as example Contour Straight line P1 starting point of the contour Contour Circle Circle radius Tangent yi Tool radius uncorrected uncorrected j an Corrected tool Corrected tool path path PO starting point PO starting point The tool tip goes around the left of the workpiece when the tool runs clockwise using G41 the tool tip goes around the right of the workpiece when the tool runs counter clockwise using G42 Information As a rule the block with G41 G42 is followed by the block with the workpiece contour The contour description however may be interrupted by 5 blocks which lie between them and do not contain any specifications for the contour path in the plane e g only an M command or infeed motions Programming example N10 Tl N20 G17 D2 F300 Correction number 2 feed 300 mm min N25 X0 YO PO starting point N30 G1 G42 X11 Y11 Selection right of contour P1 N31 X20 Y20 Starting contour circle or straight line M30 After the selection it is also possible to execute blocks that contain infeed motions or M outputs N20 G1 G41 X11 Y11 Selection to the left of the contour N21 420 Infeed movement N22 X20 Y20 Starting contour circle or straight line Programming and Operating Manual
292. ssaeeseeeseessages 8 16 1 PRIUS UME os es cee ces cent EE A AEREA EEE AEEA AARE AEREE 8 16 2 Workpiece counter s nusnnsinsenuenrsnnrinrrrrrrsrirrnrirtrrsrr srir trtrrtrr nnr nrrrA Errr SAEn AEE EEEE S AEAEE Ere Errr nrn nnne renren en 8 17 Smooth approach and retraction cccccccseccccssccceeeeceeeeeceececeeceeseeeseeeeseucesseeeseeeeseucesssessueeeseeeeseneessaees 9 Eo e EE P A A ecm ie tcp meth rs E AA N A E A E A A E E orem am emenneceles 9 1 OVENVIEW Ol CYCI S ooann e EEE er ae eee eee 9 2 Programming Cycle Sese E E EE EE E E ieedes 9 3 Graphical cycle support in the program CCItOM ccccccccceecceeeececeececeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeseeceseecesseessueeeseeeessneesaeees 9 4 PING OV CICS A bonsaceaaetainenaabecenstenvnendants E A EE A A E 9 4 1 General WAP ORM AO Maio ss ceed vedas ao tence detiened ace dsseentud dedade adsevadalunnedasuaaseenieud sodadiensdannielvanedavesdunenceudsedeseonesnctas 9 4 2 BS CUCU SNS ges eee eet eae cate r e dente sex cee aterena onan stele cen aed onan ee acca E T e eTa 9 4 3 Drilling centering CYCLEGT siieccccaiasensceetcotareretateceusictocesasexeuduetelestentexesdrtachereatexced TEN E EAEn Ean ihian 9 4 4 Drilling counterborng G YGLEB2 sssenssnesiiie niin is e ea ieii 9 4 5 Deep hore drilling CY CLEGG i iia cccedesacsthasiesherneedencduntiosdatcadadenescaacaleienesdanntnebnshoasdeocasshunnedaeset Aea EE aain 9 4 6 Rigid tapping CYCLE84 000 ccecccc cee ee cence eee e cence eee esse eee tr
293. system is in the center of the circle After the cycle has been completed the workpiece coordinate system is in the same position again as it was before the cycle was called Contour violation Programming example Slots2 Use this program to machine three circumferential slots arranged at a circle with center point X60 Y60 and radius 42 mm in the XY plane The circumferential slots have the following dimensions Width 15 mm angle for slot length 70 degrees depth 23 mm The initial angle is O degree the incremental angle is 120 degrees The slot contours are machined to a final machining allowance of 0 5 mm the safety clearance in infeed axis Z is 2 mm the maximum depth infeed is 6 mm The slots are to be completely machined Speed and feedrate are to be the same when finishing The infeed when finishing is to be performed to slot depth Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 195 See the following programming example for circumferential slot N10 G17 G90 T1 D1 S600 M3 Specification of technology values N20 GO X60 Y60 Z5 Approach starting position N30 SLOT2 2 0 2 23 3 70 15 60 60 42 120 Cycle call 100 300 6 2 0 5 0 OF Reference plane SDIS retraction plane means Lowering in the infeed axis with GO to reference plane SDIS no longer applicable parameters VAR MIDF FFP2 and SSF omitted N40 M02 End of program Programming example 2 Slots2 Proceed th
294. t JOG feedrate and variable increment values Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 Displays the axis feedrate in the selected coordinate system Displays the axis position data in the relative coordinate system Displays the axis position data in the workpiece coordinate system 00O Displays the axis position data in the machine coordinate system Parameters in the JOG window Position Repos offset l FS 4 l HAY 6 666 mm 4 l HAG 6 666 mm H HAL 6 666 mm Displays the axes that exist in the machine coordinate system MCS workpiece coordinate system WCS or relative coordinate system REL If you traverse an axis in the positive or negative direction a plus or minus sign appears in the relevant field If the axis is already in the required position no sign is displayed Displays the current position of the axes in the selected coordinate system Displays the distance traversed by each axis in JOG mode from the interruption point in the condition of program interruption For detailed information about program interruption refer to Section Starting and stopping interrupting a part program Page 42 4 Displays the currently active tool number T with the current cutting edge number D Displays the actual axis feedrate and the setpoint mm min or mm rev Displays the actual value and the setpoint of the spindle speed r p m A 8 1 Setting the r
295. t every block in which miscellaneous function M01 is programmed stop It functions the same as pressing the following key M01 After activating this option the icon M01 appears immediately in the program status bar and this softkey is highlighted in blue Skips program blocks that are identified with a slash in front of the block number e g N100 After activating this option the icon SKP appears immediately in the program status bar and this softkey is highlighted in blue Available only in the following state Each block is decoded separately and a stop is performed at each block However for the thread blocks without dry run feedrate a stop is only performed at the end of the current thread block It functions the same as pressing the following key Bi SINGLE BLOCK After activating this option the icon SBL appears immediately in the program status bar and this softkey is highlighted in blue ROY The feedrate override switch also acts on the rapid traverse override active i It functions the same as pressing the following key ROV After activating this option the icon ROV appears immediately in the program status bar and this softkey is highlighted in blue fui liard Performs program test before real machining by checking the axis movement on the machine It func OFB disables the output of setpoints to spindles and suppresses all auxiliary functions After activating this option the icon
296. t the pocket edge enter without sign _FALD REAL Finishing allowance at the base enter without sign _FFP1 REAL Feedrate for surface machining _FFD REAL Feedrate for depth infeed _CDIR INT Milling direction enter without sign Values 0 Down cut milling in the spindle direction 1 Conventional milling 2 With G2 independent of spindle direction 3 With G3 _VARI INT Machining type UNITS DIGIT Values 1 roughing 2 finishing TENS DIGIT Values 0 Perpendicular to the pocket center with GO 1 Perpendicular to the pocket center with G1 2 Along a helix 3 Oscillation along the pocket longitudinal axis The other parameters can be selected as options They define the insertion strategy and the overlap for solid machining to be entered without sign _MIDA REAL Maximum infeed width as a value in solid machining in the plane REAL Blank dimension of pocket length Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 197 Data type REAL Blank dimension of pocket width REAL Blank pocket depth dimension from reference plane _RAD1 REAL Radius of the helical path on insertion relative to the tool center point path or maximum insertion angle for reciprocating motion REAL Insertion depth per 360 revolution on insertion along helical path Function The cycle can be used for roughing and finishing For finishing a face cutter is required The depth infeed will always start at the pocket cent
297. ted strips from the MCP 5 Insert the customized strips on the back of the MCP Note This manual assumes an 808D standard machine control panel MCP Should you use a different MCP the operation may be other than described herein 1 3 Screen layout H 36 iM into 2013 06 26 Status area NC HFG SIEMENS haset function Auxiliary unction Axis feedrate Application area Tip and softkey area oo o Bee as D s Alarms and messages Alarm and message area ee PA Standard machine data loaded 66666161H HHHHHHAZH M reton LLA peA ery ce HC HPF SIEMENS B Reset ROY TE mega channel 1 axis Z refer Displays active alarms with alarm text ae ee The alarm number is displayed in white lettering on a red background The associated alarm text is shown in red lettering An arrow indicates that several alarms are active The number to the right of the arrow indicates the total number of active alarms When more than one alarm is active the display scrolls through the alarms in sequence An acknowledgement symbol indicates the alarm cancel criterion Displays messages from NC programs Messages from NC programs do not have numbers and appear in green lettering READY TO START Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 13 1 4 Protection levels Overview The SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED provides a concept of protection levels for enabling data areas Different protection
298. tent remedy For example the choice of working plane may be made at another point in the NC program The real purpose of this and the following sections is to illustrate the conventional structure of an NC program Overview of typical dimensions The basis of most NC programs is a drawing with concrete dimensions When implementing in a NC program it is helpful to take over exactly the dimensions of a workpiece drawing into the machining program These can be e Absolute dimension G90 modally effective applies for all axes in the block up to revocation by G91 in a following block e Absolute dimension X AC value only this value applies only for the stated axis and is not influenced by G90 G91 This is possible for all axes and also for SPOS SPOSA spindle positionings and interpolation parameters I J K e Absolute dimension X DC value directly approaching the position by the shortest route only this value applies only for the stated rotary axis and is not influenced by G90 G91 This is also possible for SPOS SPOSA spindle positionings e Absolute dimension X ACP value approaching the position in positive direction only this value is set only for the rotary axis the range of which is set to 0 lt 360 degrees in the machine data e Absolute dimension X ACN value approaching the position in negative direction only this value is set only for the rotary axis the range of which is set to 0 lt 360 degrees in the machine data
299. ter the end point coordinate write an equality sign The value must be specified in round brackets Absolute dimensions are also possible for circle center points using AC Otherwise the reference point for the circle center is the circle starting point Programming example N10 G90 X20 290 Absolute dimensions N20 X75 Z IC 32 X dimensions remain absolute incremental Z dimension N180 G91 X40 220 Switch over to incremental dimensioning N190 X 12 Z AC 17 X remains incremental dimensioning Z absolute 8 2 4 Dimensions in metric units and inches G71 G70 G710 G700 Functionality If workpiece dimensions that deviate from the base system settings of the control system are present inch or mm the dimensions can be entered directly in the program The required conversion into the base system is performed by the control system Programming G70 Inch dimensions G71 Metric dimensions G700 Inch dimensions also for feedrate F G710 Metric dimensions also for feedrate F Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 53 Programming example N10 G70 X10 230 Inch dimensions N20 X40 250 G70 continues to act N80 G71 X19 217 3 metric dimensioning from this point on Information Depending on the default setting you have selected the control system interprets all geometric values as either metric or inch dimensions Tool offsets and settable work offsets including their display are a
300. the velocity while acceleration of the participating axes can be in jumps at block transitions e COMPCURV Block transitions have continuous acceleration This ensures both smooth velocity and acceleration of all axes at block transitions e COMPCAD The compression that uses a lot of computation time and memory space is optimized regarding surface quality and speed COMPCAD should only be used if measures to improve the surface cannot be taken by the CAD CAM program in advance COMPOF terminates the compressor function Syntax COMPON COMPCURV COMPCAD COMPOF Meaning COMPON Command to activate the compressor function COMPON Effective Modal COMPCURYV Command to activate the compressor function COMPCURV Effective Modal COMPCAD Command to activate the compressor function COMPCAD Effective Modal COMPOF Command to deactivate the currently active compressor function Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 61 Supplementary conditions e The NC block compression is generally executed for linear blocks G1 e Only blocks that comply with a simple syntax are compressed N G1X Y Z F scomment All other blocks are executed unchanged no compression e Motion blocks with extended addresses such as C 100 or A AC 100 are also condensed e The position values do not have to be programmed directly but can also be indirectly specified using parameter assignments e g X R
301. tion By using the cycle CYCLE90 you can produce internal or external threads The path when milling threads is based on a helix interpolation All three geometry axes of the current plane which you define before calling the cycle are involved in this motion Sequence for external thread Position reached prior to cycle start The starting position is any position from which the starting position at the outside diameter of the thread at the height of the retraction plane can be reached without collision This start position for thread milling with G2 lies between the positive abscissa and the positive ordinate in the current level i e in the first quadrant of the coordinate system For thread milling with G3 the start position lies between the positive abscissa and the negative ordinate namely in the fourth quadrant of the coordinate system The distance from the thread diameter depends on the size of the thread and the tool radius used CS ae Swe t ZN Position of the starting point when milling threads point when milling with G3 threads with G2 The cycle creates the following sequence of motions e Positioning on the starting point using GO at the height of the retraction plane in the applicate of the current plane e Infeed to the reference plane brought forward by the safety clearance for swarf removal using GO e Approach motion to the thread diameter along a circle path opposite to the direction G2 G3 programmed
302. tion The tool length compensations are effective immediately once the tool is active if no D number has been programmed with the values of D1 The offset is applied with the first programmed traverse of the respective length offset axis Observe any active G17 to G19 A tool radius compensation must also be activated by G41 G42 Programming example Tool change without M6 command only with T N5 G17 Determines the length offset axis here Z axis N10 T1 Tool 1 is activated with the associated D1 N11 GO Z For G17 Z is length offset axis the length offset compensation is overlaid here N50 T4 D2 Load tool 4 D2 from T4 is active N70 G0 Z DI Dl for tool 4 active only cutting edge changed Tool change using the M6 command N5 G17 Determines the length offset axis here Z axis N10 T1 Tool preselection N15 M6 Tool change T1 is active with the appropriate D1 N16 GO Z For G17 Z is length offset axis the length offset compensation is overlaid here N20 GO Z DZ D2 for tool 1 is active for G17 Z is length offset axis the difference of the D1 gt D2 length offset is overlaid here N50 T4 T4 tool preselection note Tl with D2 is still active N55 D3 M6 Tool change T4 is active with the appropriate D3 Contents of a compensation memory Enter the following in the offset memory e Geometrical dimensions length radius They consist of several components geometry wear The control
303. tion reached prior to cycle start The drilling position is the position in the two axes of the selected plane The cycle creates the following sequence of motions O gt G0 gt G63 RTP RFP SDIS RFP DP RFP DPR e Approach of the reference plane brought forward by the safety clearance by using GO e Tapping to the final drilling depth e Dwell time at tapping depth parameter DTB e Retraction to the reference plane brought forward by the safety clearance e Retraction to the retraction plane with GO Sequence of operations Tapping with compensating chuck with encoder Position reached prior to cycle start The drilling position is the position in the two axes of the selected plane Programming and Operating Manual Milling 140 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 The cycle creates the following sequence of motions gt GO gt G33 p gt G4 PT ILOILINIOU0 RTP RFP SDIS RFP DP RFP DPR e Approach of the reference plane brought forward by the safety clearance by using GO e Tapping to the final drilling depth e Dwell time at thread depth parameter DTB e Retraction to the reference plane brought forward by the safety clearance e Retraction to the retraction plane with GO Explanation of the parameters For the parameters RTP RFP SDIS DP DPR refer to Section Drilling centering CYCLE81 Page 126 DTB dwell time The dwell time must be programmed in seconds SDR direction of rotation for
304. tive appears and the cycle is aborted If the tool radius 0 or negative the cycle is also aborted and this alarm is issued With internal threads the tool radius is monitored and alarm 61105 Cutter radius too large is output and the cycle is aborted Programming example Internal thread By using this program you can mill an internal thread at point X60 Y50 of the G17 plane See the following programming example for internal thread Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 209 DEF REAL RTP 48 RFP 40 SDIS 5 DP 0 DPR 40 DIATH 60 KDIAM 50 DEF REAL PIT 2 FFR 500 CPA 60 CPO 50 DEF INT CDIR 2 TYPTH 0 N10 G90 GO G17 X0 YO 280 S5200 M3 N20 T5 D1 N30 CYCLE90 RTP RFP SDIS DP DPR DIATH KDIAM PIT FFR CDIR TYPTH CPA CPO N40 GO G90 2100 N50 M02 9 6 12 High speed settings CYCLE832 Programming CYCLE832 TOL TOLM 1 Parameters Definition of the variable with value assignments Approach starting position Specification of technology values Cycle call Approach position after cycle End of program Data type REAL Tolerance of machining axes TOLM INT Machining type selection 0 Deselect 1 Finishing 2 Semi finishing 3 Roughing PSYS Internal parameter only the default value 1 is possible Function Use CYCLE832 to machine free form surfaces that involve high requirements for velocity precision and surface quality This cycle funct
305. to machine slots arranged on a circle The longitudinal axis of the slots is aligned radially In contrast to the long hole a value is defined for the slot width Sequence Position reached prior to cycle start The starting position can be any position from which each of the slots can be approached without collision Programming and Operating Manual Milling 188 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 The cycle creates the following sequence of motions e Approach of the position at the beginning of the cycle indicated in the SLOT1 sequence illustration with GO e Complete machining of a slot is carried out in the following steps Approach of the reference plane brought forward by the safety clearance by using GO Infeed to the next machining depth with G1 and with feedrate value FFD Solid machining of the slot to the finishing allowance at the slot edge with feedrate value FFP1 Then finishing with feedrate value FFP2 and spindle speed SSF along the contour according to the machining direction programmed under CDIR The depth infeed is always carried out at the same position in the machining plane until the end depth of the slot is reached e Retract tool to the retraction plane and move to the next slot with GO e After the last slot has been machined the tool is moved with GO to the end position in the machining plane which is specified in the diagram below and the cycle is ended Explanation of the parameters For
306. tor 4 Press this softkey to open the contour editor window P Cont Initially you define a contour starting point see Section Defining a starting point The contour is then programmed step by step see Section Programming example turning Softkey functions gt Cae N MPFATEST MPF Start point Alter Selected plane native Start point x 8 8000 abs Y 6 666 abs Approach start pt GA O Free text input XY G17 ZX G18 YZ G19 Ian ZOOM elenent Auto ET Programming and Operating Manual Milling 238 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 An element was selected using the cursor keys This Press this softkey to toggle between the selections softkey enlarges the image section of the selected This softkey functions the same as pressing the element following key Zooms the graphic in out automatically Defines a pole for contour programming in polar coordinates The pole can only be entered in absolute Cartesian coordinates When you select this softkey you can move the red Exits the contour editor and returns to the program cross hair with the cursor keys and choose a picture editor window without transferring the last edited detail to display When you deactivate this softkey the values to the main program input focus is positioned in the contour chain again If you press this softkey help graphics are displayed Saves the settings for the start point in addition to the relevant paramete
307. ttings with this softkey The cycle is then automatically transferred to the program OK editor as a separate block 9 4 7 Tapping with compensating chuck CYCLE840 Programming CYCLE840 RTP RFP SDIS DP DPR DTB SDR SDAC ENC MPIT PIT AXN Parameters Safety clearance enter without sign DP REAL Final drilling depth absolute REAL Final drilling depth relative to the reference plane enter without sign REAL Dwell time at thread depth chip breakage Direction of rotation for retraction Values 0 automatic direction reversal 3 or 4 for M3 or M4 Direction of rotation after end of cycle Values 3 4 or 5 for M3 M4 or M5 Tapping with without encoder Values 0 with encoder 1 without encoder Thread lead as a thread size signed Range of values 3 for M3 to 48 for M48 Thread lead as a value signed Range of values 0 001 2000 000 mm Tool axis Values 1 1st axis of the current plane 2 2nd axis of the current plane 3 3rd axis of the current plane 1 The definition of the 1st 2nd and 3rd axes depends upon the current plane selected Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 139 Function The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed and feedrate to the entered final thread depth This cycle is used to program tapping with the compensating chuck e Without encoder e With encoder Sequence Tapping with compensating chuck without encoder Posi
308. ughing 2 finishing TENS DIGIT Values 1 parallel to the first axis of the plane in one direction 2 parallel to the second axis of the plane in one direction 3 parallel to the first axis of the plane with alternating direction 4 parallel to the second axis of the plane with alternating direction _FDP 1 REAL Overrun travel in the direction of the plane infeed incremental enter without sign Function Use CYCLE71 to mill any rectangular surface The cycle differentiates between roughing machining the surface in several steps until reaching the final machining allowance and finishing milling the end face in one step The maximum infeed in width and depth can be specified The cycle operates without cutter radius compensation The depth infeed is performed in the open See the following illustration for possible face milling strategies Possible solid machining strategies for face milling Sequence Position reached prior to cycle start Starting position is any position from which the infeed point can be approached at the height of the retraction plane without collision Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 163 The cycle creates the following sequence of motions GO is applied to approach the infeed point at the current position level The reference plane brought forward by the safety distance is then also approached with GO to this position Then also with GO feeding to the m
309. unctions Operating sequence 1 2 Switch on the power supply for the control system and the machine Release all emergency stop buttons on the machine By default the control system is in the REF POINT window after booting M Ga HC HPF A Reset ROY Reference point Mxlo 8 009 TA Mylo 8 09g F MZlo 8 09g ls The symbol 7 shown on the screen indicates that the axis is not yet referenced If an axis is not referenced the symbol is always visible in the current machining operating area Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 15 3 Press the corresponding axis traversing keys to traverse each axis to the reference point If an axis is referenced a symbol is shown next to the axis identifier and is visible only in the REF POINT window ran M Ref Point HC HPF NI ht A Reset ROY 9 P N HCS Reference point MA le 0 Bae a My le 0 Bae a MZ1le 0 00A i Note that axis traversing directions and axis key functions are defined by the machine manufacturer 3 Setting up 3 1 Coordinate systems As a rule a coordinate system is formed from three mutually perpendicular coordinate axes The positive directions of the coordinate axes are defined using the so called 3 finger rule of the right hand The coordinate system is related to the workpiece and programming takes place independently of whether the tool or the workpiece is being traversed
310. under CDIR e Thread milling along a helix path using G2 G3 and the feedrate value FFR Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 207 e Retraction motion along a circle path in the opposite direction of rotation G2 G3 at the reduced feedrate FFR e Retraction to the retraction plane along the applicate using GO Sequence for internal thread Position reached prior to cycle start The starting position is any position from which the center point of the thread at the height of the retraction plane can be reached without collision The cycle creates the following sequence of motions e Positioning on the center point using GO at the height of the retraction plane in the applicate of the current plane e Infeed to the reference plane brought forward by the safety clearance for swarf removal using GO e Approach to an approach circle calculated internally in the cycle using G1 and the reduced feedrate FFR e Approach motion to the thread diameter along a circle path according to the direction G2 G3 programmed under CDIR e Thread milling along a helix path using G2 G3 and the feedrate value FFR e Retraction motion along a circle path in the same direction of rotation at the reduced feedrate FFR e Retraction to the center point of the thread using GO e Retraction to the retraction plane along the applicate using GO Thread from bottom to top For technological reasons it can also be reasonable to machine a thread fro
311. up to the entered drilling depth With drilling 2 oriented spindle stop is activated once the drilling depth has been reached Then the programmed retraction positions are approached in rapid traverse and from there the retraction plane Sequence Position reached prior to cycle start The drilling position is the position in the two axes of the selected plane The cycle creates the following sequence of motions e Approach of the reference plane brought forward by the safety clearance by using GO e Traversing to final drilling depth with G1 and the feedrate programmed prior to the cycle call e Dwell time to final drilling depth e Oriented spindle stop at the spindle position programmed under POSS e Traverse retraction path in up to three axes with GO e Retraction in the drilling axis to the reference plane brought forward by the safety distance by using GO e Retraction to the retraction plane with GO initial drilling position in both axes of the plane Explanation of the parameters For the parameters RTP RFP SDIS DP DPR refer to Section Drilling centering CYCLE81 Page 126 O gt GO G1 E gt G4 EISPOS RTE RFP SDIS RFP DP RPO RFP DPR RPA RPAP DTB dwell time The dwell time to the final drilling depth chip breakage is programmed under DTB in seconds SDIR direction of rotation With this parameter you determine the direction of rotation with which boring is performed in the cycle If
312. using G332 The drilling depth is specified by specifying one of the axes X Y or Z the thread pitch is specified via the relevant I J or K For G332 the same lead is programmed as for G331 Reversal of the spindle direction of rotation occurs automatically The spindle speed is programmed with S and without M3 M4 Before tapping the thread using G331 G332 the spindle must be switched to the position controlled mode with SPOS Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 81 Right hand or left hand thread The sign of the thread lead determines the direction of spindle rotation Positive right hand as with M3 Negative left hand as with M4 Note A complete thread tapping cycle with thread interpolation is provided with the standard cycle CYCLE84 See the following illustration for tapping using G331 G332 Axis velocity For G331 G332 the velocity of the axis for the thread length results from the spindle speed and the thread lead The feedrate F is not relevant It is however stored However the maximum axis velocity rapid traverse defined in the machine data can not be exceeded This will result in an alarm Programming example metric thread 5 lead as per table 0 8 mm rev hole already premachined N5 G54 GO G90 X10 Y10 Z5 Approach Starting point N10 SPOS 0 Spindle in position control N20 G331 Z2 25 K0 8 S600 Tapping K positive clockwise of the spindle end point Z 25
313. vertical softkey to switch between the metric and inch dimension systems nm gt inch J Press this softkey to confirm your change OK Press this softkey to exit Cancel A 9 The help system The SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED control system provides comprehensive online help Whenever necessary you can call the help system from any operating area The help system Press this key or the key combination lt ALT gt lt H gt to call the help system from any operating area If a context sensitive help exists Window opens otherwise Window opens all 11 62 15 Ref Point 2612 11 29 SIEHENS manual Show Search Exit Sp Po sho E opic FoF Manua Calls the context sensitive help for the current topic e Current operating window e NC drive alarms selected in the alarm specific operation area e Machine data or setting data selected e Drive data selected Calls the machine manufacturer developed PDF manual Displays all available help information e Siemens help manuals e Machine manufacturer developed help manuals if any Programming and Operating Manual Milling 230 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 Softkeys in Window Ta far Use this softkey to select cross references topic A cross reference is marked by the characters gt gt lt Note This softkey is displayed only if the current page contains a cross reference i Searches for a term in the current topic Cont inue Conti
314. vidual cycles They are therefore programmed in each cycle separately 9 4 2 Requirements Call and return conditions Drilling cycles are programmed independently of the actual axis names The drilling position must be approached in the higher level program before the cycle is called The required values for feedrate spindle speed and direction of spindle rotation must be programmed in the part program if there are no defining parameters in the drilling cycle The G functions and the current data record active before the cycle was called remain active beyond the cycle Plane definition In the case of drilling cycles it is generally assumed that the current workpiece coordinate system in which the machining operation is to be performed is to be defined by selecting plane G17 G18 or G19 and activating a programmable offset The drilling axis is always the axis of this coordinate system which stands vertically to the current plane A tool length compensation must be selected before the cycle is called Its effect is always perpendicular to the selected plane and remains active even after the end of the cycle Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 125 See the following illustration for length compensation Drilling axis S O 2 G el z Q O ace O D Dwell time programming The parameters for dwell times in the drilling cycles are always assigned to the F word and must
315. wance must always be specified for finishing to ensure that the tool can be retracted and then fed to the starting point of the next cut without collision If gt 0 the parameter is ignored for finishing _VARI machining type Use the parameter _VARI to define the machining type Possible values are e Units digit 1 roughing to finishing allowance 2 finishing e Tens digit 1 parallel to the first axis of the plane unidirectional 2 parallel to the second axis of the plane unidirectional 3 parallel to the first axis of the plane with alternating direction 4 parallel to the second axis of the plane with alternating direction If a different value is programmed for the parameter _VARI the cycle is aborted after output of alarm 61002 Machining type defined incorrectly Note A tool compensation must be programmed before the cycle is called Otherwise the cycle is aborted and alarm 61000 No tool compensation active is output Programming example Face milling Parameters for the cycle call DP Milling depth ttm S _PA PAs Starting point of the rectangle X 100 mm POs Starting point of the rectangle Y 100 mm _LENG Rectangle dimensions Programming and Operating Manual Milling 166 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 Finishing allowance in depth No finishing allowance Feedrate in the plane 4000 mm min Machining type 31 Roughing parallel to the X axis with alternating direction Overrun on last cut as determined by th
316. with G41 N30 MIRROR XO Direction changed in X N40 L10 Mirrored contour N50 MIRROR YO Direction changed in Y N60 L10 N70 AMIRROR XO Mirroring once more but now in X N80 L10 Twice mirrored contour N90 MIRROR Mirroring off Subroutine call see Section Subroutine technique Page 110 Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 59 8 2 10 Workpiece clamping settable work offset G54 to G59 G500 G53 G153 Functionality The settable work offset specifies the position of the workpiece zero on the machine offset of the workpiece zero with respect to the machine zero This offset is determined upon clamping of the workpiece into the machine and must be entered in the corresponding data field by the operator The value is activated by the program by selection from six possible groupings G54 to G59 Note Workpiece clamping at an angle is possible by entering the angles of rotation around the machine axes These rotation portions are activated with the offset G54 to G59 Programming G54 to G59 1 to 6th settable work offset G500 Settable work offset OFF modal G53 settable work offset OFF non modal also suppresses programmable offset G153 settable work offset OFF non modal additionally suppresses base frame See the following illustration for settable work offset Z1 Machine W workpiece zero Z M machine zero Workpiece Y Workpiece Y1 Machine X1 Ma
317. with a maximum of 128 cutting edges and create a maximum of nine cutting edges for each tool Operating sequence 1 Select the desired operating area 2 Open the tool list window a Select the tool to which you desire to add a cutting edge Programming and Operating Manual Milling 218 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 4 Open the lower level menu for cutting edge settings Edges New 5 Press this softkey to create a new cutting edge for the selected tool The control system edge automatically adds the new cutting edge to the tool list a Jog Type T D Geometry Length Radius Hh i i 6 688 1 666 dd 2 6 608 4 08 6 You can enter different lengths and radii for each cutting edge see Section Creating a new tool Page 19 for more information Other options for setting up the cutting edges Reset Reset all offset values of the selected cutting edge to zero ci Delete Delete the selected cutting edge edge A 2 Calibrating the tool probe Overview To be able to measure your tools automatically you must first determine the position of the tool probe based on the machine zero position Operating sequences Setting the probe data 1 Select the desired operating area M MACHINE NNN 2 Switch to JOG mode VL JOG jess 3 Open the lower level menu for tool measurement if tool H 4 Open the auto tool measurement window Easure auto Dars 5 Press this vertical softkey to open the probe data setting
318. with the following parameters and press this softkey to confirm auent e Programming plane G17 e X 0 abs e Y 5 7 abs 6 Press this softkey to select a contour element of circular arc Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 253 Dialog select Accept element x 7 w y Accept element Tangent trans Accept element a Lol Tangent trans Dialog select Accept element ae Tangent trans Dialog select Accept element R 7 w y 254 10 11 12 13 15 16 17 18 19 20 Enter the parameters for this element and press this softkey to select the desired contour characteristics e Direction of rotation counter clockwise e R 9 5 e 0 abs e RND 2 Press this softkey to confirm Press this softkey to select a contour element of straight line in any direction Enter the parameters for this element and press this softkey to confirm e ai 30 Press this softkey to select a contour element of circular arc Enter the parameters for this element and press this softkey to select the desired contour characteristics e Direction of rotation clockwise e R 2 e J 4 65 abs Press this softkey to confirm Press this softkey to select a contour element of circular arc Enter the parameters for this element and press this softkey to select the desired contour characteristics e Di
319. y Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 201 _MIDA max infeed width Use this parameter to define the maximum infeed width when solid machining in a plane Analogously to the known calculation method for the infeed depth equal distribution of the total depth with maximum possible value the width is distributed equally maximally with the value programmed under _MIDA If this parameter is not programmed or has value 0 the cycle will internally use 80 of the milling tool diameter as the maximum infeed width Note Applies if the calculated width infeed from edge machining is recalculated when reaching the full pocket in the depth otherwise the width infeed calculated at the beginning is kept for the whole cycle _AP1 _AP2 _AD blank dimensions Use the parameters _AP1 AP2 and _AD to define the blank dimensions incremental of the pocket in the plane and in the depth _RAD 1 radius Use the _RAD1 parameter to define the radius of the helical path relative to the tool center point path or the maximum insertion angle for the reciprocating motion _DP1 insertion depth Use the parameter _DP1 to define the infeed depth when inserting to the helical path A tool compensation must be programmed before the cycle is called Otherwise the cycle is aborted and alarm 61000 No tool compensation active is output Internally in the cycle a new current workpiece coordinate system is used which
320. you call the milling cycles a tool compensation must be activated The appropriate values for feedrate spindle speed and direction of rotation of spindle must be programmed in the part program if the appropriate parameters are not provided in the milling cycle Programming and Operating Manual Milling 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 161 The center point coordinates for the milling pattern or the pocket to be machined are programmed in a rectangular coordinate system The G functions active prior to the cycle call and the current programmable frame remain active beyond the cycle Plane definition Milling cycles generally assume that the current workpiece coordinate system has been defined by selecting a plane G17 G18 or G19 and activating a programmable frame if necessary The infeed axis is always the third axis of this coordinate system See the following illustration for plane and axis assignment Messages with regard to the machining state During the execution of the milling cycles various messages that refer to the machining status are displayed on the screen The following messages are possible e Elongated hole lt No gt first figure being machined e Slot lt No gt other figure being machined e Circumferential slot lt No gt last figure being machined In each case lt No gt stands for the number of the figure that is currently being machined These message do not interrupt the program execution a
321. ystem provides a relative coordinate system This coordinate system is used to set reference points that can be freely selected and have no influence on the active workpiece coordinate system All axis movements are displayed relative to these references Clamping the workpiece For machining the workpiece is clamped on the machine The workpiece must be aligned such that the axes of the workpiece coordinate system run in parallel with those of the machine Any resulting offset of the machine zero with reference to the workpiece zero is determined along the X Y and Z axis and entered in a data area intended for the settable work offset In the NC program this offset is activated during program execution for example using a programmed G54 command The figure below shows an example of the workpiece clamped on the machine Z machine W Workpiece zero M Machine zero workpiece workpiece machine machine Current workpiece coordinate system The programmed work offset TRANS Page 56 can be used to generate an offset with reference to the workpiece coordinate system resulting in the current workpiece coordinate system Programmable offset TRANS current W Workpiece zero Programming and Operating Manual Milling 18 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 3 2 Setting up tools 3 2 1 Creating a new tool Note The control system supports a maximum of 64 tools or 128 cutting edges Operating sequence 2 1 Select the des
322. ze the cycle as desired drilling I tn giidi to N MPF 1 MPF 1 CYCLE82 Retract plane absolute 3 66668 2 66606 5 66068 6 86600 6 26666 Cancel ore 5 Confirm your settings with this softkey The cycle is then automatically transferred to the program OK editor as a separate block 9 4 5 Deep hole drilling CYCLE83 Programming CYCLE83 RTP RFP SDIS DP DPR FDEP FDPR DAM DTB DTS FRF VARI AXN MDEP VRT DTD DIS1 Parameters Data type REAL Retraction plane absolute REAL Reference plane absolute SDIS REAL Safety clearance enter without sign REAL Final drilling depth absolute DPR REAL Final drilling depth relative to the reference plane enter without sign Programming and Operating Manual Milling 130 6FC5398 4DP10 0BA1 01 2014 Data type Description FDEP REAL First drilling depth absolute FDPR REAL First drilling depth relative to the reference plane enter without sign Amount of degression enter without sign gt 0 degression as value lt 0 degression factor 0 no degression ee Dwell time at drilling depth chip breakage gt 0 in seconds Po pene o n gt 0 in seconds ie gn raided 0 001 e VARI Machining type Chip breakage 0 Chip removal 1 e Values 1 1st geometrical axis 2 2nd geometrical axis 3 3rd geometrical axis a e MDEP REAL Minimum drilling depth only in connection with degression factor REAL Variable retraction value for chip breakage VARI 0 Value

Programming and Operating Manual (Milling)

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents